2014 Lancia Voyager Owner's Manual

ENGLISH

Owner Handbook

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. Lancia reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your Lancia dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine. WHY CHOOSE GENUINE PARTS

We really know your car because we invented, designed and built it: we know every single detail. At Lancia Service authorised workshops you can find technicians who are trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all your service requirements. Lancia workshops are always close to you for your servicing operations, repairs and seasonal checks and our experts will offer practical recommendations for keeping your car in the best possible condition. When you use Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new car over time. Always ask for Genuine Parts and insist on them being fitted to your car. We recommend them because we know they are derived from our continued commitment to research and development and our use of highly innovative technologies. For these reasons, you can rely on Genuine Parts because they are the only ones designed specifically for your car.

All our Genuine Parts undergo rigorous testing, both in design and build stages, by specialists who check the use of cutting-edge materials and test their reliability. This guarantees performance and safety in the long term for both you and the passengers in your automobile. Always insist on a Genuine Part and check that it has been used. Dear Customer, Thank you for choosing LANCIA and congratulations on your choice of a LANCIA Voyager. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your car and use it in the best possible way. You should read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you get the most from the technological features of your LANCIA. Carefully read the warnings and indications marked with the following symbols: personal safety;

car safety;

environmental protection.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that LANCIA offers to its customers: • the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity • the range of additional services available to LANCIA customers. Enjoy the read. Happy motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all versions of the LANCIA Voyager; please consider only the information rel- evant to your version, engine and configuration.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ...... 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ...... 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ...... 73

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...... 165

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...... 227

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ...... 285

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ...... 303

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ...... 339

9 INDEX ...... 347

1 2 1

INTRODUCTION

• INTRODUCTION ...... 4 • IMPORTANT NOTICE...... 4 • HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...... 6 • WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...... 7 • VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ...... 7 • VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ...... 7

3 INTRODUCTION Operating this vehicle at excessive IMPORTANT NOTICE speeds or while intoxicated may result Congratulations on selecting your in loss of control, collision with other ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN new LANCIA vehicle. Be assured that vehicles or objects, going off the road, THIS PUBLICATION IS BASED ON it represents precision workmanship, or overturning; any of which may lead THE LATEST INFORMATION distinctive styling, and high quality - to serious injury or death. Also, failure AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLI- all essentials that are traditional to to use seat belts subjects the driver CATION APPROVAL. THE RIGHT our vehicles. and passengers to a greater risk of IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVI- SIONS AT ANY TIME. Before you start to drive this vehicle, injury or death. read this Owner's Manual and all the To keep your vehicle running at its This Owner's Manual has been pre- supplements. Be sure you are familiar best, have your vehicle serviced at pared with the assistance of service with all vehicle controls, particularly recommended intervals by an autho- and engineering specialists to ac- those used for braking, steering, and rized dealer who has the qualified per- quaint you with the operation and transmission shifting. Learn how your sonnel, special tools, and equipment maintenance of your new vehicle. It is vehicle handles on different road sur- to perform all service. supplemented by a Warranty Infor- faces. Your driving skills will improve mation Booklet and various with experience, but as in driving any The manufacturer and its distributors customer-oriented documents. You vehicle, take it easy as you begin. Al- are vitally interested in your complete are urged to read these publications ways observe local laws wherever you satisfaction with this vehicle. If you carefully. Following the instructions drive. encounter a service or warranty prob- and recommendations in this Owner's lem, which is not resolved to your Manual will help assure safe and en- NOTE: After reviewing the owner satisfaction, discuss the matter with joyable operation of your vehicle. information, it should be stored in your dealer's management. the vehicle for convenient refer- After you have read the Owner’s encing and remain with the vehicle Your authorized dealer will be happy Manual, it should be stored in the when sold. to assist you with any questions about vehicle for convenient reference and your vehicle. remain with the vehicle when sold. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.

4 The manufacturer reserves the right the driving safety of your vehicle will Nor do they cover the cost of any to make changes in design and speci- not be impaired by the attachment or repairs or adjustments that might be fications, and/or to make additions to installation of such parts. Even if such caused or needed because of the in- or improvements in its products with- parts are officially-approved (for ex- stallation or use of non-manufacturer out imposing any obligations upon it- ample, by a general operating permit parts, components, equipment, mate- self to install them on products previ- for the part or by constructing the rials, or additives. Nor do your war- ously manufactured. part in an officially approved design), ranties cover the costs of repairing or if an individual operating permit damage or conditions caused by any The Owner's Manual illustrates and was issued for the vehicle after the changes to your vehicle that do not describes the features that are stan- attachment or installation of such comply with the manufacturers speci- dard or available as extra cost op- parts, it cannot be implicitly assumed fications. tions. Therefore, some of the equip- that the driving safety of your vehicle ment and accessories in this Original parts and accessories and is unimpaired. Therefore, neither ex- publication may not appear on your other products approved by the perts nor official agencies are liable. vehicle. manufacturer, including qualified ad- The manufacturer only assumes re- vice, are available at your authorized NOTE: Be sure to read the Own- sponsibility when parts, which are ex- dealer. er's Manual first before driving pressly authorized or recommended your vehicle and before attaching by the manufacturer, are attached or When it comes to service, remember or installing parts/accessories or installed at an authorized dealer. The that your authorized dealer knows making other modifications to the same applies when modifications to your vehicle best, has the factory- vehicle. the original condition are subse- trained technicians and genuine quently made on the manufacturer's parts, and is interested in your satis- In view of the many replacement parts vehicles. faction. and accessories from various manufacturers available on the market, the Your warranties do not cover any part Copyright © FIAT Group Automo- manufacturer cannot be certain that that the manufacturer did not supply. biles S.p.A.3

5 HOW TO USE THIS ordered, certain descriptions and il- Consult the following table for a de- MANUAL lustrations may differ from your vehi- scription of the symbols that may be cle's equipment. used on your vehicle or throughout Consult the Table of Contents to de- this Owner's Manual: termine which section contains the in- The detailed index at the back of this formation you desire. Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment

6 WARNINGS AND VEHICLE CAUTIONS MODIFICATIONS/ This Owners Manual contains ALTERATIONS WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or WARNING! bodily injury. It also contains CAU- TIONS against procedures that could Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its result in damage to your vehicle. If Vehicle Identification Number you do not read this entire Owners roadworthiness and safety and may Manual, you may miss important in- lead to a collision resulting in seri- formation. Observe all Warnings and ous injury or death. Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner Stamped VIN Location of the instrument panel, visible NOTE: It is illegal to remove or through the windshield. This number alter the VIN. is also located on the right side rear sliding door sill (under door sill moulding) and on the Automobile In- formation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

7 8 2

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS ...... 13 • IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM) — (for versions/markets where provided) ...... 13 • KEYFOB...... 13 • REMOVING KEY FOB FROM IGNITION ...... 14 • KEY-IN-IGNITION REMINDER ...... 14 • STEERING WHEEL LOCK — (for versions/markets where provided) ...... 15 • TO MANUALLY LOCK THE STEERING WHEEL ...... 15 • TO RELEASE THE STEERING WHEEL LOCK . .15 • SENTRY KEY® ...... 15 • REPLACEMENT KEYS ...... 16 • CUSTOMER KEY PROGRAMMING ...... 16 • GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 16 • VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — (for versions/ markets where provided) ...... 16 • REARMING OF THE SYSTEM ...... 17 • TO ARM THE SYSTEM...... 17 • TO DISARM THE SYSTEM...... 17 • ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...... 18

9 • REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 18 • REMOTE UNLOCK DOORS AND LIFTGATE . . .19 • REMOTE LOCK DOORS AND LIFTGATE ...... 19 • REMOTE KEY UNLOCK ON FIRST PRESS ....19 • POWER OPEN/CLOSE POWER LIFTGATE (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 20 • POWER OPEN/CLOSE LEFT POWER SLIDING DOOR (for versions/markets, where provided) . .20 • POWER OPEN/CLOSE RIGHT POWER SLIDING DOOR (for versions/markets, where provided. . .20 • TURN OFF FLASH LIGHTS WITH RKE LOCK (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 20 • PROGRAMMING ADDITIONAL TRANSMITTERS ...... 21 • TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . .21 • GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 22 • DOOR LOCKS ...... 22 • MANUAL DOOR LOCKS ...... 22 • POWER DOOR LOCKS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 23 • KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ ...... 24 • WINDOWS ...... 26 • POWER VENT WINDOWS ...... 26 • POWER WINDOWS ...... 26 • WIND BUFFETING ...... 29

10 • SLIDING SIDE DOOR ...... 29 • POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR (for versions/ markets, where provided) ...... 29 • SLIDING SIDE DOOR CHILD PROTECTION LOCK ...... 31 • LIFTGATE ...... 33 • POWER LIFTGATE (for versions/markets, where available) ...... 33 • OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS ...... 35 • LAP/SHOULDER BELTS ...... 36 • SEAT BELTS IN PASSENGER SEATING POSITIONS ...... 40 • AUTOMATIC LOCKING RETRACTOR MODE (ALR) ...... 40 • ENERGY MANAGEMENT FEATURE ...... 41 • SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS ...... 41 • SUPPLEMENTAL ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINTS (AHR) — (for versions/markets where provided) ...... 42 • ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM ...... 43 • ENHANCED SEAT BELT USE REMINDER SYSTEM (BeltAlert®) ...... 45 • SEAT BELTS AND PREGNANT WOMEN ...... 46 • SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) — AIR BAGS ...... 46 • AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS ...... 47 • ADVANCED FRONT AIR BAG FEATURES .....47 • AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT SENSORS AND CONTROLS ...... 50 11 • CHILD RESTRAINTS ...... 56 • ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 68 • ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DIESEL ENGINE ...... 68 • SAFETY TIPS ...... 68 • TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS ...... 68 • EXHAUST GAS...... 69 • SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE THE VEHICLE ...... 69 • PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE ...... 71

12 A WORD ABOUT YOUR and ON/RUN. The START position is a KEY FOB KEYS spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START The Key Fob also contains the Remote Your vehicle is equipped with a key- position, the switch automatically re- Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and less ignition system. This system con- turns to the ON/RUN position. an emergency key, which stores in the sists of a Key Fob with Remote Key- rear of the Key Fob. NOTE: If your vehicle is less Entry (RKE) transmitter and a The emergency key allows for entry equipped with Keyless Enter-N- Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with into the vehicle should the battery in Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Infor- integral ignition switch. You can in- the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. mation Center (EVIC) will display sert the Key Fob into the ignition You can keep the emergency key with the ignition switch position (OFF/ switch with either side up. you when valet parking. ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature for Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) To remove the emergency key, slide (versions/markets where provided) — (for versions/markets where the mechanical latch on the face of the provided) in “Understanding Your Key Fob sideways with your thumb This vehicle may be equipped with Instrument Panel” for further in- and then pull the key out with your the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, re- formation. other hand. fer to Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for further information. IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM) — (for versions/markets where provided) The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) op- Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Ignition Node Module (IGNM) erates similar to an ignition switch. It 1 — OFF Emergency Key Removal 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) has four operating positions, three with 3 — ON/RUN NOTE: You can insert the double- detents and one that is spring-loaded. 4—START sided emergency key into the lock The detent positions are OFF, ACC, cylinders with either side up.

13 REMOVING KEY FOB WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! FROM IGNITION • Allowing children to be in a ve- An unlocked car is an invitation to Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn hicle unattended is dangerous for thieves. Always remove the Key the Key Fob to the OFF position and a number of reasons. A child or Fob from the ignition and lock all then remove the Key Fob. others could be seriously or fa- doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. NOTE: Power window switches tally injured. Children should be will also remain active for up to 10 warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift KEY-IN-IGNITION minutes after the ignition switch REMINDER has been turned to OFF, depending lever. upon the accessory delay setting. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or Opening the driver's door when the Opening either front door will can- near the vehicle, or in a location Key Fob is in the ignition and the cel this feature. accessible to children, and do not ignition switch position is OFF or leave the ignition of a vehicle ACC, a chime will sound to remind equipped with Keyless Enter-N- you to remove the key. WARNING! Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN • Before exiting a vehicle, always mode. A child could operate NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition re- apply the parking brake, shift the power windows, other controls, or minder only sounds when the Key transmission into PARK, and move the vehicle. Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC push ignition button to place ig- • Do not leave children or animals ignition position. nition in OFF position. When inside parked vehicles in hot If your vehicle is equipped with Key- leaving the vehicle, always lock weather. Interior heat build-up less Enter-N-Go™, opening the driv- your vehicle. may cause serious injury or er’s door when the vehicle’s ignition • Never leave children alone in a death. switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN vehicle, or with access to an un- (engine stopped) will cause the re- locked vehicle. minder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting (Continued) And Operating” for further information.

14 STEERING WHEEL must turn the wheel slightly to the that there is a problem with the elec- LOCK — (for right to disengage it. If you turned tronics. In addition, if the light begins the wheel to the left to engage the to flash after the bulb check, it indi- versions/markets where lock, turn the wheel slightly to the cates that someone used an invalid provided) left to disengage it. Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the en- Your vehicle may be equipped with a SENTRY KEY® gine being shut off after two seconds. passive electronic steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system If the Vehicle Security Light turns on without the ignition key. If the steer- prevents unauthorized vehicle opera- during normal vehicle operation (ve- ing wheel is moved to one of the lock tion by disabling the engine. The sys- hicle running for longer than 10 sec- positions with the key in the off posi- tem does not need to be armed or onds), it indicates that there is a fault tions, the steering wheel will lock. activated. Operation is automatic, rein the electronics. Should this occur, gardless of whether the vehicle is TO MANUALLY LOCK THE have the vehicle serviced as soon as locked or unlocked. possible by an authorized dealer. STEERING WHEEL The system uses a Key Fob with Re- With the engine running, rotate the mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- CAUTION! steering wheel one-quarter revolution ter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and The Sentry Key® Immobilizer sys- in either direction, turn off the engine a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized and remove the key. Turn the steering tem is not compatible with some vehicle operation. Therefore, only aftermarket remote starting sys- wheel slightly in either direction until Key Fobs that are programmed to the the lock engages. tems. Use of these systems may re- vehicle can be used to start and oper- sult in vehicle starting problems TO RELEASE THE ate the vehicle. and loss of security protection. STEERING WHEEL LOCK After cycling the ignition to the ON/ RUN position, the Vehicle Security All of the Key Fobs provided with Cycle the ignition and start the en- Light will turn on for three seconds your new vehicle have been pro- gine. for a bulb check. If the light remains grammed to the vehicle electronics. NOTE: If you turned the wheel to on after the bulb check, it indicates the right to engage the lock, you

15 REPLACEMENT KEYS GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE SECURITY NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are The Sentry Key® operates on a car- ALARM — (for programmed to the vehicle elec- rier frequency of 433.92 MHz. The versions/markets where tronics can be used to start and Sentry Key® Immobilizer system will provided) operate the vehicle. Once a Key be used in the following European Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it countries, which apply Directive The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors cannot be programmed to any 1999/5/EC: Austria, Belgium, Czech the vehicle doors, liftgate/power- other vehicle. Republic, Denmark, Finland, France, liftgate, hood and power sliding doors Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, for unauthorized entry and the igni- Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Nor- tion switch for unauthorized opera- CAUTION! way, Poland, Portugal, Romania, tion. When the alarm is activated, the Always remove the keys from the Russian Federation, Slovenia, Croa- interior switches for door locks, power vehicle and lock all doors when tia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and sliding doors and power liftgate are leaving the vehicle unattended. United Kingdom. disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visual sig- Operation is subject to the following Duplication of Key Fobs may be per- nals. formed at an authorized dealer. conditions: NOTE: When having the Sentry • This device may not cause harmful CAUTION! Key® Immobilizer system ser- interference. viced, bring all vehicle ignition Do not make modifications or al- • This device must accept any inter- terations to the Vehicle Security keys with you to an authorized ference that may be received, in- dealer. Alarm. Modifications or alterations cluding interference that may cause to the Vehicle Security Alarm may CUSTOMER KEY undesired operation. result in a loss of security protec- PROGRAMMING tion. Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

16 REARMING OF THE 2. Perform one of the following • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock SYSTEM methods to lock the vehicle: Door Handle (for versions/ • Press LOCK on the interior power markets, where provided), refer to If something triggers the alarm, and door lock switch with the driver "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in no action is taken to disarm it, the and/or passenger door open. "Things To Know Before Starting Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off Your Vehicle" for further the horn after 29 seconds, and turn off • Press the LOCK button on the exte- information). all of the visual signals after an addi- rior Passive Entry Door Handle with a tional 31 seconds, then the Vehicle valid Key Fob available in the same • Cycle the vehicle ignition system Security Alarm will rearm itself. exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter- out of the OFF position. N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before • For vehicles equipped with Key- TO ARM THE SYSTEM Starting Your Vehicle" for further in- less Enter-N-Go™, press the Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle formation). Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/ Stop button (requires at least one Security Alarm: • Press the LOCK button on the Re- valid Key Fob in the vehicle). 1. Remove the key from the ignition mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- • For vehicles not equipped with system (refer to "Starting Proce- ter. Keyless Enter-N-Go™, insert a dures" in "Starting And Operating" 3. If any doors are open, close them. valid key into the ignition switch for further information). TO DISARM THE SYSTEM and turn the key to the ON posi- • For vehicles equipped with Keyless tion. Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle The Vehicle Security Alarm can be NOTE: ignition system is "OFF". disarmed using any of the following • For vehicles not equipped with Key- methods: • The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the less Enter-N-Go™, make sure the ve- • Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or hicle ignition system is "OFF" and the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) disarm the Vehicle Security key is physically removed from the transmitter. ignition. Alarm.

17 • The Vehicle Security Alarm re- reconnected; the exterior lights will • The illuminated entry system mains armed during power lift- flash, the horn will sound. If this oc- will not operate if the dimmer gate entry. Pressing the liftgate curs, disarm the Vehicle Security control is in the “dome defeat” button will not disarm the Ve- Alarm. position (extreme bottom posi- hicle Security Alarm. If someone tion). enters the vehicle through the ILLUMINATED ENTRY liftgate and opens any door the REMOTE KEYLESS The courtesy lights will turn on when alarm will sound. you use the Remote Keyless Entry ENTRY (RKE) (for • When the Vehicle Security (RKE) transmitter to unlock the versions/markets, where Alarm is armed, the interior doors or open any door. provided) power door lock switches will This feature also turns on the ap- not unlock the doors. This system allows you to lock or un- proach lighting in the outside mirrors lock the doors and liftgate, open both The Vehicle Security Alarm is de- (for versions/markets, where pro- front windows, open or close the op- signed to protect your vehicle; how- vided). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Under- tional power liftgate, left power slid- ever, you can create conditions where standing The Features Of Your Ve- ing door, and right power sliding door the system will give you a false alarm. hicle” for further information. from distances up to approximately If one of the previously described The lights will fade to off after ap- 20 m using a hand-held RKE trans- arming sequences has occurred, the proximately 30 seconds, or they will mitter. The RKE transmitter does not Vehicle Security Alarm will arm re- immediately fade to off once the igni- need to be pointed at the vehicle to gardless of whether you are in the tion switch is turned to ON/RUN from activate the system. vehicle or not. If you remain in the the OFF position. vehicle and open a door, the alarm NOTE: Inserting the RKE trans- will sound. If this occurs, disarm the NOTE: mitter with Integrated Key into the Vehicle Security Alarm. ignition switch disables all but- • The front courtesy overhead tons on that transmitter; however, If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed console and door courtesy lights the buttons on the remaining and the battery becomes discon- will not turn off if the dimmer transmitters will continue to work. nected, the Vehicle Security Alarm control is in the “Dome ON” po- Driving at speeds 8 km/h and will remain armed when the battery is sition (extreme top position).

18 above disables all RKE transmit- REMOTE KEY UNLOCK ON 3. Release both buttons at the same ter buttons for all RKE transmit- FIRST PRESS time. ters. This feature lets you program the sys- 4. Test the feature while outside of tem to unlock either the driver's side, the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/ or all doors, on the first press of the UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the mitter. OFF position and the Key Fob removed. • For vehicles equipped with an Elec- tronic Vehicle Information Center 5. Repeat these steps if you want to (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle return this feature to its previous set- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Information Center (EVIC)/ ting. Transmitter With Integrated Key Personal Settings (Customer- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button REMOTE UNLOCK DOORS Programmable Features)” in “Un- on the RKE transmitter while you AND LIFTGATE derstanding Your Instrument are inside the vehicle will activate Panel” for further information. the Vehicle Security Alarm. Open- Press and release the UNLOCK but- ing a door with the Vehicle Secu- ton on the RKE transmitter once to • For vehicles not equipped with the rity Alarm activated will cause the unlock the driver's side or twice to EVIC, the Remote Unlock feature alarm to sound. Press the UN- unlock all doors and liftgate. This will can be enabled or disabled by per- LOCK button to deactivate the Ve- also turn on the Illuminated Entry forming the following steps: hicle Security Alarm. system. 1. Perform this operation while REMOTE LOCK DOORS standing outside the vehicle. AND LIFTGATE 2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter Press and release the lock button on for at least 4 seconds, but no longer the RKE transmitter to Lock Doors than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold And Liftgate. the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button. 19 POWER OPEN/CLOSE POWER OPEN/CLOSE pushed while the door is being power- POWER LIFTGATE (for LEFT POWER SLIDING closed, the door will reverse to the full versions/markets, where DOOR (for versions/ open position. provided) markets, where provided) If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, pressing the Press the LIFTGATE button twice on Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door RIGHT Power Sliding Door button the RKE transmitter within five sec- button twice on the RKE transmitter twice unlocks the power sliding door onds to Open/Close the Power Lift- within five seconds to Power Open/ and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm. gate. The liftgate will beep for three Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If seconds and then open/close. If the the button on the RKE transmitter is TURN OFF FLASH LIGHTS button is pushed while the liftgate is pushed while the door is being power- WITH RKE LOCK (for being power closed, the liftgate will closed, the door will reverse to the full versions/markets, where reverse to the full open position. open position. provided) The power liftgate may also be If the vehicle is locked and the Vehicle This feature will cause the turn signal opened and closed by pressing the Security Alarm is armed, pressing the lights to flash when the doors are LIFTGATE button located on the LEFT Power Sliding Door button locked or unlocked with the RKE overhead console. twice unlocks the power sliding door transmitter. This feature can be and disarms Vehicle Security Alarm. For versions/markets, where pro- turned on or turned off. To change the vided with a rear interior switch on POWER OPEN/CLOSE current setting, proceed as follows: the left rear pillar, pushing this switch RIGHT POWER SLIDING • For vehicles equipped with the once will close the liftgate only. The DOOR (for versions/ liftgate cannot be opened from this EVIC, refer to “Electronic Vehicle switch. markets, where provided Information Center (EVIC)/ Personal Settings (Customer- Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door If the vehicle is locked and Vehicle Programmable Features)” in “Un- button twice on the RKE transmitter Security Alarm is armed, using RKE derstanding Your Instrument within five seconds to Power Open/ transmitter to open the power liftgate Panel” for further information. does not unlock the vehicle or disarm Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the Vehicle Security Alarm. the button on the RKE transmitter is

20 • For vehicles not equipped with the are in the vehicle will activate the could contain dangerous mate- EVIC, perform the following steps: Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a rials. Please dispose of them ac- door with the Vehicle Security cording to respect for environ- 1. Perform this operation while Alarm activated will cause the ment and local laws. standing outside the vehicle. alarm to sound. Press the UN- • Do not touch the battery termi- 2. Press and hold the UNLOCK but- LOCK button to deactivate the Ve- nals that are on the back hous- ton on a programmed RKE transmit- hicle Security Alarm. ing or the printed circuit board. ter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and PROGRAMMING 1. Remove the emergency key by hold the LOCK button while still ADDITIONAL sliding the mechanical latch on the holding the UNLOCK button. TRANSMITTERS back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the 3. Release both buttons at the same Refer to Sentry Key® “Customer Key key out with your other hand. time. Programming.” 4. Test the feature while outside of If you do not have a programmed the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/ RKE transmitter, contact your autho- UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans- rized dealer for details. mitter with the ignition switch in the TRANSMITTER BATTERY OFF position and the Key Fob removed. REPLACEMENT The recommended replacement bat- 5. Repeat these steps if you want to tery is one CR2032 battery. Ignition Node Module (IGNM) return this feature to its previous set- Emergency Key Removal ting. NOTE: NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button • Perchlorate Material — special on the RKE transmitter while you handling may apply. Batteries

21 2. separating RKE halves requires GENERAL INFORMATION DOOR LOCKS screw removal and gently prying the The RKE transmitter(s) and receivers two halves of the RKE transmitter MANUAL DOOR LOCKS operate on a carrier frequency of apart. Make sure not to damage the 433.92 MHz. Operation is subject to Lock the front doors by pushing down seal during removal. the following conditions: on the lock knobs on each door trim panel. • This device may not cause harmful interference. If the lock knob is down when you shut either front door, the door will • This device must accept any interlock. Make sure the keys are not inside ference received, including interfer- the vehicle before closing the door. ence that may cause undesired operation.

Separating Ignition Node Module If your RKE transmitter fails to oper- (IGNM) Transmitter Case ate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions. 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing down- 1. A weak battery in the RKE trans- ward) and tapping it lightly on a solid mitter. The expected life of the battery surface such as a table or similar, then is a minimum of three years. Manual Door Lock replace the battery. When replacing 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter the battery, match the + sign on the If the lock knob is rearward when you such as a radio station tower, airport battery to the + sign on the inside of shut either side sliding door, the door transmitter, and some mobile or CB the battery clip, located on the back will lock. Make sure the keys are not radios. cover. Avoid touching the new battery inside the vehicle before closing the with your fingers. Skin oils may cause door. battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together. 22 ignition, and any front door is open, WARNING! (Continued) the power locks will not operate. This • Do not leave the Key Fob in or prevents you from accidentally lock- near the vehicle, or in a location ing your keys in the vehicle. Remov- accessible to children, and do not ing the Key Fob or closing the door leave the ignition of a vehicle will allow the locks to operate. A equipped with Keyless Enter-N- chime will sound if the Key Fob is in Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN the ignition switch and a door is open, Sliding Door Lock mode. A child could operate as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. power windows, other controls, or WARNING! move the vehicle. • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the POWER DOOR LOCKS (for vehicle doors as you drive as well versions/markets, where as when you park and leave the provided) vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always A power door lock switch is on each remove the Key Fob from the ig- front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. nition and lock your vehicle. Front Passenger Power Door • Never leave children alone in a Switches vehicle, or with access to an un- 1 - Window Open/Close locked vehicle. Allowing children 2 - Power Door Locks to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be If you press the power door lock seriously or fatally injured. Chil- switch while the sliding door is open, dren should be warned not to the sliding door will lock. touch the parking brake, brake Driver Power Door Lock Switches pedal or the shift lever. If you press the power door lock (Continued) switch while the Key Fob is in the 23 Automatic Door Locks (Customer-Programmable Fea- (Customer-Programmable Fea- tures)” in “Understanding Your When enabled, the door locks will tures)” in “Understanding Your In- Instrument Panel” for further lock automatically when the vehicle's strument Panel” for further informa- information. speed exceeds 24 km/h. The auto tion. door lock feature can be enabled or NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Auto- • If a Passive Entry door handle disabled by your authorized dealer matically at 24 km/h and Unlock has not been used for an ex- per written request of the customer. Doors Automatically On Exit fea- tended period of time, the Pas- Please see your authorized dealer for tures in accordance with local sive Entry feature for the handle service. laws. may time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handle will Unlock Doors Automatically On KEYLESS ENTER-N- reactivate the door handle's Exit (for versions/markets, where Passive Entry feature. provided) GO™ The Unlock Doors Automatically On The Passive Entry system is an en- • If wearing gloves on your hands, Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle hancement to the vehicle’s Remote or if it has been raining on the doors when any door is opened. This Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a Passive Entry door handle, the will occur only after the shift lever has feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. unlock sensitivity can be af- been shifted into the PARK position, This feature allows you to lock and fected, resulting in a slower re- after the vehicle has been driven (the unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without sponse time. shift lever has been shifted out of having to press the RKE transmitter • If you unlock the doors using the PARK and all doors closed). lock or unlock buttons. Passive Entry door handles, but The Unlock Doors Automatically On NOTE: do NOT pull the handle, the Exit feature will not operate if there is doors will automatically lock af- • Passive Entry may be pro- ter 60 seconds. any manual operation of the power grammed ON/OFF; refer to door locks (lock or unlock). “Electronic Vehicle Information To Unlock From The Driver's Side: Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings With a valid Passive Entry RKE tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings transmitter within 1.5 m of the driver's door handle, grab the driver's

24 front door handle to unlock the driv- To Unlock From The Passenger If one of the vehicle doors is open and er's door automatically. The interior Side: the door panel switch is used to lock door panel lock knob will raise when the vehicle, once all open doors have With a valid Passive Entry RKE the door is unlocked. been closed the vehicle checks the in- transmitter within 1.5 m of the pas- side and outside of the vehicle for any senger door handle, grab the front valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. passenger door handle to unlock all If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry four doors automatically. The interior RKE transmitters is detected inside door panel lock knob will raise when the vehicle, and no other valid Passive the door is unlocked. Entry RKE transmitters are detected NOTE: All doors will unlock outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry when the front passenger door System automatically unlocks all ve- Grab The Door Handle To Unlock handle is grabbed regardless of the hicle doors and chirps the horn three NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st driver’s door unlock preference times (on the third attempt ALL Press” is programmed all doors will setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st doors will lock and the Passive Entry unlock when you grab hold of the Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st RKE transmitter can be locked in the driver’s front door handle. To select Press”). vehicle). between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of To Enter The Liftgate Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In With a valid Passive Entry RKE Press”, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ transmitter within 1.5 m of the lift- Personal Settings (Customer- To minimize the possibility of unin- gate, cycle the handle to open the Programmable Features)” in “Un- tentionally locking a Passive Entry liftgate and pull the liftgate open with derstanding Your Instrument RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, one fluid motion. the Passive Entry system is equipped Panel” for further information. NOTE: All doors will remain with an automatic door unlock fea- locked when the liftgate release ture which will function if there is no handle is pressed regardless of the Key Fob present in the ignition. driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

25 Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st The vehicle doors can also be locked Press”). by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors the vehicle’s interior door panel. With one of the vehicle’s Passive En- try RKE transmitters within 1.5 m of WINDOWS the driver or passenger front door handle, press the door handle LOCK POWER VENT WINDOWS button to lock all four doors. Do NOT Grab The Door Handle The Power Vent Window Switch lo- When Locking cated on the driver's door trim panel NOTE: allows the driver to operate the two vent windows from the driver's seat. • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This Press The Door Handle Button To is done to allow you to check if Lock the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the ve- Do NOT grab the door handle, when hicle reacting and unlocking. pressing the door handle lock button. Power Vent Window Switch This could unlock the door(s). • The Passive Entry system will Open/Close not operate if the RKE transmit- POWER WINDOWS ter battery is dead. You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver's door trim panel. The switches will operate only when the

26 ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

Power Window Lockout Switch Front Passenger Power Door Front Passenger Power Window Switches Switch 1 - Window Open/Close 2 - Power Door Locks Driver's Power Window Switches There is a single switch on the front NOTE: Power Window switches passenger's door trim panel which op- Auto-Down Feature (for will also remain active for up to 10 erates the passenger door window and versions/markets, where minutes after the ignition switch a set of switches that lock and unlock provided) has been turned to OFF, depending all doors. The switches will operate upon the accessory delay setting. only when the ignition switch is in the The front window switches may be Opening a front door will cancel ON/RUN or ACC position and during equipped with an Auto-Down feature. this feature. power accessory delay. Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the window will go Power Window Lockout Switch down automatically. (for versions/markets, where provided) To open the window part way, press the window switch part way and re- The driver may lock out the rear lease it when you want the window to power windows by depressing the bar stop. switch just below the power window switches.

27 The power window switches remain NOTE: Auto Up Reset (for versions/ active for up to 10 minutes (depend- markets, where provided) • If the window runs into any ob- ing on the accessory delay setting) stacle during auto-closure, it To reactivate the Auto Up feature, after the ignition switch has been will reverse direction and then perform the following steps after ve- turned to OFF. Opening a vehicle go back down. Remove the ob- hicle power is restored: front door will cancel this feature. stacle and use the window 1. Pull the window switch up to close Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch switch again to close the win- the window completely and continue Protection (for versions/markets, dow. to hold the switch up for an additional where provided) • Any impact due to rough road two seconds after the window is The front driver and front passenger conditions may trigger the auto closed. switches may be equipped with an reverse function unexpectedly 2. Push the window switch down Auto Up feature. Lift the window during auto-closure. If this hap- firmly to the second detent to open the switch fully upward to the second de- pens, pull the switch lightly to window completely and continue to tent, release, and the window will go the first detent and hold to close hold the switch down for an addi- up automatically. window manually. tional two seconds after the window is To stop the window from going all the fully open. way up during the Auto Up operation, WARNING! Sliding Side Door Power Window push down on the switch briefly. There is no anti-pinch protection Switch when the window is almost closed. To close the window part way, lift the Second row passengers may open and To avoid personal injury be sure to window switch to the first detent and close the sliding door window by a clear your arms, hands, fingers and release when you want the window to single switch on the door handle as- all objects from the window path stop. sembly. before closing. The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during power accessory delay.

28 NOTE: The switches will not op- occurs, open the front and rear win- fully opened. This latch will keep erate if the driver has activated the dows together to minimize the buffet- your sliding door open on any in- Power Window Lockout. ing. If the buffeting occurs with the cline. To close the sliding door after sunroof open, adjust the sunroof the hold-open latch is activated, opening to minimize the buffeting. you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the ex- SLIDING SIDE DOOR terior handle. The sliding door may be opened from Always make sure that the sliding the inside or the outside. Pull outward door is fully latched anytime the ve- on the exterior handle to open the hicle is in motion. sliding door. The sliding door inside NOTE: The left side sliding door Sliding Door Power Window Switch handle functions by rocking forward cannot be opened while the fuel NOTE: The sliding door windows and back. Rocking the handle back- door is open. This feature operates do not fully open, stopping several wards opens the door and rocking for- only when the sliding door is fully millimeters above the window sill. ward releases the hold open latch in closed prior to opening the fuel order to close the door. WIND BUFFETING door. To keep your door operating properly, Wind buffeting can be described as observe the following guidelines: POWER SLIDING SIDE the perception of pressure on the ears DOOR (for versions/ • Always open the door smoothly. or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. markets, where provided) Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffet- • Avoid high impacts against the ing with the windows down, or the door stop when opening the door. sunroof (for versions/markets, where This is very important when your The power sliding door may provided) in certain open or partially vehicle is parked on an incline as be opened or closed manu- open positions. This is a normal oc- the door will slide faster in the ally or by using the buttons currence and can be minimized. If the downhill direction. on the RKE transmitter, rear windows are open and buffeting overhead console switch, or rear door • There is a hold-open latch that is switch. Pulling the inside or outside activated when the sliding door is

29 power sliding door handle will also NOTE: The power sliding side lever in gear and vehicle speed power open or close the power sliding door must be unlocked before the at 0 km/h, the brake must be door. power sliding door switches will pressed. operate. NOTE: Pulling the outside power • If anything obstructs the power sliding door handle a second time sliding side door while it is clos- while the sliding door is power ing or opening, the door will au- opening or power closing will al- tomatically reverse to the closed low the sliding door to be opened or open position, provided it or closed manually. meets sufficient resistance. Press the button on the RKE trans- • If the power sliding side door is mitter twice within five seconds to not in the full open or close po- open a power sliding door. When the Power Sliding Door Switch sition, it will fully open when a door is fully open, pressing the button To avoid unintentional operation of power sliding door switch is twice within five seconds a second the power sliding doors from the rear pressed. To close the door, wait time will close the door. seats, press the power sliding door until it is fully open and then There are power sliding side door master lock button, located in the press the switch again. switches located on the b-pillar trim overhead console, to disable the • If the power sliding door en- panel, just in front of the power slid- switches and handles for the rear seat counters multiple obstructions ing door for the rear seat passengers passengers. within the same cycle, the sys- and in the overhead console for the NOTE: tem will automatically stop, the driver and passengers. Pressing the power sliding door motor will switch once will open the power slid- • The power sliding side door make a clicking sound until the ing door. If the switch is pressed while switches will not open the power door has no further movement. the door is under a power cycle, the sliding door if the shift lever is in This clicking sound can be door will reverse direction. gear or the vehicle speed is stopped by pulling the inside or above 0 km/h. To close the outside handle. If this condition power sliding door with the shift occurs, no damage is done to the power sliding door motor. The

30 power sliding door must be 3. Within 10 seconds of the final opened or closed manually. cycle, press the HAZARD switch ON. 4. A single chime will sound to sig- WARNING! nify that you have successfully com- You, or others, could be injured if pleted the programming. caught in the path of the sliding You can turn the feature back on by door. Make sure the door path is repeating the previous procedure. clear before closing the door. Overhead Console Power Sliding Power Sliding Side Door Master Door Master Switch Power Sliding Side Door Open Lock Switch Flash 1 — Left Sliding 3 — Right Slid- To provide a safer environment for Door ing Door The left and right exterior hazard small children riding in the rear seats, 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock lights will flash for 12 seconds when the second row sliding door switches either sliding door is opened. This will and handles may be overridden by SLIDING SIDE DOOR alert other drivers in the area that pressing the OFF side of the Master passenger(s) could be entering or ex- Lock Out Switch located in the front CHILD PROTECTION iting the vehicle. overhead console. LOCK The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can When the power sliding door master To provide a safer environment for be enabled or disabled by performing lock switch is in the OFF position, the small children riding in the rear seats, the following procedure: power sliding side door may not be the sliding doors are equipped with a opened or closed by pressing the Child Protection Door Lock system. 1. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch located on the b-pillar trim switch. NOTE: When the Child Protec- panel, just in front of the sliding door tion Door Lock system is engaged, 2. Cycle the ignition switch from ON/ or activating the inside power sliding the door can be opened only by RUN to OFF five times ending in the door handle. using the outside door handle even ON/RUN position (do not start the though the inside door lock is in engine). the unlocked position.

31 NOTE: WARNING! 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. • After engaging the Child Protec- Avoid trapping anyone in the ve- tion Door Lock, always test the hicle in a collision. Remember that NOTE: door from the inside to make the sliding doors can only be • After engaging the Child Protec- certain it is in the desired posi- opened from the outside door tion Door Lock, always test the tion. handle or the switches located on door from the inside to make • When the Child Protection Door the b-pillar trim panel just in front certain it is in the desired posi- Lock system is engaged, (even if of the power sliding door when the tion. the inside door lock is in the Child Protection Door Locks are • When the Child Protection Door unlocked position) the door can engaged. Lock system is engaged, (even if be opened only by using the out- To Engage the Child Protection the inside door lock is in the side door handle, the RKE Door Lock unlocked position) the door can transmitter, the switches on the be opened only by using the out- overhead console or the switches 1. Open the sliding side door. side door handle, the RKE located on the trim panel just in 2. Slide the Child Protection Door transmitter, the switches on the front of the power sliding door. Lock control inward (toward the ve- overhead console or the switches • The power sliding side door will hicle) to engage the Child Protection located on the trim panel just in operate from the switches lo- Door Lock. front of the power sliding door. cated on the trim panel just in • The power sliding side door will front of the power sliding door, operate from the switches lo- regardless of the Child Protec- cated on the b-pillar trim panel, tion Door Lock lever position. To just in front of the power sliding avoid unintentional operation of door, regardless of the Child the power sliding door from the Protection Door Lock lever po- rear seats, press the "OFF” Mas- sition. To avoid unintentional ter Lock Out Switch located in operation of the power sliding the front overhead console, next Child Protection Door Lock door from the rear seats, press to the driver.

32 the “OFF” Master Lock Out NOTE: (RKE) transmitter button, or by acti- Switch located in the front over- vating the power door lock switches • After setting the Child Protec- head console, next to the driver. located on the front doors. tion Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to To open the liftgate, press the liftgate WARNING! make certain it is in the desired release handle located on the under- Avoid trapping anyone in the ve- position. side of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid mo- hicle in a collision. Remember that • The power sliding side door tion. the sliding doors can only be switches will not open the power opened from the outside door sliding doors if the vehicle is in handle or the switches located on gear or the vehicle speed is the b-pillar trim panel just in front above 0 km/h. of the power sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks are • The power sliding door will op- engaged. erate from the outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the To Disengage the Child Protection switches on the overhead con- Door Lock sole, or the switches located on Liftgate Handle Location the b-pillar trim panel just in POWER LIFTGATE (for 1. Open the sliding side door. front of the power sliding door 2. Slide the Child Protection Door when the shift lever is in PARK, versions/markets, where Lock control outward (away from the regardless of the child lock lever available) vehicle) to disengage the Child Pro- position. The power liftgate may be opened tection Door Lock. LIFTGATE manually or by using the button on 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the oppo- the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) site sliding door (for versions/ On vehicles equipped with power transmitter. Press the button on the markets, where provided). locks, the liftgate can be unlocked transmitter twice within five seconds, using the Remote Keyless Entry to open the power liftgate. When the

33 liftgate is fully open, pressing the but- NOTE: ton twice within five seconds, a sec- • If anything obstructs the power ond time, will close the liftgate. liftgate while it is closing or The power liftgate may also be opening, the liftgate will auto- opened and closed by pressing the matically reverse to the closed or button located on the overhead con- open position, provided it meets sole. sufficient resistance. Rear Power Liftgate Switch • There are also pinch sensors at- When the RKE transmitter button is tached to the side of the liftgate pressed and the Flash Lights feature opening. Light pressure any- is enabled, the tail lights will flash and where along these strips will several audible beeps will occur to cause the liftgate to return to the signal that the liftgate is opening or open position. closing. • During power operation, Overhead Console Master Power whether liftgate is fully open or Switch WARNING! fully closed, the liftgate chime 1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door will beep several times indicat- 2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock During power operation, personal ing power operation is in injury or cargo damage may occur. progress. Ensure the liftgate travel path is The power liftgate may be closed by clear. Make sure the liftgate is • The power liftgate must be in the pressing the button, located in the closed and latched before driving full open or close positions for upper left trim in the liftgate opening. away. any of the buttons to operate. If Pushing once will only close the lift- the liftgate is not in the full open gate. This button cannot be used to or close positions, it must be open the liftgate. opened or closed manually.

34 • If the liftgate release button is WARNING! • Supplemental Active Head Re- activated while the power lift- straints (AHR) located on top of the gate is closing, the liftgate will • Driving with the liftgate open can front seats (integrated into the head reverse to the full open position. allow poisonous exhaust gases restraint) into your vehicle. You and your • The power liftgate buttons will passengers could be injured by • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflat- not operate if the shift lever is in these fumes. Keep the liftgate able Curtains (SABIC) that span gear or the vehicle speed is closed when you are operating the the front, second, and third row above 0 km/h. vehicle. seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window • The power liftgate will not oper- • If you are required to drive with ate in temperatures below −24°C the liftgate open, make sure that • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side or temperatures above 62°C. Be all windows are closed, and the Air Bags (SAB) sure to remove any buildup of climate control blower switch is • An energy-absorbing steering col- snow or ice from the liftgate be- set at high speed. Do not use the umn and steering wheel fore pressing any of the power recirculation mode. liftgate buttons. • Knee bolsters/blockers for front OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS seat occupants • If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions within the Some of the most important safety • Front seat belts incorporate preten- same cycle, the system will auto- features in your vehicle are the re- sioners that may enhance occupant matically stop and must be straint systems: protection by managing occupant opened or closed manually. energy during an impact event • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions • All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include Automatic Locking • Advanced Front Air Bags for driver Retractors (ALRs), which lock the and front passenger seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the

35 desired length to restrain a child seat Please pay close attention to the infor- stops or collisions. This feature allows or secure a large item in a seat mation in this section. It tells you how the shoulder part of the belt to move to use your restraint system properly, freely with you under normal condi- If you will be carrying children too to keep you and your passengers as tions. However, in a collision the belt small for adult-sized seat belts, the safe as possible. will lock and reduce the risk of you seat belts or the ISOFIX feature also striking the inside of the vehicle or can be used to hold infant and child Buckle up even though you are an being thrown out. restraint systems. For more informa- excellent driver, even on short trips. tion on ISOFIX, see ISOFIX — Child Someone on the road may be a poor The driver is responsible for respect- Seat Anchorage System. driver and cause a collision that in- ing, and ensuring that all the other cludes you. This can happen far away occupants of the car also respect, the from home or on your own street. local laws in force in relation to the WARNING! use of the seat belts. Always fasten the • Never place a rear facing infant Research has shown that seat belts seat belts before starting. seat in front of an air bag. A de- save lives, and they can reduce the ploying Passenger Advanced seriousness of injuries in a collision. Front Air Bag can cause death or Some of the worst injuries happen WARNING! serious injury to a child 12 years when people are thrown from the ve- • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo or younger, including a child in a hicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility area, inside or outside of a ve- rearward facing infant seat. of ejection and the risk of injury hicle. In a collision, people riding • Only use a rearward-facing child caused by striking the inside of the in these areas are more likely to restraint in a vehicle with a rear vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle be seriously injured or killed. seat. should be belted at all times. • Do not allow people to ride in any LAP/SHOULDER BELTS area of your vehicle that is not NOTE: The Advanced Front Air equipped with seats and seat Bags have a multistage inflator de- All seating positions in your vehicle belts. sign. This allows the air bag to are equipped with combination lap/ • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is have different rates of inflation shoulder belts. in a seat and using a seat belt based on several factors, including The belt webbing in the retractor is properly. the severity and type of collision. designed to lock during very sudden (Continued) 36 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Instructions • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is the vehicle in a collision, increas- dangerous. Seat belts are de- 1. Enter the vehicle and close the ing head and neck injury. A belt signed to go around the large door. Sit back and adjust the seat. worn under the arm can cause bones of your body. These are the 2. The seat belt latch plate is near the internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strongest parts of your body and seatback of the front seats and next to strong as shoulder bones. Wear can take the forces of a collision your arm in the rear seats. Grasp the the belt over your shoulder so that the best. latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide your strongest bones will take the • Wearing your belt in the wrong the latch plate up the webbing as far force in a collision. place could make your injuries in as necessary to allow the belt to go • A shoulder belt placed behind you a collision much worse. You around your lap. will not protect you from injury might suffer internal injuries, or during a collision. You are more you could even slide out of part of likely to hit your head in a collision the belt. Follow these instructions if you do not wear your shoulder to wear your seat belt safely and belt. The lap and shoulder belt are to keep your passengers safe, too. meant to be used together.

• Two people should never be 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, belted into a single seat belt. insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”. People belted together can crash Pulling Out Belt And Latch Plate into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never WARNING! use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person, no • A belt that is worn under your matter what their size. arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of

(Continued) Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

37 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • A belt that is buckled into the • Do not use devices (clips, fasten- wrong buckle will not protect you ings etc.) that prevent the seat properly. The lap portion could belts from laying close to the oc- ride too high on your body, possi- cupants' bodies. bly causing internal injuries. Al- • Do not carry children on a pas- ways buckle your belt into the senger’s lap using only one seat buckle nearest you. Removing Slack From Belt belt for protecting both of them. • A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden WARNING! 5. Position the shoulder belt on your stop you could move too far for- • A lap belt worn too high can in- chest so that it is comfortable and not ward, increasing the possibility of crease the risk of injury in a colli- resting on your neck. The retractor injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. sion. The belt forces won't be at will withdraw any slack in the belt. the strong hip and pelvic bones, 4. Position the lap belt across your 6. To release the belt, push the red but across your abdomen. Always thighs, below your abdomen. To re- button on the buckle. The belt will wear the lap part of your seat belt move slack in the lap belt portion, pull automatically retract to its stowed po- as low as possible and keep it up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the sition. If necessary, slide the latch snug. lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate down the webbing to allow the • A twisted belt may not protect plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt to retract fully. you properly. In a collision, it belt reduces the risk of sliding under could even cut into you. Be sure the belt in a collision. the belt is straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

(Continued)

38 WARNING! hear a “click.” The retractor should Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt withdraw any slack in the belt. Anchorage A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no To release the small latch plate, posi- In the front seats and the second row protection. Inspect the belt system tion the end of the large latch plate outboard seats, the shoulder belt an- periodically, checking for cuts, against the red button on the small chorage can be adjusted upward or frays, or loose parts. Damaged latch plate and push upward. Rein- downward to help position the belt parts must be replaced immedi- stall the latch plates into the head- away from your neck. The upper an- ately. Do not disassemble or modify liner. chorage can be adjusted upward by pushing anywhere on the anchorage. the system. Seat belt assemblies Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting To move the anchorage downward, must be replaced after a collision if Procedure they have been damaged (bent re- squeeze the actuation buttons while tractor, torn webbing, etc.). Use the following procedure to un- simultaneously pushing down on the twist a twisted lap/shoulder belt. anchorage assembly. Third Row Center Shoulder Belt 1. Position the latch plate as close as As a guide, if you are shorter than Instructions possible to the anchor point. average you will prefer a lower posi- The shoulder belt for the third row tion, and if you are taller than average 2. At about 15 to 30 cm above the center seat is located in the headliner you will prefer a higher position. latch plate, grasp and twist the belt slightly behind the third row seat. When you release the anchorage, try webbing 180 degrees to create a fold to move it up or down to make sure Pull the strap down and secure the that begins immediately above the that it is locked in position. small latch plate of the lap belt into latch plate. the small buckle until you hear a 3. Slide the latch plate upward over “click”. WARNING! the folded webbing. The folded web- Position the shoulder belt on your bing must enter the slot at the top of The seat belts height must only be chest so that it is comfortable and not the latch plate. adjusted when the vehicle is sta- resting on your neck. When the belt is tionary. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up long enough to fit , insert the large until it clears the folded webbing. latch plate into the buckle until you

39 SEAT BELTS IN which are used to secure a child re- under the “Child Restraints” section. PASSENGER SEATING straint system. For additional infor- The chart below defines the type of POSITIONS mation, refer to “Installing Child Re- feature for each seating position. straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Auto- matic Locking Retractors (ALR) Driver Center Passenger ALR (for versions/markets, where First Row N/A N/A provided) Second Row ALR N/A ALR Third Row ALR CINCH ALR • N/A — Not Applicable wrap around the occupant's mid- that has a belt with this feature. Chil- section. Slide the latch plate into the dren 12 years old and under should • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor buckle until you hear a "click." always be properly restrained in the rear seat. If the passenger seating position is AUTOMATIC LOCKING How To Engage The Automatic equipped with an ALR and is being RETRACTOR MODE (ALR) Locking Mode used for normal usage: In this mode, the shoulder belt is auto- Only pull the belt webbing out far matically pre-locked. The belt will still 1. Buckle the combination lap and enough to comfortably wrap around retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. the occupant's mid-section so as to not shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and activate the ALR. If the ALR is acti- Mode is available on all passenger- pull downward until the entire belt is vated, you will hear a ratcheting sound seating positions with a combination extracted. as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic to retract completely in this case and Locking Mode anytime a child safety then carefully pull out only the amount seat is installed in a seating position of webbing necessary to comfortably

40 3. Allow the belt to retract. As the ENERGY MANAGEMENT SEAT BELT belt retracts, you will hear a clicking FEATURE PRETENSIONERS sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. This vehicle has a safety belt system The seat belts for both front seating with an energy management feature positions are equipped with preten- How To Disengage The Automatic in the front seating positions to help sioning devices that are designed to Locking Mode further reduce the risk of injury in the remove slack from the seat belt in the Unbuckle the combination lap/ event of a head-on collision. This event of a collision. These devices may shoulder belt and allow it to retract safety belt system has a retractor as- improve the performance of the seat completely to disengage the Auto- sembly that is designed to release belt by assuring that the belt is tight matic Locking Mode and activate the webbing in a controlled manner. This about the occupant early in a colli- vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking feature is designed to help reduce the sion. Pretensioners work for all size mode. belt force acting on the occupant’s occupants, including those in child chest. restraints. WARNING! NOTE: These devices are not a WARNING! substitute for proper seat belt • The belt and retractor assembly placement by the occupant. The must be replaced if the seat belt • The belt and retractor assembly seat belt still must be worn snugly assembly Automatic Locking Re- must be replaced if the seat belt and positioned properly. tractor (ALR) feature or any assembly Automatic Locking Re- other seat belt function is not tractor (ALR) feature or any The pretensioners are triggered by the working properly when checked other seat belt function is not Occupant Restraint Controller according to the procedures in the working properly when checked (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- Service Manual. according to the procedures in the sioners are single use items. A de- • Failure to replace the belt and Service Manual. ployed pretensioner or a deployed air retractor assembly could increase • Failure to replace the belt and bag must be replaced immediately. the risk of injury in collisions. retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

41 SUPPLEMENTAL ACTIVE is designed to help prevent or reduce CAUTION! HEAD RESTRAINTS (AHR) the extent of injuries to the driver and All occupants, including the driver, — (for versions/markets front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. should not operate a vehicle or sit in where provided) a vehicle's seat until the head re- NOTE: The Active Head Re- These head restraints are passive, de- straints are placed in their proper straints (AHR) may or may not de- positions in order to minimize the ployable components, and vehicles ploy in the event of a front or side with this equipment cannot be readily risk of neck injury in the event of a impact. However if during a front collision. identified by any markings, only impact, a secondary rear impact through visual inspection of the head occurs, the AHR may deploy based NOTE: For more information on restraint. The head restraint will be on several factors, including the properly adjusting and positioning split in two halves, with the front half severity and type of the impact. the head restraint, refer to “Ad- being soft foam and trim, the back justing Active Head Restraints” in half being decorative plastic. “Understanding The Features Of How The Active Head Restraints Your Vehicle”. (AHR) Work Resetting Active Head Restraints The Occupant Restraint Controller (AHR) (ORC) determines whether the sever- If the Active Head Restraints are trig- ity, or type of rear impact will require gered in a collision, you must reset the the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to Active Head Restraint (AHR) head restraint on the driver’s and deploy. If a rear impact requires de- Components front passenger seat. You can recog- ployment, both the driver and front 1—Head Re- 3 — Head Re- nize when the Active Head Restraint passenger seat AHRs will be deployed. straint Front Half straint Back Half has been triggered by the fact that When AHRs deploy during a rear im- (Soft Foam and (Decorative Plas- they have moved forward (as shown pact, the front half of the head re- Trim) tic Rear Cover) in step three of the resetting proce- 2 — Seatback 4 — Head Re- straint extends forward to minimize dure). the gap between the back of the occu- straint Guide Tubes pant’s head and the AHR. This system 1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat. 42 • For safety reasons, have the Ac- tive Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. ACTIVE HOOD SYSTEM The Active Hood system is intended to enhance pedestrian protection by el- Hand Positioning Points On AHR 3 — Final Downward Movement To evating the vehicle’s hood upon an 2. Position the hands on the top of Engage Locking Mechanism impact with a pedestrian or other ob- the deployed AHR at a comfortable ject. The system is automatically activated when the vehicle is moving position. 4. The AHR front soft foam and trim within a specified vehicle speed range. half should lock into the back decora- 3. Pull down then rearward to- In order to detect a range of pedestri- tive plastic half. wards the rear of the vehicle then ans, other objects that are impacted down to engage the locking mecha- may result in an Active Hood deploy- nism. ment. Deployment Sensors And Controls The Electronic Pedestrian Protection Module (EPPM) determines if deployment of the actuators in a frontal impact is required. Based on the impact AHR In Reset Position sensors signals, the EPPM determines NOTE: when to deploy the actuators. The impact sensors are located within the 1 — Downward Movement • If you have difficulties or prob- 2 — Rearward Movement front bumper area. lems resetting the Active Head Restraints, see an authorized The EPPM monitors the readiness of dealer. the electronic parts of the Active Hood

43 system whenever the ignition switch is the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi- in the START or ON/RUN position. If nated, or if “SERVICE ACTIVE the key is in the LOCK position, in the HOOD” appears in the EVIC, see ACC position, or not in the ignition, your authorized dealer. the Active Hood system is not on and In the event of an Active Hood deploy- the Active Hood will not deploy. ment, the vehicle should be serviced The EPPM contains a backup power by an authorized dealer. The hood supply system that may deploy the hinges must be serviced and the ac- Temporary Hood Reset Position actuators even if the battery loses tuator assemblies replaced to restore power or it becomes disconnected system functionality. The front bumper assembly may af- prior to deployment. fect proper operation of the Active Following an Active Hood deploy- Hood system. The front bumper com- Service Active Hood System ment, the hood position can be tem- ponents should be inspected for dam- If the EPPM has deployed the Active porarily reset by pushing down at the age and replaced if necessary in the Hood, or if it detects a malfunction in rear edge over the hood hinges as the event of a frontal impact, even if it any part of the system, it turns on the internal pressure of each actuator is occurs at a low rate of speed. Air Bag Warning Light and it will relieved. The temporary hood reset position is intended to improve for- NOTE: After any Active Hood de- display the “SERVICE ACTIVE ployment, the vehicle should be HOOD” message in the Electronic Ve- ward driving visibility over the hood until the vehicle can be serviced. The taken to an authorized dealer im- hicle Information Center (EVIC), for mediately. versions/markets, where provided. A temporary hood reset position will single chime will sound if the Air Bag leave the hood approximately 5 mm Warning Light comes on again after above the fender surface. initial startup. It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the Active Hood system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. If

44 CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) To prevent possible damage, do not • Modifications to any part of the • Drivers must be aware of pedes- slam the rear of the hood to reset it. Active Hood system could cause it trians. Always be sure to check Press the rear of the hood down to fail when you need it. Do not for pedestrians, animals, other until an audible and tactile detent is modify the components or wiring. vehicles, and obstructions. You detected (approximately 5 mm Do not modify the front bumper, are responsible for safety and above the fender). This should se- vehicle body structure, or add an must continue to pay attention to cure both hood hinge reset mecha- aftermarket front bumper or your surroundings. Failure to do nisms. cover. so can result in serious injury or • It is dangerous to try to repair any death. part of the Active Hood system WARNING! yourself. Be sure to tell anyone ENHANCED SEAT BELT • Ignoring the Air Bag Warning who works on your vehicle that it USE REMINDER SYSTEM Light in your instrument panel or has an Active Hood system. (BeltAlert®) the “SERVICE ACTIVE HOOD” • Do not attempt to modify any BeltAlert® is a feature intended to message in the EVIC could mean part of your Active Hood system. remind the driver and front passenger you won’t have the Active Hood The Active Hood may deploy ac- (for versions/markets, where pro- to enhance pedestrian protection. cidentally or may not function vided with front passenger If the light does not come on as a properly if modifications are BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. bulb check when the ignition is made. Take your vehicle to an The feature is active whenever the first turned on, stays on after you authorized dealer for any hood ignition is on. If the driver or front start the vehicle, or if it comes on service. as you drive, see your authorized seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat dealer. (Continued) Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts (Continued) are fastened. The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 8 km/h, by blinking the Seat Belt 45 Reminder Light and sounding an in- BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled SUPPLEMENTAL termittent chime. Once the sequence by your authorized dealer. LANCIA RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) starts, it will continue for the entire does not recommend deactivating — AIR BAGS duration or until the respective seat- BeltAlert®. belts are fastened. After the sequence This vehicle has Advanced Front Air NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Bags for both the driver and front been deactivated, the Seat Belt Re- Light remains illuminated until the passenger as a supplement to the seat minder Light will continue to illu- respective seat belts are fastened. The belt restraint systems. The driver's minate while the driver’s or front driver should instruct all other occu- Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted passenger (for versions/markets, pants to fasten their seat belts. If a in the center of the steering wheel. where provided with BeltAlert®) front seat belt is unbuckled while The passenger's Advanced Front Air seat belt remains unfastened. traveling at speeds greater than Bag is mounted in the instrument 8 km/h, BeltAlert® will provide both SEAT BELTS AND panel, above the glove compartment. audio and visual notification. PREGNANT WOMEN The words SRS AIRBAG are em- bossed on the air bag covers. The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is We recommend that pregnant women not active when the front passenger use the seat belts throughout their seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe triggered when an animal or heavy is the best way to keep the baby safe. object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (for Pregnant women should wear the lap versions/markets, where provided). It part of the belt across the thighs and is recommended that pets be reas snug across the hips as possible. strained in the rear seat in pet har- Keep the belt low so that it does not nesses or pet carriers that are secured come across the abdomen. That way 1 — Driver And 2 — Knee Impact by seat belts, and cargo is properly the strong bones of the hips will take Passenger Ad- Bolsters stowed. the force if there is a collision. vanced Front Air Bags

46 NOTE: The Driver and Front Pas- (SAB). The Supplemental Seat- • Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag senger Advanced Front Air Bags Mounted Side Air Bags are marked • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side are certified to regulations for Ad- with an air bag label sewn into the Air Bags (SAB) vanced Air Bags. outboard side of the front seats. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflat- The Advanced Front Air Bags have a NOTE: able Curtains (SABIC) multistage inflator design. This allows • Air Bag covers may not be obvi- the air bag to have different rates of • Front and Side Impact Sensors ous in the interior trim, but they inflation based on several factors, in- will open during air bag deploy- • Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and cluding the severity and type of colli- ment. Seat Belt Buckle Switch sion. ADVANCED FRONT AIR This vehicle may be equipped with a • After any accident, the vehicle driver and/or front passenger seat should be taken to an autho- BAG FEATURES rized dealer immediately. belt buckle switch that detects The Advanced Front Air Bag system whether the driver or front passenger AIR BAG SYSTEM has multistage driver and front pas- seat belt is fastened. The seat belt COMPONENTS senger air bags. This system provides buckle switch may adjust the inflation output appropriate to the severity and rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. Your vehicle may be equipped with type of collision as determined by the the following air bag system compo- This vehicle is equipped with Supple- Occupant Restraint Controller nents: mental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur- (ORC), which may receive informa- tains (SABIC) to protect the driver, • Occupant Restraint Controller tion from the front impact sensors. front, and rear passengers sitting next (ORC) The first stage inflator is triggered to a window. The SABIC air bags are • Air Bag Warning Light immediately during an impact that located above the side windows and requires air bag deployment. This low their covers are also labeled: SRS • Steering Wheel and Column output is used in less severe collisions. AIRBAG. • Instrument Panel A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle is equipped with Supple- • Knee Impact Bolsters mental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags • Driver Advanced Front Air Bag

47 WARNING! Children 12 years old and under Never allow children to slide the should always ride buckled up in a shoulder belt behind them or under • No objects should be placed over rear seat. their arm. or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such ob- If the air bag system in this vehicle jects could cause harm if the ve- WARNING! needs to be modified to accommodate hicle is in a collision severe Infants in rear-facing child re- a disabled person, contact the Cus- enough to cause the air bag to straints should never ride in the tomer Center. inflate. front seat of a vehicle with a Pas- The driver and front passenger seats • Do not put anything on or around senger Advanced Front Air Bag. An should be moved back as far as prac- the air bag covers or attempt to air bag deployment can cause se- tical to allow the Advanced Front Air open them manually. You may vere injury or death to infants in Bags room to inflate. that position. damage the air bags and you Do not lean against the door or win- could be injured because the air You should read the instructions pro- dow. If your vehicle has side air bags, bags may no longer be functional. and deployment occurs, the side air The protective covers for the air vided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it prop- bags will inflate forcefully into the bag cushions are designed to open space between you and the door. only when the air bags are inflat- erly. ing. All occupants should always wear • Do not drill, cut or tamper with their lap and shoulder belts properly. WARNING! the knee bolster in any way. Children that are not big enough to • Relying on the air bags alone • Do not mount any accessories to wear the vehicle seat belt properly could lead to more severe injuries the knee bolster such as alarm (see Section on Child Restraints) in a collision. The air bags work lights, stereos, citizen band ra- should be secured in the rear seat in with your seat belt to restrain you dios, etc. child restraints or belt-positioning properly. In some collisions, the air bags won't deploy at all. Al- Here are some simple steps you can booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt- ways wear your seat belts even take to minimize the risk of harm though you have air bags. from a deploying air bag: positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. (Continued)

48 protection to help protect an occupant the body structure. Each air bag fea- WARNING! (Continued) during a side impact. The SAB is tures inflated chambers placed adja- • Being too close to the steering marked with an air bag label sewn cent to the head of each outboard wheel or instrument panel during into the outboard side of the front occupant that reduce the potential for Advanced Front Air Bag deploy- seats. side-impact head injuries. The SABIC ment could cause serious injury, deploy downward, covering both win- including death. Air bags need dows on the impact side. room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to NOTE: reach the steering wheel or in- • Should a vehicle rollover occur, strument panel. the pretensioners and/or SAB • Side air bags also need room to and SABIC air bags on both inflate. Do not lean against the sides of the vehicle may deploy. door or window. Sit upright in the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air • Air Bag covers may not be obvi- center of the seat. Bag Label ous in the interior trim, but they • In a collision, you and your pas- When the air bag deploys, it opens the will open during air bag sengers can suffer much greater seam between the front and side of the deployment. injuries if you are not properly seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys buckled up. You can strike the independently; a left side impact de- • Being too close to the SAB and interior of your vehicle or other ploys the left air bag only and a right- SABIC air bags during deploy- passengers, or you can be thrown side impact deploys the right air bag ment could cause you to be se- out of the vehicle. Always be sure only. verely injured or killed. you and others in your vehicle are The system includes side impact sen- buckled up properly. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) sors that are calibrated to deploy the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side side air bags during impacts that re- SABIC air bags may offer side-impact Air Bags (SAB) quire air bag occupant protection. and vehicle rollover protection to Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air front and rear seat outboard occu- SAB and SABIC air bags are a supple- Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced pants in addition to that provided by ment to the seat belt restraint system.

49 Occupants, including children who front passenger. Side air bags also WARNING! (Continued) are up against or very close to SAB or work with seat belts to improve occu- SABIC air bags can be seriously in- • Your vehicle is equipped with left pant protection. jured or killed. Occupants, especially and right Supplemental Side Air children, should not lean on or sleep Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT against the door, side windows, or do not stack luggage or other SENSORS AND CONTROLS cargo up high enough to block the area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Occupant Restraint Controller location of the SABIC. The area inflate, even if they are in an infant or (ORC) child restraint. Always sit upright as where the SABIC is located possible with your back against the should remain free from any ob- The ORC is part of a regulated safety seat back, use the seat belts properly, structions. system required for this vehicle. and use the appropriate sized child • Do not use accessory seat covers The ORC determines if deployment of restraint, infant restraint or booster or place objects between you and the front and/or side air bags in a seat recommended for the size and the side air bags; the performance frontal or side collision is required. weight of the child. could be adversely affected Based on the impact sensor's signals, and/or objects could be pushed a central electronic ORC deploys the into you, causing serious injury. WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted • Your vehicle is equipped with Knee Impact Bolsters Side Air Bags, and front seat belt pre- SABIC air bags, do not have any The Knee Impact Bolsters help pro- tensioners, as required, depending on accessory items installed which tect the knees of the driver and the several factors, including the severity will alter the roof, including add- front passenger, and position front oc- and type of impact. ing a sunroof to your vehicle. Do cupants for the best interaction with not add roof racks that require the Advanced Front Air Bags. Advanced Front Air Bags are designed permanent attachments (bolts or to provide additional protection by screws) for installation on the ve- Along with seat belts and pretension- supplementing the seat belts in cer- hicle roof. Do not drill into the ers, Advanced Front Air Bags work tain frontal collisions depending on roof of the vehicle for any reason. with the knee bolsters to provide im- several factors, including the severity proved protection for the driver and and type of collision. Advanced Front (Continued)

50 Air Bags are not expected to reduce needed to help keep you in position, It also includes diagnostics that will the risk of injury in rear, side, or roll- away from an inflating air bag. illuminate the instrument cluster Air over collisions. Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is The ORC monitors the readiness of noted that could affect the air bag The Advanced Front Air Bags will not the electronic parts of the air bag sys- system. The diagnostics also record deploy in all frontal collisions, includ- tem whenever the ignition switch is in the nature of the malfunction. ing some that may produce substan- the START or ON/RUN position. If tial vehicle damage — for example, the key is in the OFF position, in the some pole collisions, truck under- ACC position, or not in the ignition, WARNING! rides, and angle offset collisions. On the air bag system is not on and the air Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light the other hand, depending on the type bags will not inflate. in your instrument panel could and location of impact, Advanced The ORC contains a backup power mean you won't have the air bags to Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes supply system that may deploy the air protect you in a collision. If the light with little vehicle front-end damage bags even if the battery loses power or does not come on as a bulb check but that produce a severe initial decel- it becomes disconnected prior to de- when the ignition is first turned on, eration. ployment. stays on after you start the vehicle, The side air bags will not deploy in all or if it comes on as you drive, have Also, the ORC turns on the side collisions. Side air bag deploy- an authorized dealer service the air Air Bag Warning Light in ment will depend on the severity and bag system immediately. the instrument panel for type of collision. approximately four to eight Driver And Passenger Advanced Because air bag sensors measure ve- seconds for a self-check when the ig- Front Air Bag Inflator Units hicle deceleration over time, vehicle nition is first turned on. After the self- The Driver and Passenger Advanced speed and damage by themselves are check, the Air Bag Warning Light will Front Air Bag Inflator Units are lo- not good indicators of whether or not turn off. If the ORC detects a mal- cated in the center of the steering an air bag should have deployed. function in any part of the system, it wheel and on the right side of the turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, Seat belts are necessary for your pro- instrument panel. When the ORC de- either momentarily or continuously. A tection in all collisions, and also are tects a collision requiring the Ad- single chime will sound if the light vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the comes on again after initial startup.

51 inflator units. A large quantity of non- The ORC determines if a side collision these events, the ORC will deploy the toxic gas is generated to inflate the requires the side air bags to inflate, SABIC only on the impact side of the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different based on the severity and type of col- vehicle. air bag inflation rates are possible, lision. A quantity of non-toxic gas is gener- based on several factors, including the Based on the severity and type of col- ated to inflate the side curtain air bag. collision type and severity. The steer- lision, the side air bag inflator on the The inflating side curtain air bag ing wheel hub trim cover and the up- crash side of the vehicle may be trig- pushes the outside edge of the head- per right side of the instrument panel gered, releasing a quantity of non- liner out of the way and covers the separate and fold out of the way as the toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits window. The air bag inflates in about air bags inflate to their full size. The through the seat seam into the space 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 between the occupant and the door. the time that it takes to blink your milliseconds. This is about half of the The SAB fully inflates in about 10 eyes) with enough force to injure you time it takes to blink your eyes. The milliseconds. The side air bag moves if you are not belted and seated prop- air bags then quickly deflate while at a very high speed and with such a erly, or if items are positioned in the helping to restrain the driver and high force that it could injure you if area where the side curtain air bag front passenger. you are not seated properly, or if items inflates. This especially applies to The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is are positioned in the area where the children. The side curtain air bag is vented through the vent holes in the side air bag inflates. This especially only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when sides of the air bag. In this way, the air applies to children. it is inflated. bags do not interfere with your con- Supplemental Side Air Bag Because air bag sensors estimate de- trol of the vehicle. Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) celeration over time, vehicle speed Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Inflator Units and damage are not good indicators of Air Bag (SAB) Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is whether or not an air bag should have The Supplemental Seat-Mounted confined to a particular area of the deployed. Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to side of the vehicle, the ORC may de- NOTE: In a rollover the preten- activate only in certain side collisions. ploy the SABIC air bags, depending sioners and/or SAB and SABIC air on the severity and type of collision. In bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

52 Front And Side Impact Sensors an event, the ignition switch must be and normally heal quickly. How- In front and side impacts, impact sen- changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF. ever, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you sors can aid the ORC in determining If A Deployment Occurs appropriate response to impact have any blistering, see your doctor The Advanced Front Air Bags are de- events. immediately. signed to deflate immediately after Enhanced Accident Response deployment. • As the air bags deflate, you may see System some smoke-like particles. The NOTE: Front and/or side air bags particles are a normal by-product In the event of an impact causing air will not deploy in all collisions. of the process that generates the bag deployment, if the communica- This does not mean something is non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation network remains intact, and the wrong with the air bag system. tion. These airborne particles may power remains intact, depending on If you do have a collision which de- irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or the nature of the event the ORC will throat. If you have skin or eye irri- determine whether to have the En- ploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: tation, rinse the area with cool wa- hanced Accident Response System ter. For nose or throat irritation, perform the following functions: • The nylon air bag material may move to fresh air. If the irritation • Cut off fuel to the engine. sometimes cause abrasions and/or continues, see your doctor. If these skin reddening to the driver and particles settle on your clothing, • Flash hazard lights as long as the front passenger as the air bags de- follow the garment manufacturer's battery has power or until the igni- ploy and unfold. The abrasions are instructions for cleaning. tion is cycled off. similar to friction rope burns or Do not drive your vehicle after the air • Turn on the interior lights, which those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They bags have deployed. If you are in- remain on as long as the battery has volved in another collision, the air power or until the ignition key is are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent bags will not be in place to protect removed. you. • Unlock the doors automatically. In order to reset the Enhanced Acci- dent Response System functions after 53 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Deployed air bags and seat belt pre- • Do not attempt to modify any tensioners can not protect you in WARNING! part of your air bag system. The another collision. Have the air • Modifications to any part of the air bag may inflate accidentally bags, seat belt pretensioners, and air bag system could cause it to or may not function properly if the front seat belt retractor assem- fail when you need it. You could modifications are made. Take blies replaced by an authorized be injured if the air bag system is your vehicle to an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the not there to protect you. Do not dealer for any air bag system ser- Occupant Restraint Controller modify the components or wiring, vice. If your seat, including your (ORC) system serviced as well. including adding any kind of trim cover and cushion, needs to badges or stickers to the steering be serviced in any way (including wheel hub trim cover or the upper removal or loosening/tightening right side of the instrument panel. of seat attachment bolts), take Do not modify the front bumper, the vehicle to your authorized vehicle body structure, or add af- dealer. Only manufacturer ap- termarket side steps or running proved seat accessories may be boards. used. If it is necessary to modify • It is dangerous to try to repair any the air bag system for persons part of the air bag system your- with disabilities, contact your au- self. Be sure to tell anyone who thorized dealer. works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

54 Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, ta- • Whether or not the driver and pas- chometer, or any engine related senger safety belts were gauges are not working, the Occu- buckled/fastened; You will want to have the pant Restraint Controller (ORC) air bags ready to inflate for • How far (if at all) the driver was may also be disabled. The air bags your protection in a colli- depressing the accelerator and/or may not be ready to inflate for your sion. The Air Bag Warning brake pedal; and, protection. Promptly check the Light monitors the internal circuits fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to • How fast the vehicle was traveling. and interconnecting wiring associated the label located on the inside of with air bag system electrical compo- These data can help provide a better the fuse block cover for the proper nents. While the air bag system is understanding of the circumstances in air bag fuses. See your authorized designed to be maintenance free, if which crashes and injuries occur. dealer if the fuse is good. any of the following occurs, have an NOTE: EDR data are recorded by authorized dealer service the air bag Event Data Recorder (EDR) your vehicle only if a non-trivial system immediately. This vehicle is equipped with an event crash situation occurs; no data are • The Air Bag Warning Light does data recorder (EDR). The main pur- recorded by the EDR under nor- not come on during the four to eight pose of an EDR is to record, in certain mal driving conditions and no per- seconds when the ignition switch is crash or near crash-like situations, sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, first turned to the ON/RUN posi- such as an air bag deployment or hit- and crash location) are recorded. tion. ting a road obstacle, data that will as- However, other parties, such as sist in understanding how a vehicle’s law enforcement, could combine • The Air Bag Warning Light remains systems performed. The EDR is de- the EDR data with the type of per- on after the four to eight-second signed to record data related to vehicle sonally identifying data routinely interval. dynamics and safety systems for a acquired during a crash investiga- • The Air Bag Warning Light comes short period of time, typically 30 section. on intermittently or remains on onds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is To read data recorded by an EDR, while driving. designed to record such data as: special equipment is required, and ac- • How various systems in your ve- cess to the vehicle or the EDR is hicle were operating; needed. In addition to the vehicle

55 manufacturer, other parties, such as Children 12 years or younger should WARNING! (Continued) law enforcement, that have the spe- ride properly buckled up in a rear cial equipment, can read the informa- seat. According to crash statistics, • In a collision, an unrestrained tion if they have access to the vehicle children are safer when properly re- child, even a tiny baby, can be- or the EDR. strained in the rear seats rather than come a projectile inside the ve- in the front. hicle. The force required to hold CHILD RESTRAINTS even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could Everyone in your vehicle needs to be WARNING! buckled up at all times, including ba- not hold the child, no matter how bies and children. • “Extreme Hazard! Do not use a strong you are. The child and oth- rearward-facing child restraint ers could be badly injured. Any on a seat protected by an air bag child riding in your vehicle in front of it!” Refer to visor and should be in a proper restraint for door shut face mounted labels for the child's size. information.

(Continued)

56 Mass Group Seating Position (or other site) Front Passen- Rear Rear Center Intermediate Intermediate ger Outboard Outboard Center Group0-Upto10kg XUUUX Group0+-Upto13kgXUUUX Group1-9to18kg XUUUX GroupII-15to25kgXUUUX GroupIII-22to36kgXUUUX Key of letters used in the table above: • L = Suitable for particular child • X = Seat position not suitable for • U = Suitable for “universal” cat- restraints given on attached list. children in this age/weight group. egory restraints approved for use in These restraints may be of the “spe- this age/weight group. cific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories. • UF = Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints ap- • B = Built-in restraint approved for proved for use in this mass group. the age/weight group. Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart Interme- Interme- Front diate Mass Size Rear Rear diate Other Fixture Passen- Center Group Class Outboard Center Outboard Sites ger LUX. SSnG Quad F ISO/L1 X X X IUF* IUF X Carrycot G ISO/L2 X X IUF** IUF* IUF X (1)XXXXXX

57 Vehicle ISOFIX Positions Chart Interme- Interme- Front diate Mass Size Rear Rear diate Other Fixture Passen- Center Group Class Outboard Center Outboard Sites ger LUX. SSnG Quad 0—upto E ISO/R1 X X IUF** IUF IUF X 10 kg (1)XXXXXX E ISO/R1 X X IUF** IUF IUF X 0+—up D ISO/R2 X X IUF** IUF IUF X to 13 kg C ISO/R3 X X IUF** IUF IUF X (1)XXXXXX D ISO/R2 X X IUF** IUF IUF X C ISO/R3 X X IUF** IUF IUF X I–9to B ISO/F2 X X IUF** IUF IUF X 18 kg B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF** IUF IUF X A ISO/F3 X X IUF** IUF IUF X (1)XXXXXX II–15to (1)XXXXXX 25 kg III–22to (1)XXXXXX 36 kg Key of letters used in the table above: group, the car manufacturer shall • IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child restraint systems of “univer- • (1) For the CRS which do not carry child restraint system(s) recom- sal” category approved for use in the ISO/XX size class identification mended for each position. the mass group. (A to G), for the applicable mass

58 • IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX •X=ISOFIX position not suitable for • ** = Inboard buckle for Left side child restraint systems (CRS) given ISOFIX child restraint systems in this seating position must be behind all in the attachment list. These ISO- mass group and/or this size class. ISOFIX Child Restraints. FIX CRS are those of the “specific • * = Both LH & RH 2nd row seats vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi- must be in used position. (Seats can universal” categories. not be folded into floor)

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Recommended Type of Child Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert- younger and who have not reached ible Child Restraint, facing rearward the height or weight limits of their in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Small Children Children who are at least two years Forward-Facing Child Restraint with old or who have out-grown the height a five-point Harness, facing forward or weight limit of their rear-facing in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Larger Children Children who have out-grown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the forward-facing child restraint, but vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear are too small to properly fit the vehi- seat of the vehicle cle’s seat belt Children Too Large for Child Children 12 years old or younger, Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear Restraints who have out-grown the height or seat of the vehicle weight limit of their booster seat

59 Infants And Child Restraints WARNING! forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the Safety experts recommend that chil- • Never place a rear facing infant dren ride rearward-facing in the ve- highest weight or height allowed by seat in front of an air bag. A de- the child seat. hicle until they are two years old or ploying Passenger Advanced until they reach either the height or Front Air Bag can cause death or All children whose weight or height is weight limit of their rear facing child serious injury to a child 12 years above the forward-facing limit for the safety seat. Two types of child re- or younger, including a child in a child seat should use a belt- straints can be used rearward-facing: rearward facing infant seat. positioning booster seat until the ve- infant carriers and convertible child • Only use a rearward-facing child hicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the seats. restraint in a vehicle with a rear child cannot sit with knees bent over The infant carrier is only used seat. the vehicle’s seat cushion while the rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is child’s back is against the seatback, recommended for children from birth Older Children And Child they should use a belt-positioning until they reach the weight or height Restraints booster seat. The child and belt- positioning booster seat are held in limit of the infant carrier. Convertible Children who are two years old or who the vehicle by the seat belt. child seats can be used either have outgrown their rear-facing con- rearward-facing or forward-facing in vertible child seat can ride forward- the vehicle. Convertible child seats of- facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing WARNING! ten have a higher weight limit in the child seats and convertible child seats • Improper installation can lead to rearward-facing direction than infant used in the forward-facing direction failure of an infant or child re- carriers do, so they can be used are for children who are over two straint. It could come loose in a rearward-facing by children who years old or who have outgrown the collision. The child could be have outgrown their infant carrier but rear-facing weight or height limit of badly injured or killed. Follow are still less than at least two years their rear-facing convertible child the child restraint manufacturer’s old. Children should remain seat. Children should remain in a directions exactly when installing rearward-facing until they reach the an infant or child restraint. highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. (Continued)

60 should use the seat belt in a rear seat. 5. Can the child stay seated like this WARNING! (Continued) Use this simple 5-step test to decide for the whole trip? • When your child restraint is not whether the child can use the vehicle’s If the answer to any of these questions in use, secure it in the vehicle with seat belt alone: the seat belt or ISOFIX anchor- was “no,” then the child still needs to ages, or remove it from the ve- 1. Can the child sit all the way back use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the hicle. Do not leave it loose in the against the back of the vehicle seat? child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. A child’s vehicle. In a sudden stop or acci- 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfort- squirming or slouching can move the dent, it could strike the occupants ably over the front of the vehicle seat – belt out of position. If the shoulder or seatbacks and cause serious while they are still sitting all the way belt contacts the face or neck, move personal injury. back? the child closer to the center of the Children Too Large For Booster 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the Seats child’s shoulder between their neck shoulder belt under an arm or behind and arm? their back. Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as and whose legs are long enough to possible, touching the child’s thighs bend over the front of the seat when and not their stomach? their back is against the seatback,

61 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below Weight of the ISOFIX – ISOFIX – Child + Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only Restraint + Top Tether Tether Anchor Only Anchor Rear-Facing Up to 29.5 kg XX Child Restraint Rear-Facing More than X Child Restraint 29.5 kg Forward-Facing Up to 29.5 kg XX Child Restraint Forward-Facing More than X Child Restraint 29.5 kg ISOFIX Restraint System the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages Your vehicle is equipped with the positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In child restraint anchorage system The lower anchorages are these seating positions, the seat belt called ISOFIX. The ISOFIX system round bars that are found at must be used with the top tether an- has three vehicle anchor points for the rear of the seat cushion chorage to install the child restraint. installing ISOFIX-equipped child where it meets the seatback. seats. There are two lower anchorages They are just visible when you lean located at the back of the seat cushion into the rear seat to install the child where it meets the seatback and one restraint. You will easily feel them if top tether anchorage located behind you run your finger along the gap the seating position. These anchor- between the seatback and seat ages are used to install ISOFIX- cushion. equipped child seats without using

62 Locating The ISOFIX Anchorages top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. In addition, there are tether strap anchors located be- Center Seat ISOFIX hind each rear seatback, If a child restraint installed in the near to the floor. center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard ISOFIX Anchorages (Second Row position, do not use that outboard po- Anchorages Shown) sition. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard ISOFIX anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

ISOFIX Anchorages (Third Row WARNING! 60/40 Anchorage Shown) Never use the same lower anchor- ISOFIX-compatible child restraint age to attach more than one child systems will be equipped with a rigid restraint. Please refer to “Installing ISOFIX Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown) bar or a flexible strap on each side. The ISOFIX-Compatible Child Re- Each will have a hook or connector to straint System” for typical installa- attach to the lower anchorage and a tion instructions. way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child re- Always follow the directions of the straints and some rear-facing infant child restraint manufacturer when in- restraints will also be equipped with a stalling your child restraint. Not all tether strap. The tether strap will child restraint systems will be in- have a hook at the end to attach to the stalled as described here.

63 To Install An ISOFIX-compatible 4. Attach the connectors of the child WARNING! Child Restraint restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. Child restraint anchorages are de- 1. If the selected seating position has signed to withstand only those a Switchable Automatic Locking Re- 5. If the child restraint has a tether loads imposed by correctly-fitted tractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat strap, connect it to the top tether an- child restraints. Under no circum- belt, following the instructions below. chorage. See the section “Installing stances are they to be used for adult See the section “Installing Child Re- Child Restraints Using the Top Tether seat belts, harnesses, or for attach- straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” Anchorage” for directions to attach a ing other items or equipment to the to check what type of seat belt each tether anchor. vehicle. seating position has. 6. Tighten all of the straps as you How To Stow An Unused ALR 2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower push the child restraint rearward and Seatbelt connectors and on the tether strap of downward into the seat. Remove the child seat so that you can more slack in the straps according to the When using the ISOFIX attaching easily attach the connectors to the ve- child restraint manufacturer’s in- system to install a child restraint, stow hicle anchorages. structions. all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used 3. Place the child seat between the 7. Test that the child restraint is in- to secure child restraints. An unused lower anchorages for that seating po- stalled tightly by pulling back and belt could injure a child if they play sition. For some second row seats, you forth on the child seat at the belt path. with it and accidentally lock the seat- may need to recline the seat and / or It should not move more than 25.4 belt retractor. Before installing a child raise the head restraint to get a better mm in any direction. restraint using the ISOFIX system, fit. If the rear seat can be moved for- buckle the seat belt behind the child ward and rearward in the vehicle, you restraint and out of the child’s reach. may wish to move it to its rear-most If the buckled seat belt interferes with position to make room for the child the child restraint installation, instead seat. You may also move the front seat of buckling it behind the child re- forward to allow more room for the straint, route the seat belt through the car seat. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. 64 Remind all children in the vehicle that the retractor and then letting the web- 2. Pull enough of the seat belt web- the seat belts are not toys and that bing retract back into the retractor. If bing from the retractor to pass it they should not play with them. it is locked, the ALR will make a through the belt path of the child re- clicking noise while the webbing is straint. Do not twist the belt webbing pulled back into the retractor. For in the belt path. WARNING! additional information on ALR, refer 3. Slide the latch plate into the Improper installation of a child re- to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de- buckle until you hear a “click.” straint to the ISOFIX anchorages scription under “Occupant Re- can lead to failure of an infant or straints.” The cinching latch plate is 4. Pull on the webbing to make the child restraint. The child could be designed to hold the lap portion of the lap portion tight against the child badly injured or killed. Follow the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled seat. manufacturer's directions exactly tight and straight through a child re- 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on when installing an infant or child straint’s belt path. restraint. the shoulder part of the belt until you Installing A Child Restraint With have pulled all the seat belt webbing Installing Child Restraints Using A Switchable Automatic Locking out of the retractor. Then, allow the The Vehicle Seat Belt Retractor (ALR) webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you The seat belts in the passenger seating 1. Place the child seat in the center of will hear a clicking sound. This means positions are equipped with either a the seating position. For some second the seat belt is now in the Automatic Switchable Automatic Locking Re- row seats, you may need to recline the Locking mode. tractor (ALR) or a cinching latch seat and/or raise the head restraint to plate or both. Both types of seat belts get a better fit. If the rear seat can be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the are designed to keep the lap portion of moved forward and rearward in the retractor. If it is locked, you should the seat belt tight around the child vehicle, you may wish to move it to its not be able to pull out any webbing. If restraint so that it is not necessary to rear-most position to make room for the retractor is not locked, repeat step use a locking clip. The ALR retractor the child seat. You may also move the 5. can be “switched” into a locked mode front seat forward to allow more room by pulling all of the webbing out of for the car seat.

65 7. Finally, pull up on any excess web- Child Restraint With A Cinching 5. If the child restraint has a top bing to tighten the lap portion around Latch Plate (CINCH) — (for tether strap and the seating position the child restraint while you push the versions/markets where provided) has a top tether anchorage, connect child restraint rearward and down- the tether strap to the anchorage and 1. Place the child seat in the center of ward into the vehicle seat. tighten the tether strap. Refer to “In- the seating position. For some second stalling Child Restraints Using The 8. If the child restraint has a top row seats, you may need to recline the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions tether strap and the seating position seat and / or raise the head restraint to to attach a tether anchor. has a top tether anchorage, connect get a better fit. If the rear seat can be the tether strap to the anchorage and moved forward and rearward in the 6. Test that the child restraint is in- tighten the tether strap. See the sec- vehicle, you may wish to move it to its stalled tightly by pulling back and tion “Installing Child Restraints Us- rear-most position to make room for forth on the child seat at the belt path. ing the Top Tether Anchorage” for the child seat. You may also move the It should not move more than 25.4 directions to attach a tether anchor. front seat forward to allow more room mm in any direction. for the car seat. 9. Test that the child restraint is in- Any seat belt system will loosen with stalled tightly by pulling back and 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt time, so check the belt occasionally, forth on the child seat at the belt path. webbing from the retractor to pass it and pull it tight if necessary. It should not move more than 25.4 through the belt path of the child re- If the buckle or the cinching latch mm in any direction. straint. Do not twist the belt webbing plate is too close to the belt path open- in the belt path. Any seat belt system will loosen with ing of the child restraint, you may time, so check the belt occasionally, 3. Slide the latch plate into the have trouble tightening the seat belt. and pull it tight if necessary. buckle until you hear a “click.” If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the 4. Finally, pull up on any excess web- short buckle-end belt up to three full bing to tighten the lap portion around turns to shorten it. Insert the latch the child restraint while you push the plate into the buckle with the release child restraint rearward and down- button facing out, away from the ward into the vehicle seat.

66 child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, 2. Route the tether strap to provide above, to complete the installation of the most direct path for the strap be- the child restraint. tween the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjust- If the belt still cannot be tightened able rear head restraints, raise the after you shorten the buckle, discon- head restraint, and where possible, nect the latch plate from the buckle, route the tether strap under the head turn the buckle around one half turn, restraint and between the two posts. If and insert the latch plate into the not possible, lower the head restraint ISOFIX Anchorages (Third Row buckle again. If you still cannot make and pass the tether strap around the 60/40 Anchorage Shown) the child restraint installation tight, outboard side of the head restraint. try a different seating position. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the according to the child restraint manu- Installing Child Restraints Using child restraint to the top tether an- facturer’s instructions. The Top Tether Anchorage chorage as shown in the diagram. 1. Look behind the seating position WARNING! where you plan to install the child • An incorrectly anchored tether restraint to find the tether anchorage. strap could lead to increased head You may need to move the seat for- motion and possible injury to the ward to provide better access to the child. Use only the anchorage po- tether anchorage. If there is no top sition directly behind the child tether anchorage for that seating po- seat to secure a child restraint top sition, move the child restraint to an- tether strap. other position in the vehicle if one is Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting available. (Second Row Anchorage Shown) • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.

67 Transporting Pets The engine oil installed in the engine SAFETY TIPS at the factory is a high-quality energy Air Bags deploying in the front seat conserving type lubricant. Oil TRANSPORTING could harm your pet. An unrestrained changes should be consistent with an- pet could be thrown about and possi- PASSENGERS ticipated climate conditions under bly injured, or injure a passenger dur- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN- which vehicle operations will occur. ing panic braking or in a collision. GERS IN THE CARGO AREA. For the recommended viscosity and Pets should be restrained in the rear quality grades, refer to “Maintenance seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve- WARNING! that are secured by seat belts. hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR • Do not leave children or animals STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST ENGINE BREAK-IN inside parked vehicles in hot NEVER BE USED. weather. Interior heat build-up RECOMMENDATIONS A new engine may consume some oil may cause serious injury or A long break-in period is not required during its first few thousand kilome- death. for the engine and drivetrain (trans- ters of operation. This should be con- • It is extremely dangerous to ride mission and axle) in your vehicle. sidered a normal part of the break-in in a cargo area, inside or outside and not interpreted as an indication of of a vehicle. In a collision, people Drive moderately during the first difficulty. riding in these areas are more 500 km. After the initial 100 km, likely to be seriously injured or speeds up to 80 or 90 km/h are desir- ADDITIONAL killed. able. REQUIREMENTS FOR • Do not allow people to ride in any While cruising, brief full-throttle ac- DIESEL ENGINE area of your vehicle that is not celeration within the limits of local During the first 1500 km avoid heavy equipped with seats and seat traffic laws contributes to a good loads, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do belts. break-in. Wide-open throttle accel- not exceed 2/3 of the maximum per- • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is eration in low gear can be detrimental missible engine speed for each gear. in a seat and using a seat belt and should be avoided. Change gear in good time. Do not shift properly. down a gear manually in order to brake. 68 EXHAUST GAS The best protection against carbon parts. Damaged parts must be re- monoxide entry into the vehicle body placed immediately. Do not disas- is a properly maintained engine ex- semble or modify the system. WARNING! haust system. Front seat belt assemblies must be Exhaust gases can injure or kill. Whenever a change is noticed in the replaced after a collision. Rear seat They contain carbon monoxide sound of the exhaust system, when belt assemblies must be replaced after (CO), which is colorless and odor- exhaust fumes can be detected inside a collision if they have been damaged less. Breathing it can make you un- the vehicle, or when the underside or (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, conscious and can eventually poi- rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a etc.). If there is any question regard- son you. To avoid breathing (CO), competent mechanic inspect the coming belt or retractor condition, replace follow these safety tips: plete exhaust system and adjacent the belt. • Do not run the engine in a closed body areas for broken, damaged, de- garage or in confined areas any Air Bag Warning Light teriorated, or mispositioned parts. longer than needed to move your Open seams or loose connections vehicle in or out of the area. could permit exhaust fumes to seep The light should come on • If you are required to drive with into the passenger compartment. In and remain on for four to the trunk/liftgate/rear doors addition, inspect the exhaust system eight seconds as a bulb open, make sure that all windows each time the vehicle is raised for lu- check when the ignition are closed and the climate control brication or oil change. Replace as switch is first turned ON. If the light is BLOWER switch is set at high required. not lit during starting, see your autho- speed. DO NOT use the recircula- SAFETY CHECKS YOU rized dealer. If the light stays on, tion mode. flickers, or comes on while driving, • If it is necessary to sit in a parked SHOULD MAKE INSIDE have the system checked by an autho- vehicle with the engine running, THE VEHICLE rized dealer. adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into Seat Belts Defroster the vehicle. Set the blower at high Inspect the belt system periodically, Check operation by selecting the de- speed. checking for cuts, frays, and loose frost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able

69 to feel the air directed against the WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is Pedals that cannot move freely can • Check mounting of mats on a inoperable. cause loss of vehicle control and regular basis. Always properly re- increase the risk of serious personal install and secure floor mats that Floor Mat Safety Information injury. have been removed for cleaning. Always use floor mats designed to fit • Always make sure that floor mats • Always make sure that objects the footwell of your vehicle. Use only are properly attached to the floor cannot fall into the driver foot- floor mats that leave the pedal area mat fasteners. well while the vehicle is moving. unobstructed and that are firmly se- • Never place or install floor mats Objects can become trapped un- cured so that they cannot slip out of or other floor coverings in the ve- der the brake pedal and accelera- position and interfere with the pedals hicle that cannot be properly se- tor pedal causing a loss of vehicle or impair safe operation of your ve- cured to prevent them from mov- control. hicle in other ways. ing and interfering with the • If required, mounting posts must pedals or the ability to control the be properly installed, if not vehicle. equipped from the factory. • Never put floor mats or other Failure to properly follow floor mat floor coverings on top of already installation or mounting can cause installed floor mats. Additional interference with the brake pedal floor mats and other coverings and accelerator pedal operation will reduce the size of the pedal causing loss of control of the ve- area and interfere with the ped- hicle. als.

(Continued)

70 PERIODIC SAFETY Door Latches CHECKS YOU SHOULD Check for positive closing, latching, MAKE OUTSIDE THE and locking. VEHICLE Fluid Leaks Tires Check area under vehicle after over- Examine tires for excessive tread wear night parking for fuel, engine coolant, and uneven wear patterns. Check for oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gaso- stones, nails, glass, or other objects line fumes are detected or if fuel, lodged in the tread or sidewall. In- power steering fluid (if equipped), or spect the tread for cuts and cracks. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and cause should be located and corrected bulges. Check the wheel nuts for immediately. tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

71 72 3

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• MIRRORS ...... 82 • INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR (for versions/ markets, where provided) ...... 82 • AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 82 • OUTSIDE MIRRORS ...... 82 • DRIVER'S AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 83 • OUTSIDE MIRROR FOLDING FEATURE ...... 83 • POWER MIRRORS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 83 • HEATED MIRRORS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 83 • TILT MIRRORS IN REVERSE (available with memory seat only), (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 83 • POWER FOLDING MIRRORS (for versions/ markets, where provided)...... 84 • ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 84 • BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 84

73 • REAR CROSS PATH (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 87 • MODES OF OPERATION ...... 88 • Uconnect® PHONE ...... 89 • COMPATIBLE PHONES ...... 90 • OPERATION...... 90 • PHONE CALL FEATURES ...... 95 • ANSWER OR REJECT AN INCOMING CALL — NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS...... 95 • ANSWER OR REJECT AN INCOMING CALL — CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS...... 95 • MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT CALL IN PROGRESS ...... 95 • PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD .....95 • CONFERENCE CALL ...... 95 • THREE-WAY CALLING ...... 95 • CALL TERMINATION...... 96 • REDIAL ...... 96 • CALL CONTINUATION ...... 96 • Uconnect® PHONE FEATURES ...... 96 • LANGUAGE SELECTION ...... 96 • EMERGENCY ASSISTANCE ...... 97 • BREAKDOWN SERVICE (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 97 • PAGING ...... 97 • VOICE MAIL CALLING ...... 97 • WORKING WITH AUTOMATED SYSTEMS ....97 • BARGE IN — OVERRIDING PROMPTS ...... 98

74 • TURNING CONFIRMATION PROMPTS ON/OFF . .98 • PHONE AND NETWORK STATUS INDICATORS. .98 • DIALING USING THE MOBILE PHONE KEYPAD...... 99 • MUTE/UN-MUTE (MUTE OFF) ...... 99 • ADVANCED PHONE CONNECTIVITY...... 99 • TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE PHONE...... 99 • CONNECT OR DISCONNECT LINK BETWEEN THE UCONNECT® PHONE AND MOBILE PHONE...... 99 • LIST PAIRED MOBILE PHONE NAMES ...... 99 • SELECT ANOTHER MOBILE PHONE ...... 100 • DELETE UCONNECT® PHONE PAIRED MOBILE PHONES...... 100 • THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT YOUR Uconnect® PHONE...... 100 • Uconnect® PHONE TUTORIAL ...... 100 • VOICE TRAINING...... 100 • RESET ...... 101 • VOICE COMMAND ...... 101 • PHONE FAR END AUDIO PERFORMANCE. . . .102 • RECENT CALLS ...... 102 • VOICE TEXT REPLY ...... 102 • Bluetooth® COMMUNICATION LINK ...... 103 • POWER-UP ...... 103 • VOICE COMMAND ...... 107 • VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION . . . .107

75 • COMMANDS...... 108 • VOICE TRAINING...... 110 • SEATS...... 111 • POWER SEATS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 111 • POWER LUMBAR (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 113 • HEATED SEATS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 113 • MANUAL FRONT/SECOND ROW SEAT ADJUSTER ...... 114 • MANUAL RECLINING SEATS ...... 115 • HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 115 • STOW 'N GO® SEATING ...... 117 • QUAD SEATS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 120 • THIRD ROW POWER RECLINE (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 123 • THIRD ROW POWER FOLDING SEAT (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 123 • MANUALLY FOLDING THIRD ROW SEATS (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 124 • PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINER HOOKS. . .125 • DRIVER MEMORY SEAT (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 125 • SETTING MEMORY POSITIONS AND LINKING RKE TRANSMITTER TO MEMORY ...... 126 • EASY ENTRY/EXIT SEAT (Available With Memory Seat Only)...... 127

76 • TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD ...... 128 • LIGHTS ...... 128 • INTERIOR LIGHTING ...... 129 • PARKING LIGHTS ...... 129 • HEADLIGHTS ...... 129 • AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 129 • HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 130 • HEADLIGHT DELAY (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 130 • FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 130 • BATTERY PROTECTION ...... 131 • MULTIFUNCTION LEVER ...... 131 • TURN SIGNALS ...... 131 • HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH ...... 131 • FLASH-TO-PASS ...... 132 • AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 132 • HEADLIGHT LEVELING SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 132 • WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...... 133 • MIST, FRONT WIPER AND WASHER ...... 133 • INTERMITTENT, LOW AND HIGH SPEED WIPERS ...... 133 • REAR WIPER AND WASHER ...... 134

77 • RAIN SENSING WIPERS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 134 • TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN .....135 • ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 135 • ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...... 136 • TO ACTIVATE...... 137 • TO SET A DESIRED SPEED ...... 137 • TO DEACTIVATE ...... 137 • TO RESUME SPEED...... 137 • TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING ...... 137 • TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING ...... 138 • PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 138 • PARK ASSIST SENSORS ...... 138 • PARKSENSE® WARNING DISPLAY ...... 138 • PARKSENSE® DISPLAY ...... 139 • ENABLING/DISABLING PARKSENSE® ...... 140 • SERVICE THE PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM ...... 140 • CLEANING THE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM .....141 • PARKSENSE® SYSTEM USAGE PRECAUTIONS...... 141 • PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 143 • TURNING PARKVIEW® ON OR OFF — WITH NAVIGATION/MULTIMEDIA RADIO...... 144

78 • TURNING PARKVIEW® ON OR OFF — WITHOUT NAVIGATION/MULTIMEDIA RADIO...... 144 • OVERHEAD CONSOLES ...... 144 • FRONT OVERHEAD CONSOLE ...... 144 • COURTESY/INTERIOR LIGHTING ...... 145 • SUNGLASS STORAGE (NON-SUNROOF ONLY)...... 145 • REAR COURTESY/READING LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 146 • REAR OVERHEAD CONSOLES (for versions/ markets, where provided)...... 146 • POWER SUNROOF (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 147 • OPENING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 147 • OPENING THE SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE . .147 • CLOSING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 148 • CLOSING SUNROOF — MANUAL MODE .....148 • PINCH PROTECT FEATURE...... 148 • VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS ...... 148 • SUNSHADE OPERATION ...... 148 • WIND BUFFETING ...... 148 • SUNROOF MAINTENANCE...... 148 • IGNITION OFF OPERATION ...... 148 • ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS ...... 149 • SMOKERS PACKAGE KIT ...... 150 • POWER INVERTER (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 151

79 • CUPHOLDERS ...... 151 • INSTRUMENT PANEL CUPHOLDERS ...... 151 • SUPER CONSOLE (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 152 • PREMIUM CONSOLE CUPHOLDERS (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 152 • INTERIOR BOTTLE HOLDERS ...... 152 • SMOKER'S PACKAGE KIT (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 153 • STORAGE...... 153 • GLOVE COMPARTMENTS ...... 153 • DOOR TRIM PANEL STORAGE ...... 153 • DRIVER SEATBACK STORAGE (for versions/ markets, where provided)...... 154 • UMBRELLA HOLDER ...... 154 • SECOND ROW FLOOR STORAGE BINS ...... 154 • STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING...... 155 • CENTER AND REAR OVERHEAD CONSOLE STORAGE (for version/markets, where provided) ...... 156 • COAT HOOKS ...... 156 • CARGO AREA STORAGE ...... 156 • CONSOLE FEATURES ...... 156 • BASIC CONSOLE ...... 157 • PREMIUM CONSOLE (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 157 • SUPER CONSOLE (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 159

80 • CARGO AREA FEATURES ...... 160 • RECHARGEABLE FLASHLIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 160 • REAR WINDOW FEATURES ...... 160 • REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER ...... 160 • ROOF LUGGAGE RACK (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 161 • DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS ...... 161 • HEADLIGHT WASHER (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 163 • SUN SCREENS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 164

81 MIRRORS AUTOMATIC DIMMING CAUTION! MIRROR (for versions/ INSIDE DAY/NIGHT To avoid damage to the mirror dur- markets, where provided) MIRROR (for versions/ ing cleaning, never spray any markets, where provided) This mirror automatically adjusts for cleaning solution directly onto the headlight glare from vehicles behind mirror. Apply the solution onto a A two-point pivot system allows for you. You can turn the feature on or off clean cloth and wipe the mirror horizontal and vertical adjustment of by pressing the button at the base of clean. the mirror. Adjust the mirror to center the mirror. A light to the left of the on the view through the rear window. button will illuminate to indicate OUTSIDE MIRRORS Headlight glare can be reduced by when the dimming feature is acti- To receive maximum benefit, adjust moving the small control under the vated. The sensor to the right of the the outside mirror(s) to center on the mirror to the night position (toward button does not illuminate. adjacent lane of traffic with a slight the rear of the vehicle). The mirror NOTE: This feature is disabled overlap of the view obtained on the should be adjusted while set in the day when the vehicle is moving in re- inside mirror. position (toward the windshield). verse. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or Manual Rearview Mirror other object. Use your inside mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.

82 DRIVER'S AUTOMATIC “Understanding the Features Of Your DIMMING MIRROR (for Vehicle” for further information. versions/markets, where HEATED MIRRORS (for provided) versions/markets, where The driver's outside mirror will auto- provided) matically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is con- These mirrors are heated to trolled by the inside automatic Power Mirror Controls melt frost or ice. This feature is dimming mirror and can be turned on The power mirror controls consist of activated whenever you turn on the or off by pressing the button at the mirror select buttons and a four-way rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear base of the inside mirror. The mirror mirror control switch. To adjust a mir- Window Features” in “Understanding will automatically adjust for head- ror, press either the L (left) or R the Features of Your Vehicle” for fur- light glare when the inside mirror ad- (right) to select button the mirror that ther information. justs. you want to adjust. TILT MIRRORS IN OUTSIDE MIRROR NOTE: A light in the selected but- REVERSE (available with FOLDING FEATURE ton will illuminate indicating the memory seat only), (for mirror is activated and can be ad- All outside mirrors are hinged and justed. versions/markets, where may be moved either forward or rear- provided) ward to resist damage. The hinges Using the mirror control switch, press have three detent positions: full for- on any of the four arrows for the di- Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides auto- ward, full rearward and normal. rection that you want the mirror to matic outside mirror positioning move. which will aid the drivers view of the POWER MIRRORS (for ground rearward of the front doors. Driver's side power mirror preselected versions/markets, where The driver's outside mirror will move positions can be controlled by the op- slightly downward from the present provided) tional Driver Memory Seat Feature. position when the vehicle is shifted The power mirror controls are located Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in into REVERSE. The driver's outside on the driver's door trim panel. 83 mirror will then return to the original will fold in, pressing the switch a sec- position when the vehicle is shifted ond time will return the mirrors to the out of REVERSE position. Each normal driving position. stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position. NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Re- verse feature is not enabled when Illuminated Mirror delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be BLIND SPOT enabled or disabled in the Elec- Power Folding Mirror Switch MONITORING (BSM) (for tronic Vehicle Information Center versions/markets, where (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Ve- If the mirrors are in the folded posi- hicle Information Center (EVIC)/ tion, and vehicle speed is equal or provided) Customer-Programmable Fea- greater than 16 km/h, they will auto- The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) tures” in “Understanding Your matically unfold. system uses two radar-based sensors, Instrument Panel” for further in- ILLUMINATED VANITY located inside the rear bumper fascia, formation. MIRRORS (for to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, POWER FOLDING versions/markets, where MIRRORS (for etc.) that enter the blind spot zones provided) from the rear/front/side of the ve- versions/markets, where An illuminated vanity mirror is lo- hicle. provided) cated on the sun visor. To use the The switch for the power folding mir- mirror, rotate the sun visor down and rors is located between the power mir- swing the mirror cover upward. The ror switches L (left) and R (right). lights turn on automatically. Closing Press the switch once and the mirrors the mirror cover turns off the lights.

84 NOTE: • The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones. • The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your ve- Rear Detection Zones hicle is towing a trailer. There- Sensor Locations When the vehicle is started, the BSM fore, visually verify the adjacent The BSM system notifies the driver of warning light will momentarily illu- lane is clear for both your ve- objects in the detection zones by illuminate in both outside rear view mir- hicle and trailer before making minating the BSM warning light lo- rors to let the driver know that the a lane change. If the trailer or cated in the outside mirrors in addi- system is operational. The BSM sys- other object (i.e., bicycle, sports tion to sounding an audible (chime) tem sensors operate when the vehicle equipment) extends beyond the alert and reducing the radio volume. is in any forward gear or REVERSE side of your vehicle, this may re- Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for and enters stand-by mode when the sult in the BSM warning light further information. vehicle is in PARK. remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a for- The BSM detection zone covers ap- ward gear. proximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle or 3.8 m. The zone starts The area on the rear fascia where the at the outside rear view mirror and radar sensors are located must remain extends approximately 7 m to the rear free of snow, ice, and dirt/road con- of the vehicle. The BSM system moni- tamination so that the BSM system tors the detection zones on both sides can function properly. Do not block of the vehicle when the vehicle speed the area of the rear fascia where the BSM Warning Light reaches approximately 10 km/h or radar sensors are located with foreign The BSM system monitors the detec- higher and will alert the driver of ve- objects (bumper stickers, bicycle tion zone from three different entry hicles in these areas. racks, etc.). points (side, rear, front) while driving 85 to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle.

Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Passing Overtaking Traffic The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects If you pass another vehicle slowly such as guardrails, posts, walls, foli- with a relative speed of less than age, berms, etc. However, occasion- 24 km/h and the vehicle remains in ally the system may alert on such ob- the blind spot for approximately 1.5 jects. This is normal operation and seconds, the warning light will be il- Side Monitoring your vehicle does not require service. luminated. If the difference in speed Entering From The Rear between the two vehicles is greater Vehicles that come up from behind than 24 km/h, the warning light will your vehicle on either side and enter not illuminate. the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 48 km/h.

Stationary Objects The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the oppo- Overtaking/Approaching site direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes.

86 REAR CROSS PATH (for RCP monitors the rear detection versions/markets, where zones on both sides of the vehicle, for provided) objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is speed of approximately 5 km/h, to intended to aid the driver when back- objects moving a maximum of ap- ing out of parking spaces where their proximately 32 km/h, such as in vision of oncoming vehicles may be parking lot situations. Opposing Traffic blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear NOTE: In a parking lot situation, WARNING! end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP oncoming vehicles can be ob- system will then have a clear view of scured by vehicles parked on ei- The Blind Spot Monitoring system the cross traffic and if an oncoming ther side. If the sensors are is only an aid to help detect objects vehicle is detected, alert the driver. blocked by other structures or ve- in the blind spot zones. The BSM hicles, the system will not be able system is not designed to detect pe- to alert the driver. destrians, bicyclists, or animals. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in Even if your vehicle is equipped REVERSE, the driver is alerted using with the BSM system, always check both the visual and audible alarms, your vehicle's mirrors, glance over including reducing the radio volume. your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Fail- ure to do so can result in serious RCP Detection Zones injury or death.

87 WARNING! Modes Of Operation With detected object. If the turn signal is Uconnect® System — (for then activated, and it corresponds to RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It versions/markets, where pro- an alert present on that side of the is intended to be used to help a vided) vehicle, an audible chime will also be driver detect an oncoming vehicle Three selectable modes of operation sounded. Whenever a turn signal and in a parking lot situation. Drivers detected object are present on the must be careful when backing up, are available in the Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer- Pro- same side at the same time, both the even when using RCP. Always visual and audio alerts will be issued. check carefully behind your ve- grammable Features — Uconnect® Access settings ” in “Understanding In addition to the audible alert the hicle, look behind you, and be sure radio (if on) volume will be reduced. to check for pedestrians, animals, Your Instrument Panel” for further other vehicles, obstructions, and information. NOTE: blind spots before backing up. Fail- Blind Spot Alert Lights Only • Whenever an audible alert is re- ure to do so can result in serious When operating in Blind Spot Alert quested by the BSM system, the injury or death. mode, the BSM system will provide a radio volume is reduced. MODES OF OPERATION visual alert in the appropriate side • If the hazard flashers are on, the view mirror based on a detected ob- system will request the appropriate Modes Of Operation With EVIC ject. However, when the system is op- visual alert only. erating in RCP, the system will re- Three selectable modes of operation When the system is in RCP,the system spond with both visual and audible are available in the Electronic Vehicle shall respond with both visual and alerts when a detected object is pres- Information Center (EVIC). Refer to audible alerts when a detected object ent. Whenever an audible alert is re- “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- is present. Whenever an audible alert quested, the radio volume is reduced. ter (EVIC)/Personal Settings is requested, the radio volume is re- (Customer-Programmable Fea- Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime duced. Turn/hazard signal status is tures)” in “Understanding Your In- When operating in Blind Spot Alert ignored; the RCP state always re- strument Panel” for further informa- quests the chime. tion. Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a

88 Blind Spot Alert Off through your vehicle's audio system; Uconnect® Phone at a time. The the system will automatically mute Uconnect® Phone is available in Eng- When the BSM system is turned off your radio when using the Uconnect® lish, Dutch, French, German, Italian there will be no visual or audible Phone. or Spanish languages (as equipped). alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. Uconnect® Phone allows you to NOTE: The BSM system will store transfer calls between the Uconnect® WARNING! the current operating mode when Phone and your mobile phone as you Any voice commanded system the vehicle is shut off. Each time enter or exit your vehicle and enables should be used only in safe driving the vehicle is started the previ- you to mute the Uconnect® Phone's conditions following all applicable ously stored mode will be recalled microphone for private conversation. laws, including laws regarding and used The Uconnect® Phone is driven phone use. Your attention should be through your Bluetooth® “Hands- focused on safely operating the ve- Uconnect® PHONE Free profile” mobile phone. hicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or NOTE: For Uconnect® Phone Uconnect® Phone features death. with Navigation or Multimedia ra- Bluetooth® technology - the global dio, refer to the Navigation or Mul- standard that enables different elec- Uconnect® Phone Button timedia radio's User's Manual tronic devices to connect to each other The radio or steering wheel (separate booklet) Uconnect® without wires or a docking station, so controls will contain the Phone section. Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone two control buttons Uconnect® Phone is a voice- (be it your purse, pocket, or brief- (Uconnect® Phone but- activated, hands-free, in-vehicle com- case), as long as your phone is turned ton and Voice Command button) munications system. Uconnect® on and has been paired to the vehicle's that will enable you to access the sys- Phone allows you to dial a phone Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® tem. When you press the button you number with your mobile phone* us- Phone allows up to seven mobile will hear the word Uconnect® fol- ing simple voice commands (e.g., phones to be linked to the system. lowed by a BEEP. The beep is your “Call”…“Jim”… “Work” or Only one linked (or paired) mobile signal to give a command. “Dial”…“151-1234 -5555”). Your phone can be used with the mobile phone's audio is transmitted 89 Voice Command Button COMPATIBLE PHONES • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which Actual button location may * The Uconnect® Phone requires a follows the “Ready” prompt or an- vary with radio. The indi- mobile phone equipped with the other prompt. vidual buttons are described Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”, in the “Operation” section. version 1.0 or higher. • For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For ex- The Uconnect® Phone can be used See Uconnect® website for supported ample, instead of saying “Setup” with Hands-Free Profile certified phones. and then “Phone Pairing”, the fol- Bluetooth® mobile phones. Some • www.UconnectPhone.com lowing compound command can be phones may not support all the said: “Setup Phone Pairing”. Uconnect® Phone features. Refer to To find the list of compatible phones your mobile service provider or the navigate through the following • For each feature explanation in this phone manufacturer for details. menus: section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You The Uconnect® Phone is fully inte- • Select model year for the vehicle can also break the commands into grated with the vehicle's audio sys- • Select type of the vehicle parts and say each part of the com- tem. The volume of the Uconnect® mand when you are asked for it. Phone can be adjusted either from the • In the getting started tab, select For example, you can use the com- radio volume control knob or from the compatible phones pound form voice command steering wheel radio control, if so OPERATION “Phonebook New Entry”, or you equipped. can break the compound form Voice commands can be used to oper- The radio display will be used for command into two voice com- ate the Uconnect® Phone and to navi- visual prompts from the Uconnect® mands: “Phonebook” and “New gate through the Uconnect® Phone Phone such as CELL or caller ID on Entry”. Please remember, the menu structure. Voice commands are certain radios. Uconnect® Phone works best when required after most Uconnect® Phone you talk in a normal conversational prompts. You will be prompted for a tone, as if speaking to someone sit- specific command and then guided ting a few meters away from you. through the available options.

90 Voice Command Tree phone (refer to “Compatible Phones” • For identification purposes, you section to learn about the phone will be prompted to give the Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. type). Uconnect® Phone a name for your Cancel Command mobile phone. Each mobile phone To complete the pairing process, you that is paired should be given a At any prompt, after the beep, you will need to reference your mobile unique phone name. can say “Cancel” and you will be re- phone owner's manual. The turned to the main menu. However, in Uconnect® website may also provide • You will then be asked to give your a few instances the system will take detailed instructions for pairing. mobile phone a priority level be- you back to the previous menu. tween 1 and 7, with 1 being the The following are general phone to highest priority. You can pair up to Help Command Uconnect® Phone pairing instruc- seven mobile phones to your tions: If you need assistance at any prompt, Uconnect® Phone. However, at any or if you want to know your options at • Press the button to begin. given time, only one mobile phone any prompt, say “Help” following the can be in use, connected to your • After the “Ready” prompt and the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play Uconnect® System. The priority following beep, say “Setup Phone all the options at any prompt if you allows the Uconnect® Phone to Pairing”. ask for help. know which mobile phone to use if To activate the Uconnect® Phone • When prompted, after the beep, say multiple mobile phones are in the from idle, simply press the button “Pair a Phone” and follow the au- vehicle at the same time. For ex- and follow the audible prompts for dible prompts. ample, if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle, directions. All Uconnect® Phone ses- • You will be asked to say a four-digit the Uconnect® Phone will use the sions begin with a press of the but- Personal Identification Number priority 3 mobile phone when you ton on the radio control head. (PIN), which you will later need to make a call. You can select to use a enter into your mobile phone. You Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To lower priority mobile phone at any can enter any four-digit PIN. You A Mobile Phone time (refer to “Advanced Phone will not need to remember this PIN Connectivity”). To begin using your Uconnect® after the initial pairing process. Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile

91 Dial By Saying A Number stored name entry in the recommended. For example, say Uconnect® Phonebook or down- “Robert Smith” or “Robert” in- • Press the button to begin. loaded phonebook. To learn how to stead of “Bob”. • After the “Ready” prompt and the store a name in the phonebook , • When prompted, enter the number following beep, say “Dial.” refer to “Add Names to Your designation (e.g., “Home”, Uconnect® Phonebook”. • The system will prompt you to say “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). the number you want to call. • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm This will allow you to store multiple the name and then dial the corre- numbers for each phonebook entry, • For example, you can say sponding phone number, which if desired. “151-1234-5555.” may appear in the display of certain • When prompted, recite the phone • The Uconnect® Phone will confirm radios. number for the phonebook entry the phone number and then dial. Add Names To Your Uconnect® that you are adding. The number will appear in the dis- Phonebook play of certain radios. After you are finished adding an entry NOTE: Adding names to the into the phonebook, you will be given Call By Saying A Name Uconnect® Phonebook is recom- the opportunity to add more phone • Press the button to begin. mended when the vehicle is not in numbers to the current entry or to motion. return to the main menu. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Call.” • Press the button to begin. The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phone- • The system will prompt you to say • After the “Ready” prompt and the book with each name having up to the name of the person you want to following beep, say “Phonebook four associated phone numbers and call. New Entry”. designations. Each language has a • After the “Ready” prompt and the • When prompted, say the name of separate 32-name phonebook acces- following beep, say the name of the the new entry. Use of long names sible only in that language. In addi- person you want to call. For ex- helps the Voice Command and it is tion, for versions/markets, where pro- ample, you can say “John Doe”, vided, and supported by your phone, where John Doe is a previously

92 Uconnect® Phone automatically • Maximum of 1000 entries per Edit Uconnect® Phonebook downloads your mobile phone’s phone will be downloaded and up- Entries phonebook. dated every time a phone is con- NOTE: Editing phonebook en- nected to the Uconnect® Phone. Phonebook Download — tries is recommended when the ve- Automatic Phonebook Transfer • Depending on the maximum num- hicle is not in motion. From Mobile Phone ber of entries downloaded, there Automatic downloaded phonebook may be a short delay before the For versions/markets, where pro- entries cannot be deleted or edited. vided and specifically supported by latest downloaded names can be • Press the button to begin. your phone, Uconnect® Phone auto- used. Until then, if available, the matically downloads names (text previously downloaded phonebook • After the “Ready” prompt and the names) and number entries from your is available for use. following beep, say “Phonebook mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific • Only the phonebook of the cur- Edit.” Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book rently connected mobile phone is • You will then be asked for the name Access Profile may support this fea- accessible. of the phonebook entry that you ture. See Uconnect® website for sup- wish to edit. ported phones. • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded. SIM card • Next, choose the number designa- • To call a name from downloaded phonebook is not part of the mobile tion (home, work, mobile, or other) (or Uconnect®) Phonebook, follow phonebook. that you wish to edit. the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name” section. • This downloaded phonebook can- • When prompted, recite the new not be edited or deleted on the phone number for the phonebook • Automatic download and update, if Uconnect® Phone. These can only entry that you are editing. supported, begins as soon as the be edited on the mobile phone. The phone Bluetooth® wireless connec- changes are transferred and up- After you are finished editing an entry tion is made to the Uconnect® dated to Uconnect® Phone on the in the phonebook, you will be given Phone. For example, after you start next phone connection. the opportunity to edit another entry the vehicle. in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu. 93 “Phonebook Edit” can be used to add while the Uconnect® Phone is play- • Note that only the phonebook in the another phone number to a name en- ing the desired entry and say current language is deleted. try that already exists in the phone- “Delete.” • Automatic downloaded phonebook book. For example, the entry John • After you enter the name, the entries cannot be deleted or edited. Doe may have a mobile and a home Uconnect® Phone will ask you number, but you can add “John List All Uconnect® Phonebook which designation you wish to de- Doe's” work number later using the Names lete; home, work, mobile, other, or “Phonebook Edit” feature. all. Say the designation you wish to • Press the button to begin. Delete Uconnect® Phonebook delete. • After the “Ready” prompt and the Entry • Note that only the phonebook entry following beep, say “Phonebook NOTE: Editing phonebook en- in the current language is deleted. List Names.” tries is recommended when the ve- • Automatic downloaded phonebook • The Uconnect® Phone will play the hicle is not in motion. entries cannot be deleted or edited. names of all the phonebook entries, • Press the button to begin. including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available. • After the “Ready” prompt and the Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® following beep, say “Phonebook Phonebook Entries • To call one of the names in the list, Delete.” press the button during the • Press the button to begin. playing of the desired name, and • After you enter the Phonebook De- • After the “Ready” prompt and the say “Call.” lete menu, you will then be asked for following beep, say “Phonebook the name of the entry that you wish NOTE: The user can also exercise Erase All.” to delete. You can either say the “Edit” or “Delete” operations at name of a phonebook entry that you • The Uconnect® Phone will ask you this point. wish to delete or you can say “List to verify that you wish to delete all • The Uconnect® Phone will then Names” to hear a list of the entries in the entries from the phonebook. prompt you as to the number des- the phonebook from which you • After confirmation, the phonebook ignation you wish to call. choose. To select one of the entries entries will be deleted. from the list, press the button • The selected number will be dialed.

94 PHONE CALL FEATURES ANSWER OR REJECT AN call, refer to “Toggling Between INCOMING CALL — CALL Calls”. To combine two calls, refer to The following features can be ac- “Conference Call”. cessed through the Uconnect® Phone CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL mobile service plan. For example, if you have another incoming call, you FROM HOLD your mobile service plan provides will hear the same network tones for To put a call on hold, press the three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear button until you hear a single accessed through the Uconnect® when using your mobile phone. Press beep. This indicates that the call is on Phone. Check with your mobile ser- the button to place the current call hold. To bring the call back from vice provider for the features that you on hold and answer the incoming call. hold, press and hold the button have. NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone until you hear a single beep. ANSWER OR REJECT AN compatible phones in the market CONFERENCE CALL INCOMING CALL — NO today do not support rejecting an CALL CURRENTLY IN incoming call when another call is When two calls are in progress (one PROGRESS in progress. Therefore, the user active and one on hold), press and can only answer an incoming call hold the button until you hear a When you receive a call on your mo- or ignore it. double beep indicating that the two bile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will calls have been joined into one confer- interrupt the vehicle audio system, if MAKING A SECOND CALL ence call. on, and will ask if you would like to WHILE CURRENT CALL IN answer the call. Press the button to PROGRESS THREE-WAY CALLING accept the call. To reject the call, press To make a second call while you are To initiate three-way calling, press the and hold the button until you hear but- button while a call is in progress, a single beep, indicating that the in- currently on a call, press the ton and say “Dial” or “Call” followed and make a second phone call, as coming call was rejected. by the phone number or phonebook described under “Making a Second entry you wish to call. The first call Call While Current Call in Progress.” will be on hold while the second call is After the second call has established, button until you in progress. To go back to the first press and hold the 95 hear a double beep, indicating that CALL CONTINUATION Uconnect® PHONE the two calls have been joined into one Call continuation is the progression of FEATURES conference call. a phone call on the Uconnect® Phone LANGUAGE SELECTION CALL TERMINATION after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF. Call continuation To change the language that the To end a call in progress, momentarily functionality available on the vehicle Uconnect® Phone is using: press the button. Only the active can be any one of three types: call(s) will be terminated and if there • Press the button to begin. is a call on hold, it will become the • After the ignition is switched to • After the “Ready” prompt and the new active call. If the active call is OFF, a call can continue on the following beep, say the name of the terminated by the phone far end, a Uconnect® Phone either until the language you wish to switch to call on hold may not become active call ends, or until the vehicle bat- (English, Dutch, French, German, automatically. This is cell phone- tery condition dictates cessation of Italian, or Spanish, if so equipped). dependent. To bring the call back the call on the Uconnect® Phone from hold, press and hold the but- and transfer of the call to the mo- • Continue to follow the system ton until you hear a single beep. bile phone. prompts to complete language selection. REDIAL • After the ignition is cycled to OFF,a call can continue on the Uconnect® After selecting one of the languages, • Press the button to begin. Phone for a certain duration, after all prompts and voice commands will • After the “Ready” prompt and the which the call is automatically be in that language. following beep, say “Redial.” transferred from the Uconnect® NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone. • The Uconnect® Phone will call the Phone language change operation, last number that was dialed from • An active call is automatically only the language-specific 32- your mobile phone. transferred to the mobile phone af- name phonebook is usable. The ter the ignition is cycled to OFF. paired phone name is not NOTE: This may not be the last language-specific and is usable number dialed from the across all languages. Uconnect® Phone.

96 EMERGENCY ASSISTANCE • If supported, this number may NOTE: The Breakdown service be programmable on some sys- number has to be setup before us- If you are in an emergency and the tems. To do this, press the ing. To setup, press the button mobile phone is reachable: button and say “Setup,” fol- and say “Setup, Breakdown Ser- • Pick up the phone and manually lowed by “Emergency.” vice” and follow prompts. dial the emergency number for • The Uconnect® Phone does PAGING your area. slightly lower your chances of To learn how to page, refer to “Work- If the phone is not reachable and the successfully making a phone ing with Automated Systems.” Paging Uconnect® Phone is operational, you call as to that for the mobile works properly except for pagers of may reach the emergency number as phone directly. certain companies, which time out a follows: little too soon to work properly with • Press the button to begin. WARNING! the Uconnect® Phone. • After the “Ready” prompt and the To use you Uconnect® Phone Sys- VOICE MAIL CALLING following beep, say “Emergency” tem in an emergency, your mobile and the Uconnect® Phone will in- phone must be: To learn how to access your voice struct the paired mobile phone to • turned on, mail, refer to “Working with Auto- call the emergency number. This • paired to the Uconnect® System, mated Systems.” feature is supported in the U.S., • and have network coverage. WORKING WITH Canada, and Mexico. BREAKDOWN SERVICE AUTOMATED SYSTEMS NOTE: (for versions/markets, This method is used in instances • The emergency number dialed is where provided) where one generally has to press num- based on the country where the bers on the mobile phone keypad If you need Breakdown service: vehicle is purchased (911 for the while navigating through an auto- U.S. and Canada and 060 for • Press the button to begin. mated telephone system. Mexico). The number dialed may • After the “Ready” prompt and the not be applicable with the avail- following beep, say “Breakdown able mobile service and area. service.”

97 You can use your Uconnect® Phone to press the button and say “Send.” Phone” to select that option without access a voice mail system or an auto- The system will prompt you to enter having to listen to the rest of the voice mated service, such as a paging ser- the name or number and say the name prompt. vice or automated customer service. of the phonebook entry you wish to Some services require immediate re- send. The Uconnect® Phone will then TURNING CONFIRMATION sponse selection. In some instances, send the corresponding phone num- PROMPTS ON/OFF that may be too quick for use of the ber associated with the phonebook Turning confirmation prompts off Uconnect® Phone. entry, as tones over the phone. will stop the system from confirming When calling a number with your NOTE: your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Uconnect® Phone that normally re- Phone will not repeat a phone number • You may not hear all of the tones quires you to enter in a touch-tone before you dial it). due to mobile phone network sequence on your mobile phone key- configurations; this is normal. • Press the button to begin. pad, you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to en- • Some paging and voice mail sys- • After the “Ready” prompt and the ter followed by the word “Send”. For tems have system time out set- following beep, say: example, if required to enter your PIN tings that are too short and may • “Setup Confirmations Prompts followed with a hash, (3746#),you not allow the use of this feature. On” can press the button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying a number, or BARGE IN — OVERRIDING • “Setup Confirmations Prompts sequence of numbers, followed by PROMPTS Off” “Send”, is also to be used for navigat- The “Voice Command” button can be PHONE AND NETWORK ing through an automated customer used when you wish to skip part of a STATUS INDICATORS service center menu structure, and to prompt and issue your voice com- leave a number on a pager. mand immediately. For example, if a If available on the radio and/or on a You can also send stored Uconnect® prompt is asking “Would you like to premium display such as the instru- Phonebook entries as tones for fast pair a phone, clear a…,” you could ment panel cluster, and supported by and easy access to voice mail and press the button and say, “Pair a your mobile phone, the Uconnect® pager entries. To use this feature, dial Phone will provide notification to in- the number you wish to call and then form you of your phone and network 98 status when you are attempting to your call is answered, you will Phone without terminating the call. make a phone call using Uconnect® hear the audio. To transfer an ongoing call from your Phone. The status is given for network Uconnect® Phone paired mobile signal strength, phone battery MUTE/UN-MUTE (MUTE phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice strength, etc. OFF) versa, press the button and say “Transfer Call.” DIALING USING THE When you mute the Uconnect® MOBILE PHONE KEYPAD Phone, you will still be able to hear CONNECT OR the conversation coming from the DISCONNECT LINK You can dial a phone number with other party, but the other party will your mobile phone keypad and still not be able to hear you. To mute the BETWEEN THE use the Uconnect® Phone (while dial- Uconnect® Phone: UCONNECT® PHONE AND ing via the mobile phone keypad, the MOBILE PHONE • Press the button. user must exercise caution and take Your mobile phone can be paired with precautionary safety measures). By • Following the beep, say “Mute.” many different electronic devices, but dialing a number with your paired To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone: can only be actively “connected” with Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio one electronic device at a time. will be played through your vehicle's • Press the button. If you would like to connect or discon- audio system. The Uconnect® Phone • Following the beep, say “Mute off.” will work the same as if you dial the nect the Bluetooth® connection be- number using Voice Command. tween your mobile phone and the Uconnect® Phone System, follow the NOTE: Certain brands of mobile ADVANCED PHONE instructions described in your mobile phones do not send the dial ring to CONNECTIVITY phone User’s Manual. the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you TRANSFER CALL TO AND LIST PAIRED MOBILE will not hear it. Under this situa- FROM MOBILE PHONE PHONE NAMES tion, after successfully dialing a The Uconnect® Phone allows ongo- number the user may feel that the • Press the button to begin. ing calls to be transferred from your call did not go through even mobile phone to the Uconnect® though the call is in progress. Once

99 • After the “Ready” prompt and the • You can also press the button THINGS YOU SHOULD following beep, say “Setup Phone at any time while the list is being KNOW ABOUT YOUR Pairing.” played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select. Uconnect® PHONE • When prompted, say “List Phones.” • The selected phone will be used for Uconnect® PHONE the next phone call. If the selected TUTORIAL • The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone is not available, the phone names of all paired mobile To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect® Phone will return to us- phones in order from the highest to Uconnect® Phone features, press the ing the highest priority phone pres- the lowest priority. To “select” or button and say “Uconnect® Tuto- ent in or near (approximately “delete” a paired phone being an- rial.” within 9 m) the vehicle. nounced, press the button and VOICE TRAINING say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see DELETE UCONNECT® the next two sections for an alter- PHONE PAIRED MOBILE For users experiencing difficulty with nate way to “select” or “delete” a PHONES the Uconnect® Phone recognizing paired phone. their voice commands or numbers, • Press the button to begin. SELECT ANOTHER the Uconnect® Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this MOBILE PHONE • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup Phone training mode, follow one of the two This feature allows you to select and Pairing.” following procedures: start using another phone paired with From outside the Uconnect® Phone • At the next prompt, say “Delete” the Uconnect® Phone. mode (e.g., from radio mode) and follow the prompts. • Press the button to begin. • Press and hold the button for • You can also press the button five seconds until the session be- • After the “Ready” prompt and the at any time while the list is being gins, or, following beep, say “Setup Select played, and then choose the phone Phone” and follow the prompts. you wish to delete.

100 • Press the button and say the in all language modes. The System • dry weather condition. “Voice Training”, “System Train- will prompt you before resetting to • Even though the system is designed ing”, “Start Voice Training” factory settings. for users speaking in European command. VOICE COMMAND English, Dutch, French, German, Repeat the words and phrases when Italian, or Spanish accents, the sys- prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. • For best performance, adjust the tem may not always work for some. For best results, the Voice Training rearview mirror to provide at least 1 • When navigating through an auto- session should be completed when the cm gap between the overhead con- mated system such as voice mail, or vehicle is parked with the engine run- sole (for versions/markets, where when sending a page, at the end of ning, all windows closed, and the provided) and the mirror. speaking the digit string, make sure blower fan switched OFF. • Always wait for the beep before to say “Send.” This procedure may be repeated with speaking. • Storing names in the phonebook a new user. The system will adapt to • Speak normally without pausing, the last trained voice only. when the vehicle is not in motion is just as you would speak to a person recommended. To restore the Voice Command system sitting a few meters away from you. • It is not recommended to store simi- to factory default settings, enter the • Make sure that no one other than Voice Training session via the above lar sounding names in the you is speaking during a Voice Uconnect® Phonebook. procedure and follow the prompts. Command period. RESET • Phonebook (Downloaded and • Performance is maximized under: Uconnect® Phone Local) name • Press the button. • low-to-medium blower setting, recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar. • After the “Ready” prompt, and the • low-to-medium vehicle speed, following beep, say “Setup,” then • Numbers must be spoken in single “Reset.” • low road noise, digits. “800” must be spoken This will delete all phone pairing, • smooth road surface, “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.” phone book entries, and other settings • fully closed windows,

101 • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for rely on the phone and network, and • Press the button. “0” (zero). not the Uconnect® Phone. • After the “Ready” prompt and the • Even though international dialing • Echo at the phone far end can following beep, say “SMS Read” or for most number combinations is sometimes be reduced by lowering “Read Messages.” supported, some shortcut dialing the in-vehicle audio volume. • Uconnect® Phone will play the new number combinations may not be • In a convertible vehicle, system per- text message for you. supported. formance may be compromised After reading a message, you can “Re- with the convertible top down. • In a convertible vehicle, system per- ply” or “Forward” the message using formance may be compromised Uconnect® Phone. with the convertible top down. RECENT CALLS Send Messages: PHONE FAR END AUDIO If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® PERFORMANCE You can send messages using Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- Uconnect® Phone. To send a new • Audio quality is maximized under: ing and Missed Calls. message: • low-to-medium blower setting, VOICE TEXT REPLY • Press the button. • low-to-medium vehicle speed, If your phone supports Voice Text Re- • After the “Ready” prompt and the ply messaging, Uconnect® Phone can following beep, say “SMS Send” or • low road noise, read or send new messages on your “Send Messages.” phone. • smooth road surface, • You can either say the message you • fully closed windows, Read Messages: wish to send or say “List Mes- sages.” There are 20 preset mes- • dry weather conditions, and If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to sages. • operation from the driver seat. Uconnect® Phone, an announcement To send a message, press the • Performance, such as audio clarity, will be made to notify you that you button while the system is listing echo, and loudness to a large degree have a new text message. If you wish the message and say “Send.” to hear the new message:

102 Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to 14. Are you there yet? Bluetooth® say the name or number of the person 15. Where are we meeting? COMMUNICATION LINK you wish to send the message to. 16. Can this wait? Mobile phones have been found to List of Preset Messages: lose connection to the Uconnect® 17. Bye for now 1. Yes Phone. When this happens, the con- 18. When can we meet nection can generally be reestablished 2. No by switching the phone off/on. Your 19. Send number to call 3. Where are you? mobile phone is recommended to re- 20. Start without me main in Bluetooth® ON mode. 4. I need more direction. Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming POWER-UP 5.LOL Announcement ON/OFF After switching the ignition key from 6. Why Turning the Voice Text Reply Incom- OFF to either the ON or ACC position, 7. I love you ing Announcement OFF will stop the or after a language change, you must system from announcing the new in- wait at least fifteen seconds prior to 8. Call me coming messages. using the system. 9. Call me later • Press the button. 10. Thanks • After the “Ready” prompt and the 11. See You in 15 minutes following beep, say “Setup, Incom- ing Message Announcement”, you 12.Iamonmyway will then be given a choice to 13. I’ll be late change it.

103 104 105 106 Voice Commands Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) Primary Alternate (s) download phone pairing pairing zero Dutch Netherlands phonebook phone book one edit previous two emergency redial three English select phone select four delete all erase all send five Espanol set up phone settings six Francais or phone set up seven German Deutsch transfer call eight help Uconnect® nine home Tutorial asterisk (*) star Italian Italiano voice training plus (+) language work hash (#) list names yes all all of them list phones VOICE COMMAND Breakdown main menu return to main service menu VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM call mobile OPERATION cancel mute confirmation confirmation mute off This Voice Command sys- prompts new entry tem allows you to control continue no your AM, FM radio, disc delete other player, and a memo recorder. dial pair a phone

107 NOTE: Take care to speak into If you ever wish to interrupt the sys- At any point, if the system does not the Voice Interface System as tem while it lists options, press the recognize one of your commands, you calmly and normally as possible. Voice Command button, listen will be prompted to repeat it. The ability of the Voice Interface for the beep, and say your command. To hear the first available Menu, press System to recognize user voice Pressing the Voice Command the Voice Command button and commands may be negatively af- button while the system is say “Help” or “Main Menu”. fected by rapid speaking or a speaking is known as “barging in.” raised voice level. The system will be interrupted, and COMMANDS after the beep, you can add or change The Voice Command system under- WARNING! commands. This will become helpful stands two types of commands. Uni- Any voice commanded system once you start to learn the options. versal commands are available at all should be used only in safe driving NOTE: At any time, you can say times. Local commands are available conditions following all applicable the words “Cancel”, “Help” or if the supported radio mode is active. laws, including laws regarding “Main Menu”. Changing The Volume phone use. Your attention should be These commands are universal and focused on safely operating the ve- 1. Start a dialogue by pressing the can be used from any menu. All other hicle. Failure to do so may result in Voice Command button. commands can be used depending a collision causing serious injury or upon the active application. 2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). death. When using this system, you should 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary When you press the Voice Command speak clearly and at a normal speak- knob to adjust the volume to a com- button, you will hear a beep. The ing volume. fortable level while the Voice Com- beep is your signal to give a command system is speaking. Please note mand. The system will best recognize your the volume setting for Voice Com- speech if the windows are closed, and mand is different than the audio sys- NOTE: If you do not say a com- the heater/air conditioning fan is set tem. mand within a few seconds, the to low. system will present you with a list of options.

108 Main Menu • “Frequency #” (to change the fre- Disc Mode quency) Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice To switch to the disc mode, say Command button. You may say • “Next Station” (to select the next “Disc.” In this mode, you may say the “Main Menu” to switch to the main station) following commands: menu. • “Previous Station” (to select the • “Track” (#) (to change the track) In this mode, you can say the follow- previous station) • “Next Track” (to play the next ing commands: • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the ra- track) • “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio dio menu) • “Previous Track” (to play the pre- AM mode) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the vious track) • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM main menu) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the mode) Radio FM main menu) • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) To switch to the FM band, say “FM” USB Mode • “USB” (to switch to USB mode) or “Radio FM.” In this mode, you may To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In say the following commands: • “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch this mode, you may say the following to Bluetooth® Streaming mode) • “Frequency #” (to change the fre- commands: quency) • “Memo” (to switch to the memo • “Next Track” (to play the next recorder) • “Next Station” (to select the next track) station) • “System Setup” (to switch to sys- • “Previous Track” (to play the pre- tem setup) • “Previous Station” (to select the vious track) previous station) Radio AM (Or Radio Long Wave • “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Or Radio Medium Wave) • “Menu Radio” (to switch to the ra- Playlist Name, Album Name, Track Name, etc.) To switch to the AM band, say “AM” dio menu) or “Radio AM”. In this mode, you may • “Main Menu” (to switch to the say the following commands: main menu)

109 Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode • “Play Memos” (to play previously In this mode, you may say the follow- recorded memos) — During the To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming ing commands: playback you may press the Voice (BT) mode, say “Bluetooth Stream- • “Language English” Command ing.” In this mode, you may say the button to stop following commands: playing memos. You proceed by • “Language French” saying one of the following com- • “Language Spanish” • “Next Track” (to play the next mands: track) – “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language Dutch” • “Previous Track” (to play the pre- – “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language Deutsch” vious track) – “Previous” (to play the previous • “Language Italian” • “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, memo) Album, Track, etc.) • “Tutorial” – “Delete” (to delete a memo) Memo Mode • “Voice Training” – “Delete All” (to delete all NOTE: Keep in mind that you To switch to the voice recorder mode, memos) say “Memo.” In this mode, you may have to press the Voice Command say the following commands: System Setup button first and wait for the beep before speaking the “Barge To switch to system setup, you may • “New Memo” (to record a new In” commands. memo) — During the recording, say one of the following: you may press the Voice Command • “Change to system setup” VOICE TRAINING button to stop recording. You • “Main menu system setup” For users experiencing difficulty with proceed by saying one of the follow- the system recognizing their voice • “Switch to system setup” ing commands: commands or numbers the – “Save” (to save the memo) • “Change to setup” Uconnect® Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used. – “Continue” (to continue • “Main menu setup” or recording) • “Switch to setup” 1. Press the Voice Command – “Delete” (to delete the recording) button, say “System Setup” and

110 once you are in that menu then say WARNING! (Continued) “Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to the system and will im- • Do not allow people to ride in any prove recognition. area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat 2. Repeat the words and phrases belts. In a collision, people riding when prompted by Uconnect® Voice. in these areas are more likely to For best results, the Voice Training be seriously injured or killed. session should be completed when the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is Driver Power Seat Switch vehicle is parked, engine running, all in a seat and using a seat belt 1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback windows closed, and the blower fan properly. switched off. This procedure may be Switch repeated with a new user. The system POWER SEATS (for will adapt to the last trained voice versions/markets, where WARNING! only. provided) • Adjusting a seat while driving SEATS Some models may be equipped with may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss Seats are a part of the Occupant Re- eight-way power seats for the driver of control which could cause a straint System of the vehicle. and front passenger. The power seat switches are located on the outboard collision and serious injury or side of the seat. The switches control death. WARNING! the movement of the seat cushion and • Seats should be adjusted before • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo the seatback. fastening the seat belts and while area, inside or outside of a ve- the vehicle is parked. Serious in- hicle. In a collision, people riding jury or death could result from a in these areas are more likely to poorly adjusted seat belt. be seriously injured or killed. (Continued) (Continued)

111 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not ride with the seatback re- The height of the seats can be ad- • Adjusting a seat while driving may clined so that the shoulder belt is justed up or down. Pull upward or be dangerous. Moving a seat while no longer resting against your push downward on the seat switch, driving could result in loss of con- chest. In a collision you could the seat will move in the direction of trol which could cause a collision slide under the seat belt, which the switch. Release the switch when and serious injury or death. could result in serious injury or the desired position is reached. • Seats should be adjusted before death. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious in- The angle of the seat cushion can be jury or death could result from a adjusted in four directions. Pull up- CAUTION! poorly adjusted seat belt. ward or push downward on the front Do not place any article under a • Do not ride with the seatback re- or rear of the seat switch, the front or power seat or impede its ability to clined so that the shoulder belt is rear of the seat cushion will move in move as it may cause damage to the no longer resting against your the direction of the switch. Release the seat controls. Seat travel may be- chest. In a collision you could switch when the desired position is come limited if movement is slide under the seat belt, which reached. stopped by an obstruction in the could result in serious injury or seat's path. Reclining The Seatback death.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or The angle of the seatback can be ad- Rearward justed forward or rearward. Push the CAUTION! seatback switch forward or rearward, The seat can be adjusted both forward the seat will move in the direction of Do not place any article under a and rearward. Push the seat switch the switch. Release the switch when power seat or impede its ability to forward or rearward, the seat will the desired position is reached. move as it may cause damage to the move in the direction of the switch. seat controls. Seat travel may be- Release the switch when the desired come limited if movement is position has been reached. stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.

112 POWER LUMBAR (for WARNING! You can choose from HIGH, LOW or versions/markets, where OFF heat settings. Amber indicator • Persons who are unable to feel provided) lights in each switch indicate the level pain to the skin because of ad- of heat in use. Two indicator lights Vehicles equipped with power driver vanced age, chronic illness, dia- will illuminate for HIGH, one for or passenger seats may be also be betes, spinal cord injury, medica- LOW and none for OFF. equipped with power lumbar. The tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or power lumbar switch is located on the other physical condition must ex- Press the switch once to se- outboard side of the power seat. Push ercise care when using the seat lect HIGH-level heating. the switch forward to increase the heater. It may cause burns even at Press the switch a second lumbar support. Push the switch rear- low temperatures, especially if time to select LOW-level ward to decrease the lumbar support. used for long periods of time. heating. Press the switch a third time • Do not place anything on the seat to shut the heating elements OFF. or seatback that insulates against NOTE: Once a heat setting is se- heat, such as a blanket or cush- lected, heat will be felt within two ion. This may cause the seat to five minutes. heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated When the HIGH-level setting is se- could cause serious burns due to lected, the heater will provide a the increased surface tempera- boosted heat level during the initial ture of the seat. stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH- Power Lumbar Switch Front Heated Seats level. If the HIGH-level setting is se- HEATED SEATS (for lected, the system will automatically There are two heated seat switches switch to LOW-level after a maximum versions/markets, where that allow the driver and passenger to of 60 minutes of continuous opera- provided) operate the seats independently. The tion. At that time, the number of illu- controls for each heater are located on On some models, the front and rear minated LEDs changes from two to seats may be equipped with heaters in the switch bank below the climate both the seat cushions and seatbacks. controls.

113 one, indicating the change. The LOW- Press the switch once to se- MANUAL FRONT/SECOND level setting will turn OFF automati- lect HIGH-level heating. ROW SEAT ADJUSTER cally after a maximum of 45 minutes. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level Both front seats are adjustable for- Rear Heated Seats heating. Press the switch a third time ward or rearward. The manual seat On some models, the second row seats to shut the heating elements OFF. adjustment handle is located under are equipped with heaters. There are the seat cushion at the front edge of NOTE: Once a heat setting is se- two heated seat switches that allow each seat. lected, heat will be felt within two the second row passengers to operate to five minutes. the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the slid- When the HIGH-level setting is se- ing side door handle trim panels. lected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH- level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, the system will automatically Manual Seat Adjuster switch to LOW-level after a maximum While sitting in the seat, pull up on of 60 minutes of continuous opera- the handle and slide the seat forward tion. At that time, the number of illu- or rearward. Release the bar once you Second Row Heated Seat Switch minated LEDs changes from two to have reached the desired position. You can choose from HIGH, LOW or one, indicating the change. The LOW- Then, using body pressure, move for- OFF heat settings. Amber indicator level setting will turn OFF automati- ward and rearward on the seat to be lights in each switch indicate the level cally after a maximum of 45 minutes. sure that the seat adjusters have of heat in use. Two indicator lights latched. will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

114 WARNING! To recline, lean forward slightly, lift WARNING! the lever, then push back to the de- • Adjusting a seat while driving sired position and release the lever. The head restraints for all occu- may be dangerous. Moving a seat Lean forward and lift the lever to pants must be properly adjusted while driving could result in loss return the seatback to its normal po- prior to operating the vehicle or of control which could cause a sition. Using body pressure, lean for- occupying a seat. Head restraints collision and serious injury or ward and rearward on the seat to be should never be adjusted while the death. sure the seatback has latched. vehicle is in motion. Driving a ve- • Seats should be adjusted before hicle with the head restraints im- fastening the seat belts and while properly adjusted or removed could the vehicle is parked. Serious in- WARNING! cause serious injury or death in the jury or death could result from a Do not ride with the seatback re- event of a collision. poorly adjusted seat belt. clined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In Active Head Restraints — Front MANUAL RECLINING a collision you could slide under the Seats SEATS seat belt, which could result in seri- Active Head Restraints are passive, ous injury or death. For models equipped with manual re- deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily clining seats, the recline lever is lo- HEAD RESTRAINTS cated on the outboard side of the seat. identified by any markings, only Head restraints are designed to reduce through visual inspection of the head the risk of injury by restricting head restraint. The head restraint will be movement in the event of a rear im- split in two halves, with the front half pact. Head restraints should be ad- being soft foam and trim, the back justed so that the top of the head half being decorative plastic. restraint is located above the top of When AHRs deploy during a rear im- your ear. pact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occu- Manual Recline Lever pant’s head and the AHR. This system

115 is designed to help prevent or reduce restraint. Push rearward on the bot- NOTE: the extent of injuries to the driver and tom of the head restraint to move the • The head restraints should only front passenger in certain types of head restraint away from your head. be removed by qualified techni- rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re- cians, for service purposes only. straints” in “Things To Know Before If either of the head restraints Starting Your Vehicle” for further in- require removal, see your autho- formation. rized dealer. To raise the head restraint, pull up- • In the event of deployment of an ward on the head restraint. To lower Active Head Restraint, refer to the head restraint, press the push but- “Occupant Restraints/Resetting ton, located at the base of the head Active Head Restraints (AHR)” restraint, and push downward on the Active Head Restraint (Normal Position) in “Things To Know Before head restraint. Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING! • Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may Active Head Restraint (Tilted) Push Button interfere with the operation of the For comfort the Active Head Re- Active Head Restraint in the straints can be tilted forward and event of a collision and could re- rearward. To tilt the head restraint sult in serious injury or death. closer to the back of your head, pull (Continued) forward on the bottom of the head

116 Second Row Stow 'n Go® WARNING! (Continued) On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n • Active Head Restraints may be Go® seats, the seats will fold and deployed if they are struck by an tumble in one motion. object such as a hand, foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental 1. Move the front seat fully forward. deployment of the Active Head 2. Recline the front seatback fully Restraint ensure that all cargo is forward. secured, as loose cargo could con- Push Button tact the Active Head Restraint Head Restraints — Second Row 3. Raise the armrests on the second during sudden stops. Failure to Bench row seat. follow this warning could cause NOTE: Seat will not stow in the personal injury if the Active Head If your vehicle is equipped with a sec- storage bin unless the armrests are Restraint is deployed. ond row bench seat, the head restraints are not adjustable. raised. Head Restraints — Second Row Head Restraints — Third Row 4. Slide the storage bin locking Quad Seats mechanism to the “LOCK” position To raise the head restraint, pull up- The head restraint in the center posi- and then pull up on the storage bin ward on the head restraint. To lower tion can be raised and lowered for latch to open the cover. the head restraint, press the push but- tether routing. Refer to “Occupant ton, located at the base of the head Restraints” in “Things To Know Be- restraint, and push downward on the fore Starting Your Vehicle” for further head restraint. information. STOW 'N GO® SEATING On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go® seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor Storage Bin Cover Lock Release for convenient storage.

117 5. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat.

Automatic Folding Seatback Seat In Storage Bin The seat will automatically tumble 7. Close the storage bin cover. into position for easy storage. Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold CAUTION! Lever The storage bin cover must be The non-adjustable head restraint locked and flat to avoid damage and seatback will fold automatically from contact with the front seat during the seat tumble. No additional tracks, which have minimal clear- actuation is necessary. ance to the cover.

Tumbled Second Row Seat WARNING! 6. Push the seat into the storage bin. In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched. • Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. Non-Adjustable Head Restraint (Continued)

118 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Keep the storage bin covers • In a collision, you or others in closed and latched while the ve- your vehicle could be injured if hicle is in motion. seats are not properly latched to • Do not use a storage bin latch as a their floor attachments. Always tie down. be sure the seats are fully latched. • Sitting in a seat with the head To Unstow Second Row Seats restraint in its lowered position Raising The Seatback could result in serious injury or 1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to 2. Return the head restraint to the death in a collision. Always make open the cover. upright position. sure the head restraints are in 2. Pull up on the strap to lift the seat their upright positions when the out of the storage bin and push the seat is to be occupied. seat rearward to latch the seat anchors. Stow 'n Go® Seat — Folded And Latched Position 3. Lift the seatback to the full upright position. To tumble or stow the seat from the folded and latched position: return 4. Return the head restraint to its the seatback and head restraint to the Raising The Head Restraint upright position, close the storage bin upright position. Then pull up on the cover and slide the storage bin locking seatback recliner lever on the out- 3. Pull up on the seatback recliner mechanism to the “Unlocked” posi- board side of the seat to fold head rest lever on the outboard side of the seat tion. and seatback and tumble seat for- to fold head rest and seatback and ward. tumble seat forward. 1. Return the seatback to the upright position.

119 Easy Entry Second Row QUAD SEATS (for WARNING! versions/markets, where The second row Stow 'n Go® seats • Adjusting a seat while driving allow easy entry to the third row seat provided) may be dangerous. Moving a seat or rear cargo area. Both Quad seats are adjustable for- while driving could result in loss Pull up on the seatback recliner lever ward or rearward. The manual seat of control which could cause a on the outboard side of the seat. adjustment handle is located under collision and serious injury or the seat cushion at the front edge of death. each seat. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Recline Seatback Recliner Lever, Seat To recline, lean forward slightly, lift Tumble, And Head Restraint Fold the lever, then push back to the de- Lever Manual Seat Adjuster sired position and release the lever. The seat will automatically fold into While sitting in the seat, pull up on Lean forward and lift the lever to position for easy entry into the third the handle and slide the seat forward return the seatback to its normal po- row. or rearward. Release the bar once you sition. Using body pressure, lean for- have reached the desired position. ward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. WARNING! Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be In the event of a collision you could sure that the seat adjusters have be injured if the seat is not fully latched. latched.

120 For passengers seated in the third row, there is a pull strap located on the outboard side of the seat near the bottom of the seat back. Third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the Quad seat forward for folding the seatback and accessing the easy entry lever. Recline Lever Fold-Flat Quad Seat WARNING! Easy Entry Do not ride with the seatback re- The Quad seats can be tilted forward clined so that the shoulder belt is no for easy entry into the third row. With longer resting against your chest. In the Quad seat in the fold-flat position, a collision you could slide under the lift up on the easy entry lever located seat belt, which could result in seri- near the bottom of the seat and lift the ous injury or death. seat forward. Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers

Fold-Flat To provide additional space behind the second row seats, the seats can be To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever folded forward. to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion.

Easy Entry Lever

121 With the seat in its fold-flat position, WARNING! pull upward on the easy-access release lever and lift the seat into the To reduce the risk of personal in- desired position. jury: • Retainer strap must always be securely attached to grab handle when seat is folded forward and vehicle is moving. B-Pillar Grab Handle • Never occupy the seat or the center seat behind a seat that has Secure the retainer strap to the inside been folded forward. grab handle located on the B-Pillar. When not in use, store the strap in the Removal Fold-Flat Release Lever sewn-in pocket located on the base of Pull out the retainer strap from the the seat cushion. The Quad seats can be removed if sewn-in pocket located on the base of additional storage is needed. With the the seat cushion. seat in the easy entry position, lift the cross beam forward and up to release the front anchor latches.

Retainer Strap

Place the strap around the grab Cross Beam For Seat Removal handle located on the B-Pillar. Before securing the strap, adjust the buckle for proper fit. 122 THIRD ROW POWER NOTE: Lower the head restraint Left and right third row seats can be RECLINE (for by pulling on the release strap folded individually or together. The versions/markets, where marked “1” located on the out- third row power folding seat adjusts board side of the head restraint. to the following positions using the provided) switch bank located on the left rear The power recline feature, located on trim panel: the side of the seat cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for occupant comfort.

Head Restraint Release Strap “1” The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is Rear Panel Power Switch Bank in PARK. 1 — Open to 2 — Stow Normal Third Row Power Seat Switch 3 — Tailgate/ 4 — Right/Left THIRD ROW POWER Fold Flat Seats/Both Seats FOLDING SEAT (for versions/markets, where NOTE: provided) • Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small buckle and A one-touch power folding seat switch lower the head restraints before is located in the left rear trim panel as One Touch Folding Seat Third Row attempting to fold/stow the part of a switch bank. The rear switch bank allows multiple power third row seats. power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats.

123 • To abort seat operation while 2. Lower the outboard head re- seat is in motion, press a differ- straints by pulling on the release strap ent seat position selector switch marked “1” located on the outboard to stop the seat. Once the seat side of the head restraint. stops moving, then the desired position can be selected. • The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for Release Strap “3” safe operation. When the system 5. Pull release strap marked “4” and detects an obstacle, the motors tumble the seat rearward into the will stop and reverse the motion storage bin. a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle. Should Head Restraint Release Strap “1” this occur, remove the obstacle 3. Pull release strap marked “2” lo- and press the button again, for cated on the rear of the seat to lower the desired position. the seatback. MANUALLY FOLDING THIRD ROW SEATS (for versions/markets, where Release Strap “4” provided) 1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the Release Strap “2” head restraint down. 4. Pull release strap marked “3” to release the anchors.

Stowed Third Row Seat

124 To Unfold Third Row Seats Tailgate Mode DRIVER MEMORY SEAT 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift 1. Pull release strap “3”, then pull (for versions/markets, the seat out of the storage bin and release strap “4” to rotate the entire where provided) push the seat forward until the an- seat rearward. chors latch. The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the 2. To restore the seat to its upright driver's door panel can be pro- 2. Pull release strap marked “2” to position, lift up on the seatback and grammed to recall the driver's seat, unlock the recliner. push forward until the anchors latch. driver's outside mirror, adjustable 3. Pulling strap “4” releases the seat- brake and accelerator pedals, and ra- back to return to its full upright posi- WARNING! dio station preset settings. Your Re- tion. mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- To avoid serious injury or death, ters can also be programmed to recall 4. Raise the head restraint to its up- never operate the vehicle with oc- the same positions when the UN- right position. cupants in the third row seat while LOCK button is pressed. in the tailgate mode. WARNING! PLASTIC GROCERY BAG • In a collision, you or others in RETAINER HOOKS your vehicle could be injured if Retainer hooks which will hold plastic seats are not properly latched to grocery bag handles are built into the their floor attachments. Always seatbacks of all rear seats and some be sure the seats are fully latched. front seats. The floor supports the • Sitting in a seat with the head partial weight of the bagged goods. Driver Memory Switch restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or Your vehicle may have been delivered death in a collision. Always make with two RKE transmitters. Only one sure the head restraints are in RKE transmitter can be linked to each their upright positions when the of the memory positions. seat is to be occupied.

125 SETTING MEMORY 5. Turn on the radio and set the radio 12. Repeat the above steps to set the POSITIONS AND LINKING station presets (up to 10 AM and 10 next Memory position using the other RKE TRANSMITTER TO FM stations can be set). numbered Memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory. MEMORY 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key. Memory Position Recall NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered button (1 or 2) 7. Press and release the SET (S) but- NOTE: The vehicle must be in is pressed, you erase the memory ton located on the driver's door. PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the settings for that button and store a 8. Within five seconds, press and re- vehicle is not in PARK, a message new one. lease MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the will be displayed in the EVIC. 1. Insert the ignition key and turn the driver's door. The next step must be ignition switch to the ON position. performed within 5 seconds if you To recall the memory settings for desire to also use a RKE transmitter to driver one, press MEMORY button 1 2. Press the driver door MEMORY recall memory positions. on the driver's door or the UNLOCK button number 1 if you are setting the button on the RKE transmitter linked 9. Select “Remote Linked to memory for driver 1, or button num- to memory position 1. ber 2 if you are setting the memory for Memory” in the Electronic Vehicle In- driver 2. The system will recall any formation Center (EVIC) and enter To recall the memory setting for stored settings. Wait for the system to “Yes”. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle In- driver two, press MEMORY button 2 complete the memory recall before formation Center (EVIC)/Customer- on the driver's door or the UNLOCK continuing to Step 3. Programmable Features” in “Under- button on the RKE transmitter linked standing Your Instrument Panel” for to Memory Position 2. 3. Adjust the driver's seat, recliner, further information. and driver's side-view mirror to the A recall can be cancelled by pressing desired positions. 10. Press and release the LOCK but- any of the MEMORY buttons on the ton on one of the RKE transmitters. driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or 4. Adjust the brake and accelerator 2). When a recall is cancelled, the 11. Insert the ignition key and turn pedals to the desired positions. driver's seat, outside mirrors, and the the ignition switch to the ON position.

126 pedals stop moving. A delay of one disabled at one time. Refer to • When you remove the key from the second will occur before another re- “Electronic Vehicle Information ignition switch the driver seat will call can be selected. Center (EVIC)/Customer- move to a position 8 mm forward of Programmable Features" in “Un- the rear stop if the driver seat posi- To Disable RKE Transmitter derstanding Your Instrument tion is between 23 – 68 mm forward Linked To Memory Panel” for further information. of the rear stop. The seat will return 1. Turn the ignition switch to the to its previously set position when OFF position and remove the key. EASY ENTRY/EXIT SEAT you insert the key into the ignition (Available With Memory switch and turn it out of the LOCK 2. Press and release MEMORY but- Seat Only) position. ton 1. The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1. This feature provides automatic • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature Wait for the system to complete the driver seat positioning to enhance is disabled when the driver seat po- memory recall before continuing to driver mobility when entering and ex- sition is less than 28 mm forward of Step 3. iting the vehicle. the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving 3. Press and release the memory SET The distance the driver seat moves the seat for Easy Exit or Easy En- (S) button located on the driver's depends on where you have the driver try. door. seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch. Each stored memory setting will have 4. Within five seconds, press and re- • When you remove the key from the an associated Easy Entry and Easy lease the UNLOCK button on the Exit Position. RKE transmitter. ignition switch, the driver seat will move about 60 mm rearward if the NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit To disable another RKE transmitter driver seat position is greater than feature can be enabled or disabled linked to either Memory Position, re- or equal to 68 mm forward of the through the programmable fea- peat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE trans- rear stop. The seat will return to its tures in the Electronic Vehicle In- mitter. previously set position when you formation Center (EVIC). If your NOTE: Once programmed, all insert the key into the ignition vehicle is not equipped with an RKE transmitters linked to switch and turn it out of the LOCK EVIC, your dealership can memory can be easily enabled or position. activate/deactivate this feature for

127 you. For details, refer to “Elec- WARNING! tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Be sure the hood is fully latched Features” in “Understanding Your before driving your vehicle. If the Instrument Panel” for further in- hood is not fully latched, it could formation. open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to TO OPEN AND CLOSE follow this warning could result in THE HOOD Safety Lever Location serious injury or death. To open the hood, two latches must be Use the hood prop rod to secure the LIGHTS released. hood in the open position. All of the lights, except the Hazard 1. Pull the hood release lever located CAUTION! Warning lights, headlight high beams on the instrument panel, below the and flash-to-pass, are controlled by steering column. To prevent possible damage, do not switches to the left of the steering slam the hood to close it. Lower the column on the instrument panel. hood until it is open approximately 30 cm and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

Hood Release Lever 2. Move to the front of the vehicle Headlight Switch With Halo Control and look inside the center of the hood Assembly opening. Locate, then push the safety catch lever downward while raising the hood at the same time.

128 INTERIOR LIGHTING specific areas to aid the occupants in HEADLIGHTS locating specific features while driv- Interior lights are turned on when a ing at night. door or liftgate is opened, the Remote Turn the headlight switch Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is The Halo control switch is located to knob to the second detent to activated, or when the dimmer con- the right of the dimmer switch. turn the headlights and trol is moved to the extreme top. parking lights on. This also The interior lights will automatically turns on all instrument panel lighting. turn off in approximately 10 minutes To change the brightness of the infor the first activation and 90 seconds strument panel lights, rotate the dim- every activation thereafter until the mer control up or down. engine is started, if one of the following occur: AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS (for versions/markets, 1. A door, sliding door or the liftgate Halo Control Switch where provided) is left open To activate the Halo lights, This system automatically turns your rotate the Halo switch con- 2. Any overhead reading light is left headlights on or off based on ambient trol upward or downward on light levels. To turn the system on, to increase or decrease the turn the headlight switch to the ex- NOTE: The key must be out of the lighting. ignition switch or the ignition treme counterclockwise position switch must be in the OFF position PARKING LIGHTS aligning the indicator with AUTO on for this feature to operate. the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay Halo Lights (for versions/markets, Turn the headlight switch feature is also on. This means your where provided) knob to the first detent to turn headlights will stay on for up to 90 the parking lights on. This also turns Halo lights are strategically placed seconds after you turn the ignition on all instrument panel lighting. soft lighting that help to illuminate switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O (Off) position.

129 NOTE: The engine must be run- HEADLIGHT DELAY (for If the headlights are turned off before ning before the headlights will versions/markets, where the ignition, they will turn off in the come on in the Automatic mode. provided) normal manner. NOTE: The headlights must be HEADLIGHTS ON WITH This feature provides the safety of turned off within 45 seconds of WIPERS (for versions/ headlight illumination for up to turning the ignition OFF to activate markets, where provided) 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle. this feature. When your headlights are in the Au- To activate the delay feature, turn OFF tomatic mode and the engine is run- the ignition switch while the headlights FRONT AND REAR FOG ning, the headlights will automati- are still on. Then turn off the head- LIGHTS (for versions/ cally turn on when the wiper system is lights within 45 seconds. The 90 sec- markets, where provided) also turned on. In addition, the head- ond delay interval begins when head- The front and rear fog light switch is lights will turn off when the wipers are light switch is turned off. If the built into the headlight switch. turned off if they were turned on by headlights or parking lights are turned this feature. Headlights on when back on or the ignition switch is turned windshield wipers are on may be ON, the delay will be cancelled. found on vehicles equipped with an When exiting the vehicle the driver automatic headlight system. Refer to can choose to have the headlights re- “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- main on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or ter (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable not remain on. To change the timer Features” in “Understanding Your In- setting, see your authorized dealer. strument Panel” for further information. The headlight delay time is program- Fog Light Switch mable on vehicles equipped with an The front and rear fog lights EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle In- may be operated as desired formation Center (EVIC)/Customer- when visibility is poor due to Programmable Features” in “Under- fog. The fog lights will activate in the standing Your Instrument Panel” for following order: Press the headlight further information. switch once and the front fog lights

130 come on. Press the switch a second lights will turn off automatically until TURN SIGNALS time and the rear fog lights will come the next cycle of the ignition switch or Move the multifunction lever up or on (front fog lights stay on). Press the headlight switch. down and the arrows on each side of switch a third time and the rear fog The battery protection feature will be the instrument cluster flash to show lights turn off (front fog stays on). disabled if the ignition switch is proper operation of the front and rear Press the switch a fourth times and turned to any other position other turn signal lights. the front fog turns off. For vehicles than LOCK during the eight minute without front fog, rear fog will acti- delay. NOTE: If either light remains on vate on the first press. and does not flash, or there is a An indicator light in the instrument MULTIFUNCTION LEVER very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an cluster illuminates when the fog lights The multifunction lever is located on indicator fails to light when the are turned on. the left side of the steering column. lever is moved, it would suggest NOTE: The headlight switch must that the indicator bulb is defective. be in parking lights or headlights position to activate the front and Turn Signal Warning rear fog lamps. If the vehicle electronics sense that the BATTERY PROTECTION vehicle has traveled at over 30 km/h for approximately 1.6 km with the This feature provides battery protec- turn signals on, a chime will sound to tion to avoid wearing down the bat- alert the driver. tery if the headlights, parking lights, Multifunction Lever or front fog lights are left on for ex- The multifunction lever controls the: HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH tended periods of time when the igni- • Turn Signals When the headlights are turned on, tion switch is in the LOCK position. pushing the multifunction lever to- After eight minutes of the ignition • Headlight Beams Low/High ward the instrument panel will switch switch being in the LOCK position • Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn) and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO, the • Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions 131 from low beams to high beams. Pull- cause headlights to remain on lon- HEADLIGHT LEVELING ing back to the neutral position re- ger (closer to the vehicle). Also, SYSTEM (for versions/ turns the headlights to the low beam dirt, film and other obstructions markets, where provided) operation. on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function FLASH-TO-PASS improperly. Your vehicle may be equipped with a headlight You can signal another vehicle with To Activate your headlights by lightly pulling the leveling system. This sys- multifunction lever toward you. This 1. Select “Automatic High Beams — tem allows the driver to will turn on the high beam headlights ON” through the EVIC. Refer to maintain proper headlight beam posi- until the lever is released. “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- tion with the road surface regardless ter (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable of vehicle load. The control switch is AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM Features” in “Understanding Your In- located on the instrument panel next (for versions/markets, strument Panel” for further informa- to the dimmer control. where provided) tion. To operate, rotate the control switch The Automatic High Beam system 2. Rotate the headlight switch coun- until the appropriate number, which provides increased forward lighting at terclockwise to the AUTO (A) posi- corresponds to the load listed on the night by automating high beam con- tion. chart, aligns with the indicator line on trol through the use of a digital cam- the switch. 3. Push the multifunction lever away era mounted on the inside rearview from you to switch the headlights to mirror. This camera detects vehicle Driver only, or driver and the high beam position. Refer to 0 specific light and automatically front passenger. “Multifunction Lever” in this section switches from high beams to low Driver, plus an evenly distrib- for further information. beams until the approaching vehicle uted load in the luggage compartment. The total weight of is out of view. NOTE: This system will not acti- 1 vate until the vehicle is at, or the driver and load does not NOTE: Broken, muddy or ob- above, 40 km/h. exceed the maximum load structed headlights and taillights capacity of the vehicle. of vehicles in the field of view will

132 All seating positions occupied, NOTE: Always remove any wiping cycle. To use the Washer, push plus an evenly distributed buildup of snow that prevents the on the end of the lever to the second load in the luggage compart- windshield wiper blades from re- detent and hold while spray is desired. 2 ment. The total weight of pas- turning to the off position. If the If the lever is pushed while on the in- sengers and load does not ex- windshield wiper switch is turned termittent setting, the wipers will turn ceed the maximum load off and the blades cannot return to on and operate for several wipe cycles capacity of the vehicle. the off position, damage to the after the lever is released, and then wiper motor may occur. resume the intermittent interval previ- Calculations based on a passenger ously selected. If the lever is pushed weight of 75 kg. while the wipers are in the off position, WARNING! WINDSHIELD WIPERS the wipers will operate several wipe Sudden loss of visibility through cycles, then turn off. AND WASHERS the windshield could lead to a col- INTERMITTENT, LOW AND The wipers and washers are operated lision. You might not see other ve- by a switch within the multifunction hicles or other obstacles. To avoid HIGH SPEED WIPERS lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc- sudden icing of the windshield dur- Rotate the end of the lever to one of tion lever to select the desired wiper ing freezing weather, warm the the first five detent positions for inter- speed. windshield with the defroster be- mittent wiper operation, the sixth de- fore and during windshield washer tent for low wiper operation and the use. seventh detent for high wiper opera- MIST, FRONT WIPER AND tion. WASHER Use one of the five intermittent wiper settings when weather conditions Use the Mist feature when weather make a single wiping cycle, with a conditions make occasional usage of variable delay between cycles, desir- the wipers necessary. able. At driving speeds above Washer And Wiper Controls Press the end of the multifunction lever 16 km/h, the delay can be regulated inward (toward the steering column) to from a maximum of approximately the first detent and release for a single 133 18 second between cycles (first de- WARNING! wiping sensitivity, they may select tent), to a cycle every one second sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the op- (fifth detent). Sudden loss of visibility through erator desires less wiping sensitivity, the windshield could lead to a col- they may select sensitivity positions 2 NOTE: If the vehicle is moving lision. You might not see other ve- or 1. Place the multifunction lever in less than 16 km/h, delay times will hicles or other obstacles. To avoid the OFF position when not using the be doubled. sudden icing of the windshield dur- system. ing freezing weather, warm the REAR WIPER AND NOTE: WASHER windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use. • The Rain Sensing feature will Rotating the rotary ring to the first not operate when the wiper detent activates the rear intermittent RAIN SENSING WIPERS speed is in the low or high posi- wipers. To activate the washers, rotate (for versions/markets, tion. the rotary ring fully forward and the where provided) washers will spray until the ring is • The Rain Sensing feature may released, and then resume the inter- This feature senses moisture on the not function properly when ice mittent interval. windshield and automatically acti- or dried saltwater is present on vates the wipers for the driver. This the windshield. NOTE: Rear window wipers feature is especially useful for road • Use of products containing wax function in the intermittent wiper splash or overspray from the wind- or silicone may reduce rain sen- speed only. shield washers of the vehicle ahead. sor performance. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five intermittent • The Rain Sensing feature can be wiper sensitivity settings to activate turned on and off through the this feature. EVIC (for versions/markets, The sensitivity of the system is adjust- where provided). Refer to “Elec- able from the multifunction lever. tronic Vehicle Information Cen- Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been ter (EVIC)/Personal Settings calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the operator desires more 134 (Customer-Programmable Fea- unless the wiper control on the mul- shorten the steering column, pull the tures)” in “Understanding Your tifunction lever is moved or the steering wheel outward or push it in- Instrument Panel” for further shift lever is moved out of the NEU- ward as desired. To lock the steering information. TRAL position. column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. The Rain Sensing system has protec- TILT/TELESCOPING tive features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the STEERING COLUMN WARNING! following conditions: This feature allows you to tilt the Do not adjust the steering column • Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit steering column upward or down- while driving. Adjusting the steer- — The Rain Sensing feature will ward. It also allows you to lengthen or ing column while driving or driving not operate when the ignition is shorten the steering column. The tilt/ with the steering column unlocked, first switched ON, and the vehicle is telescoping lever is located below the could cause the driver to lose con- stationary, and the outside tem- steering wheel at the end of the steer- trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow perature is below 0°C, unless the ing column. this warning may result in serious wiper control on the multifunction injury or death. lever is moved, or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 km/h, or ADJUSTABLE PEDALS the outside temperature rises above (for versions/markets, freezing. where provided) • Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain The adjustable pedals system is de- Sensing feature will not operate signed to allow a greater range of when the ignition is ON, and the Tilt/Telescoping Lever driver comfort for steering wheel tilt transmission shift lever is in the and seat position. This feature allows NEUTRAL position, and the ve- To unlock the steering column, push the brake and accelerator pedals to hicle speed is less than 8 km/h, the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move toward or away from the driver move the steering wheel upward or to provide improved position with the downward as desired. To lengthen or steering wheel.

135 The switch is located on the left side of Cruise Control Engaged” or “Ad- WARNING! the steering column. justable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”. Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose NOTE: control and have an accident. Al- • Always adjust the pedals to a po- ways adjust the pedals while the sition that allows full pedal vehicle is parked. travel. ELECTRONIC SPEED • Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best pos- CONTROL Adjustable Pedal Switch sible seat/pedal position. When engaged, the Electronic Speed Press the switch forward to move the Control takes over accelerator opera- pedals forward (toward the front of tions at speeds greater than 40 km/h. the vehicle). CAUTION! Do not place any article under the Press the switch rearward to move the adjustable pedals or impede its pedals rearward (toward the driver). ability to move, as it may cause • The pedals can be adjusted with the damage to the pedal controls. Pedal ignition OFF. travel may become limited if move- • The pedals cannot be adjusted ment is stopped by an obstruction when the vehicle is in REVERSE or in the adjustable pedal's path. when the Electronic Speed Control Electronic Speed Control Buttons System is on. The following mes- 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + sages will be displayed on vehicles 4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - equipped with the Electronic Ve- hicle Information System (EVIC) if NOTE: In order to ensure proper the pedals are attempted to be ad- operation, the Electronic Speed justed when the system is locked Control System has been designed out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled —

136 to shut down if multiple Speed TO SET A DESIRED SPEED TO VARY THE SPEED Control functions are operated at SETTING the same time. If this occurs, the Turn the Electronic Speed Control Electronic Speed Control System ON. When the vehicle has reached the When the Electronic Speed Control is can be reactivated by pushing the desired speed, press the SET (-) but- set, you can increase speed by pushing Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF ton and release. Release the accelera- the RES (+) button. If the button is button and resetting the desired tor and the vehicle will operate at the continually pressed, the set speed will vehicle set speed. selected speed. continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will TO ACTIVATE NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on be established. Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise level ground before pressing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will Indicator Light in the instrument SET button. result in a 1.6 km/h increase in set cluster will illuminate. To turn the TO DEACTIVATE speed. Each subsequent tap of the system off, push the ON/OFF button button results in an increase of a second time. The Cruise Indicator A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing 1.6 km/h. Light will turn off. The system should the CANCEL button, or normal brake To decrease speed while the Elec- be turned off when not in use. pressure while slowing the vehicle will tronic Speed Control is set, push the deactivate Electronic Speed Control SET (-) button. If the button is con- without erasing the set speed memory. WARNING! tinually held in the SET (-) position, Pressing the ON/OFF button or turn- the set speed will continue to decrease Leaving the Electronic Speed Con- ing the ignition switch OFF erases the until the button is released. Release trol system on when not in use is set speed memory. dangerous. You could accidentally the button when the desired speed is set the system or cause it to go TO RESUME SPEED reached, and the new set speed will be established. faster than you want. You could To resume a previously set speed, lose control and have an accident. push the RES (+) button and release. Pressing the SET (-) button once will Always leave the system OFF when Resume can be used at any speed result in a 1.6 km/h decrease in set you are not using it. above 32 km/h.

137 speed. Each subsequent tap of the WARNING! ParkSense® can be active only when button results in a decrease of the shift lever is in REVERSE. If 1.6 km/h. Electronic Speed Control can be ParkSense® is enabled at this shift dangerous where the system cannot lever position, the system will remain TO ACCELERATE FOR maintain a constant speed. Your ve- active until the vehicle speed is in- PASSING hicle could go too fast for the con- creased to approximately 11 km/h or ditions, and you could lose control Press the accelerator as you would above. The system will become active and have an accident. Do not use normally. When the pedal is released, again if the vehicle speed is decreased Electronic Speed Control in heavy the vehicle will return to the set speed. to speeds less than approximately traffic or on roads that are winding, 9 km/h. Using Electronic Speed Control icy, snow-covered or slippery. On Hills PARK ASSIST SENSORS The transmission may downshift on PARKSENSE® REAR The four Park Assist sensors, located hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. PARK ASSIST (for in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within NOTE: The Electronic Speed versions/markets, where the sensors’ field of view. The sensors Control system maintains speed up provided) can detect obstacles from approxi- and down hills. A slight speed The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sys- mately 30 cm up to 200 cm from the change on moderate hills is nor- tem provides visual and audible indi- rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal mal. cations of the distance between the rear direction, depending on the location, On steep hills, a greater speed loss or fascia and a detected obstacle when type and orientation of the obstacle. gain may occur so it may be prefer- backing up, e.g. during a parking ma- PARKSENSE® WARNING able to drive without Electronic Speed neuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Control. Usage Precautions for limitations of DISPLAY this system and recommendations. The ParkSense® Warning screen will ParkSense® will retain the last system only be displayed if Sound and Dis- state (enabled or disabled) from the play is selected from the Customer- last ignition cycle when the ignition is Programmable Features section of the changed to the ON/RUN position. Electronic Vehicle Information Center

138 (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual Park Assist System ON Slow Tone and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/ bumper and the detected obstacle.

Park Assist System OFF Fast Tone The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs ParkSense® Warning Display and will produce a one-half second PARKSENSE® DISPLAY tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the fewer arcs and the sound tone will warning display will turn ON indicat- change from slow, to fast, to continuing the system status. ous. Continuous Tone

139 The vehicle is close to the obstacle warning alert operation when the sys- when the EVIC display shows one tem is detecting an obstacle: flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the WARNING ALERTS Rear Distance Greater than 200-100 cm 100-65 cm 65-30 cm Less than cm 200 cm 30 cm Audible Alert None Single 1/2 Slow Fast Continuous Chime Second Tone Display Message Park Assist Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object Warning Object System ON Detected Detected Detected Detected Arcs None 3 Solid 3 Slow 2 Slow 1 Slow (Continuous) Flashing Flashing Flashing Radio Volume No Yes Yes Yes Yes Reduced NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce (Customer-Programmable Fea- is moved to REVERSE and the system the radio volume, if on, when the tures)” in “Understanding Your In- is disabled, the EVIC will display the system is sounding an audio tone. strument Panel” for further informa- “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” mes- tion. sage for as long as the vehicle is in ENABLING/DISABLING REVERSE. PARKSENSE® When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will display the SERVICE THE ParkSense® can be enabled and dis- “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” mes- PARKSENSE® REAR PARK abled through the Customer- sage for approximately five seconds. ASSIST SYSTEM Programmable Features section of the Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understand- During vehicle start up, when the Sound Only, or Sound and Display. ing Your Instrument Panel” for fur- ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- ther information. When the shift lever has detected a faulted condition, the tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings 140 instrument cluster will actuate a snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc- • When you turn ParkSense® off, single chime, once per ignition cycle, tion and then cycle the ignition. If the the instrument cluster will dis- and it will display the “PARKSENSE message continues to appear, see an play “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- authorized dealer. OFF.” Furthermore, once you SORS” or the “PARKSENSE UN- turn ParkSense® off, it remains If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” off until you turn it on again, SERVICE REQUIRED” appears in message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle even if you cycle the ignition key. the EVIC, see an authorized dealer. Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- • When you move the shift lever to derstanding Your Instrument Panel” CLEANING THE PARK the REVERSE position and for further information. When the ASSIST SYSTEM ParkSense® is turned off, the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and EVIC will display “PARK AS- the system has detected a faulted con- Clean the sensors with water, car SIST SYSTEM OFF” message for dition, the EVIC will display the wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use as long as the vehicle is in "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch REVERSE. WIPE REAR SENSORS" or or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SER- could damage the sensors. • ParkSense®, when on, will re- VICE REQUIRED" message for as PARKSENSE® SYSTEM duce the radio volume when it is long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. USAGE PRECAUTIONS sounding a tone. Under this condition, ParkSense will • Clean the ParkSense® sensors not operate. NOTE: regularly, taking care not to If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE • Ensure that the rear bumper is scratch or damage them. The WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and sensors must not be covered the Electronic Vehicle Information debris to keep the ParkSense® with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt Center (EVIC) make sure the outer system operating properly. or debris. Failure to do so can surface and the underside of the rear result in the system not working • Jackhammers, large trucks, and fascia/bumper is clean and clear of properly. The ParkSense® sys- other vibrations could affect the tem might not detect an obstacle performance of ParkSense®. behind the fascia/bumper, or it

141 could provide a false indication CAUTION! WARNING! that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper. • ParkSense® is only a parking aid • Drivers must be careful when and it is unable to recognize every backing up even when using • Ensure that the ParkSense® sys- obstacle, including small ob- ParkSense®. Always check care- tem is turned off if objects such stacles. Parking curbs might be fully behind your vehicle, look as bicycle carriers, trailer temporarily detected or not de- behind you, and be sure to check hitches, etc. are placed within 30 tected at all. Obstacles located for pedestrians, animals, other cm from the rear fascia/ bum- above or below the sensors will vehicles, obstructions, and blind per. Failure to do so can result in not be detected when they are in spots before backing up. You are the system misinterpreting a close proximity. responsible for safety and must close object as a sensor problem, • The vehicle must be driven slowly continue to pay attention to your causing the “PARKSENSE UN- when using ParkSense® in order surroundings. Failure to do so can AVAILABLE SERVICE RE- to be able to stop in time when an result in serious injury or death. QUIRED” message to be dis- obstacle is detected. It is recom- (Continued) played in the EVIC. mended that the driver looks over • On vehicles equipped with a his/her shoulder when using tailgate, ParkSense® should be ParkSense®. disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

142 When the vehicle is shifted out of RE- WARNING! (Continued) PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA (for VERSE, the rear camera mode is ex- • Before using ParkSense®, it is ited and the navigation or audio strongly recommended that the versions/markets, where screen appears again. ball mount and hitch ball assem- provided) bly is disconnected from the ve- When displayed, static grid lines will hicle when the vehicle is not used Your vehicle may be equipped with illustrate the width of the vehicle for towing. Failure to do so can the ParkView® Rear Back Up Cam- while a dashed center-line will indi- result in injury or damage to ve- era that allows you to see an on-screen cate the center of the vehicle to assist hicles or obstacles because the image of the rear surroundings of with aligning to a hitch/receiver. The hitch ball will be much closer to your vehicle whenever the shift lever static grid lines will show separate the obstacle than the rear fascia is put into REVERSE. The image will zones that will help indicate the dis- when the loudspeaker sounds the be displayed on the Navigation/ tance to the rear of the vehicle. The continuous tone. Also, the sensors Multimedia radio display screen along following table shows the approxi- could detect the ball mount and with a caution note to “check entire mate distances for each zone: hitch ball assembly, depending on surroundings” across the top of the its size and shape, giving a false screen. After five seconds this note indication that an obstacle is be- will disappear. The ParkView® cam- hind the vehicle. era is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate. Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle Red 0-30cm Yellow 30 cm-1m Green 1 m or greater

143 WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) TURNING PARKVIEW® ON OR OFF — WITHOUT Drivers must be careful when back- • To avoid vehicle damage, the ve- ing up even when using the hicle must be driven slowly when NAVIGATION/ ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. using ParkView® to be able to stop MULTIMEDIA RADIO Always check carefully behind your in time when an obstacle is seen. It 1. Press the “menu” hard-key. vehicle, and be sure to check for is recommended that the driver pedestrians, animals, other ve- look frequently over his/her shoul- 2. Select “system setup” soft-key. hicles, obstructions, or blind spots der when using ParkView®. 3. Enable or disable the rear camera before backing up. You are respon- NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any feature by selecting “enable rear cam- sible for the safety of your sur- era in reverse” soft-key. roundings and must continue to foreign substance builds up on the pay attention while backing up. camera lens, clean the lens, rinse OVERHEAD CONSOLES Failure to do so can result in serious with water, and dry with a soft injury or death. cloth. Do not cover the lens. FRONT OVERHEAD TURNING PARKVIEW® ON CONSOLE CAUTION! OR OFF — WITH Two versions of the overhead console • To avoid vehicle damage, NAVIGATION/ are available. The base front overhead ParkView® should only be used MULTIMEDIA RADIO console model featured fixed incan- descent courtesy/reading lights, flip- as a parking aid. The camera is 1. Press the “menu” hard-key. unable to view every obstacle or down sunglass storage and conversa- object in your drive path. 2. Select “system setup” soft-key. tion mirror. The premium front overhead console model features a (Continued) 3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key. LED focused light that illuminates 4. Enable or disable the rear camera the instrument panel cupholders, two feature by selecting “enable rear cam- swiveling LED lights, flip-down sun- era in reverse” soft-key. glass storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door switches 5. Press the “save” soft-key. and an optional power liftgate switch.

144 NOTE: Premium sunroof console direction of these lights by pressing The door will slowly rotate to the full models include all of above except the outside ring, which is identified open position. sunglass storage. with four directional arrows (LED lamps only). The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console (premium console only). This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down. Full Open Position Overhead Console From this position, the door can be SUNGLASS STORAGE COURTESY/INTERIOR fully closed or, by rotating upward LIGHTING (NON-SUNROOF ONLY) about 3/4 of the way and releasing, At the front of the overhead console, a positioned for conversation mirror At the forward end of the console are compartment is provided for the stor- use. two courtesy lights (standard dome age of two pairs of sunglasses. light has two buttons). The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or From the closed position, press the the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is door latch to open the compartment. equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The courtesy lights also function as Conversation Mirror Position reading lights. Press in on each lens to NOTE: From the “conversation turn these lights on while inside the mirror” position, the door can only vehicle. Press a second time to turn Over Door Latch be closed. each light off. You may adjust the

145 To return to the full open position, the door must first be closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to release. REAR COURTESY/ READING LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) Reading Lights Overhead Compartment Features 1 The overhead console has two sets of REAR OVERHEAD 1 — DVD 5 — Storage 2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD 1 courtesy lights. The lights turn on CONSOLES (for 3 — Interior 7 — Interior when a front door, a sliding door or versions/markets, where Lights Lights the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is provided) 4 — Storage 8 — Halo Light- equipped with Remote Keyless Entry ing The rear overhead storage system is (RKE) the lights will also turn on 1 (for versions/markets, where available in two versions: with or when the UNLOCK button on the equipped) RKE transmitter is pressed. without sunroof. The courtesy lights also function as An additional LED at the front of the Rear Console Halo Lighting reading lights. Press in on each lens to rear console shines down on the front turn these lights on while inside the foot-well area while in courtesy mode, The rear overhead console has re- vehicle. Press the lens a second time to for added convenience. cessed halo lighting around the pe- turn each light off. You may adjust the rimeter of the console base. This fea- direction of these lights by pressing ture provides additional lighting the outside ring, which is identified options while traveling and is con- with four directional arrows. trolled by the headlight switch. Refer to “Lights/Halo Lights (for versions/ markets, where provided)” in “Un- derstanding The Features Of Your Ve- hicle” for further information.

146 POWER SUNROOF (for WARNING! OPENING SUNROOF — EXPRESS versions/markets, where • Never leave children alone in a provided) vehicle, or with access to an un- Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sun- The power sunroof switch is located locked vehicle. Never leave the roof will open automatically from any between the sun visors on the over- key fob in or near the vehicle. position. The sunroof will open fully head console. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become en- and stop automatically. This is called trapped by the power sunroof “Express Open”. During Express while operating the power sun- Open operation, any movement of the roof switch. Such entrapment sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. may result in serious injury or NOTE: If the sunshade is in the death. closed position it will automati- • In a collision, there is greater risk cally open halfway prior to the of being thrown from a vehicle glass cycling open. with an open sunroof. You could Power Sunroof Switch also be seriously injured or killed. OPENING THE SUNROOF Always fasten your seat belt — MANUAL MODE properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any • Do not allow small children to release of the switch will stop the operate the sunroof. Never allow movement and the sunroof will re- your fingers, other body parts, or main in a partially opened condition any object, to project through the until the switch is pushed and held sunroof opening. Injury may re- rearward again. sult.

147 CLOSING SUNROOF — detected, the sunroof will automati- WIND BUFFETING EXPRESS cally retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch Wind buffeting can be described as Press the switch forward and release it forward and release to Express Close. the perception of pressure on the ears within one-half second, and the sun- or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. roof will close automatically from any NOTE: If three consecutive sun- Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffet- position. The sunroof will close fully roof close attempts result in Pinch ing with the windows down, or the and then stop automatically. This is Protect reversals, the fourth close sunroof (for versionis/markets, where called “Express Close”. During Ex- attempt will be a Manual Close provided) is in certain open or par- press Close operation, any movement movement with Pinch Protect dis- tially open positions. This is a normal of the sunroof switch will stop the abled. occurrence and can be minimized. If sunroof. VENTING SUNROOF — the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and CLOSING SUNROOF — EXPRESS rear windows together to minimize MANUAL MODE Press and release the “Vent” button, the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs To close the sunroof, press and hold and the sunroof will open to the vent with the sunroof open, adjust the sun- the switch in the forward position. position. This is called “Express roof opening to minimize the buffet- Any release of the switch will stop the Vent”, and will occur regardless of ing or open any window. movement and the sunroof will re- sunroof position. During Express Vent SUNROOF MAINTENANCE main in a partially closed condition operation, any movement of the until the switch is pushed and held switch will stop the sunroof. Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. forward again. SUNSHADE OPERATION IGNITION OFF OPERATION PINCH PROTECT FEATURE The sunshade can be opened manu- This feature will detect an obstruction ally. However, the sunshade will open For vehicles not equipped with the in the opening of the sunroof during automatically as the sunroof opens. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Express Close operation. If an ob- NOTE: The sunshade cannot be struction in the path of the sunroof is closed if the sunroof is open. The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition

148 switch is turned to the LOCK posi- also connected to the battery. Do not tion. Opening either front door will exceed a maximum power of 160 cancel this feature. Watts (13 Amps) shared between the For Vehicles Equipped With The lower panel outlet and the removable EVIC floor console outlet. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is Instrument Panel Outlets turned to the LOCK position. Open- ing either front door will cancel this CAUTION! feature. • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at ELECTRICAL POWER 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Super Console Outlets OUTLETS Amp) power rating is exceeded On vehicles equipped with the Super the fuse protecting the system will Two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets Console the power outlets are located need to be replaced. are located on the lower instrument under the retractable cover. To access panel, below the open storage bin. • Power outlets are designed for ac- the power outlets push down on the The driver-side power outlet is con- cessory plugs only. Do not insert cover and slide it toward the instru- trolled by the ignition switch and the any other object in the power out- ment panel. passenger-side power outlet is con- lets as this will damage the outlet nected directly to the battery. The and blow the fuse. Improper use driver-side power outlet will also op- of the power outlet can cause erate a conventional cigar lighter unit damage not covered by your New (for versions/markets, where pro- Vehicle Limited Warranty. vided with an optional Smoker's One outlet in the removable floor con- Package). sole (for versions/markets, where provided) shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is Super Console Outlets 149 Each of these outlets can support 160 WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) for each of these To avoid serious injury or death: • Accessories that draw higher outlets. • Only devices designed for use in power (i.e., coolers, vacuum this type of outlet should be in- cleaners, lights, etc.), will de- The power outlets include tethered serted into any 12 Volt outlet. grade the battery even more caps, labeled with a key or battery • Do not touch with wet hands. quickly. Only use these intermit- symbol indicating the power source. • Close the lid when not in use and tently and with greater caution. The power outlet, located on the lower while driving the vehicle. • After the use of high power draw instrument panel, is powered directly • If this outlet is mishandled, it may accessories, or long periods of the from the battery. Items plugged into cause an electric shock and fail- vehicle not being started (with this power outlet may discharge the ure. accessories still plugged in), the battery and/or prevent the engine vehicle must be driven a suffi- from starting. cient length of time to allow the CAUTION! alternator to recharge the vehi- • Many accessories that can be cle's battery. plugged in draw power from the • Power outlets are designed for ac- vehicle's battery, even when not cessory plugs only. Do not hang in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). any type of accessory or accessory Eventually, if plugged in long bracket from the plug. Improper enough, the vehicle's battery will use of the power outlet can cause Power Outlet Fuses discharge sufficiently to degrade damage. 1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power battery life and/or prevent the Outlet engine from starting. SMOKERS PACKAGE KIT 2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel (Continued) With the optional authorized dealer- 3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power installed Smokers Package Kit, a re- Outlet Instrument Panel or with movable ash receiver is inserted into Console one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel. To install

150 the ash receiver, align the receiver so The power inverter switch is located CUPHOLDERS the thumb grip on the lid is facing on the instrument panel below the rearward. Press the ash receiver into climate controls. There are cupholders located either of the cup wells to secure. Pull throughout the interior. All liners are To turn on the power outlet, press the upward on the ash receiver to remove removable for cleaning. Pull the flex- switch once. Press the switch a second for cleaning and/or storage. ible liner from the cupholder drawer time to turn the power outlet off. or tray starting at one edge for easy The left rear trim panel cupholder is This outlet can power cellular phones, removal. Refer to “Cleaning The In- designed to accommodate a second electronics and other low power de- strument Panel Cupholders” in ash receiver, if desired. vices requiring power up to 150 “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. POWER INVERTER (for Watts. Certain high-end video games will exceed this power limit, as will INSTRUMENT PANEL versions/markets, where most power tools. provided) CUPHOLDERS The power inverter is designed with The instrument panel cupholders are A 110 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet built-in overload protection. If the located in a pull-out drawer just (for versions/markets, where pro- power rating of 150 Watts is ex- above the lower storage bin. vided) converts DC current to AC cur- ceeded, the power inverter will auto- rent, and is located on the left rear matically shut down. Once the electri- trim panel immediately behind the cal device has been removed from the second row left passenger seat. outlet the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF Front Cupholders and ON. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on elec- Pull the drawer out firmly until it trical devices prior to using the in- stops, and place the container to be Power Inverter Outlet verter. held in either one of the cupholder

151 wells. The cupholders are designed to INTERIOR BOTTLE accommodate a wide variety of con- HOLDERS tainer types and sizes. Press down on the container to engage the cupholder There are four bottle holders located retention features. in the interior. One bottle holder is molded into each front interior door SUPER CONSOLE (for trim panels, and one bottle holder is versions/markets, where molded into each side sliding interior provided) Rear Cupholders door trim panel. Each holder accom- modates up to a 20 oz (0.6 L) plastic On models equipped with the Super PREMIUM CONSOLE bottle. Console, there are two cupholders lo- CUPHOLDERS (for cated in the center of the console. versions/markets, where WARNING! provided) If containers of hot liquid are On models equipped with premium placed in the bottle holder, they can center consoles, there are four cup- spill when the door is closed, burn- holders located on the top of the con- ing the occupants. Be careful when sole. closing the doors to avoid injury.

Super Console Cupholders For rear passengers two cupholders are located in the pull-out drawer, located in the back of the Super Con- sole. Pull the drawer out to the first position to use the cupholders. Premium Console Cupholders Interior Bottle Holder

152 Two outboard mesh pockets are on STORAGE Lower Glove Compartment intermediate seating. The mesh pock- To open the lower compartment pull ets are flexible enough to hold juice GLOVE COMPARTMENTS out on the release handle. boxes, toys, games or MP3 players, Upper and lower glove compartments etc. are located on the passenger side of SMOKER'S PACKAGE KIT the instrument panel. (for versions/markets, Upper Glove Compartment where provided) To open the upper compartment, With the optional authorized dealer- press in on the button, located on the installed Smoker's Package Kit, a re- left side of the upper door. The door movable ash receiver is inserted into will automatically open. Lower Compartment one of the two cupholders in the cen- DOOR TRIM PANEL ter front instrument panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so STORAGE the thumb grip on the lid is facing Front Door Storage rearward. Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull Both interior front door panels have upward on the ash receiver to remove multiple pockets for storage. for cleaning and/or storage. Upper Compartment The left rear trim panel cupholder is WARNING! designed to accommodate a second To close the compartment door, push If containers of hot liquid are ash receiver, if desired. downward on the door’s surface to placed in the bottle holder, they can latch the door closed. spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury.

153 DRIVER SEATBACK CAUTION! STORAGE (for The storage bin cover must lay flat versions/markets, where and be locked to avoid damage provided) from contact with the front seat The drivers seatback has a primary tracks, which have minimal clear- storage pocket on all models and an ance to the cover. optional secondary mesh pocket. Umbrella Holder WARNING! SECOND ROW FLOOR In a collision, serious injury could STORAGE BINS result if the seat storage bin covers The area below the floor covers, lo- are not properly latched. cated in front of the second row seats, • Do not drive the vehicle with the is available for storage. storage bin covers open. • Keep the storage bin covers Driver’s Seatback Storage closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion. 1 — Bag Holder 2 — Standard Pocket • Do not operate the storage bin 3 — Mesh Pocket covers while the vehicle is in motion. UMBRELLA HOLDER • Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. An umbrella holder has been conve- Storage Bin Cover Lock Release niently molded into the left front door Pull up on the storage bin latch to entry scuff molding. open the cover. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the "unlocked" position to allow greater access to the storage bin.

154 Seat Storage Bin Cover STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING! (Continued) WARNING Emergency Release Lever • Do not operate the storage bin As a security measure, the Seat Stor- Carefully follow these warnings to covers while the vehicle is in mo- age Bin Cover has an Emergency Re- help prevent personal injury or dam- tion. lease Lever built into the latching age to your vehicle: • Do not use a storage bin latch as a mechanism. tie down. WARNING! • Always close the storage bin cov- CAUTION! ers when your vehicle is unat- The storage bin cover must be flat tended. and locked to avoid damage from • Do not allow children to have ac- contact with the front seat tracks, cess to the second row seat stor- which have minimal clearance to age bins. Once in the storage bin, the cover. young children may not be able to Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release escape. If trapped in the storage NOTE: In the event of an indi- Lever bin, children can die from suffo- vidual being locked inside the NOTE: In the event of an indication or heat stroke. storage bin, the storage bin cover vidual being locked inside the • In a collision, serious injury could can be opened from inside of the storage bin, the storage bin cover result if the seat storage bin cov- bin by pushing on the glow-in-the- can be opened from inside of the ers are not properly latched. dark lever attached to the storage bin by pushing on the glow-in-the- • Do not drive the vehicle with the bin cover latching mechanism. dark lever attached to the storage storage bin covers open. Keep the bin cover latching mechanism. storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

155 CENTER AND REAR COAT HOOKS NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 1.2 x 2.4 m sheets of OVERHEAD CONSOLE Coat hooks are located along the STORAGE (for building material will fit on the headliner for the second and third row vehicle floor with the liftgate version/markets, where seating positions. The coat hook load closed. The front seats must be provided) limit is 4.5 kg . Exceeding the recom- moved slightly forward of the rear- mended load limit can cause the coat most position. The overhead storage system comes in hooks to break or disengage from the several options. vehicle. In addition to the rear cargo area, on some models there are open storage CARGO AREA STORAGE areas located in the rear trim panels. The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement “Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing.

Overhead Console Features 1 — DVD 1 5 — Storage 2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD 1 Trim Panel Storage Area 3 — Courtesy 7 — Courtesy Lights Lights CONSOLE FEATURES 4 — Storage 8 — Halo Light- There are three consoles available: ing Basic, Premium and Super. 1 (for versions/markets, where pro- Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit vided)

156 WARNING! • The basic console is removable 4. Reinstall the clip first and then from the vehicle for additional floor while pushing downward on the con- Do not operate this vehicle with a space by removing the cap and clip sole with slight pressure, reinstall the console compartment lid in the at the console base. cover plug. open position. Cellular phones, music players, and other handheld To Remove The Basic Floor 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it electronic devices should be stowed Console is firmly latched. while driving. Use of these devices 1. Remove the front anchor cup plug while driving can cause an accident and clip. WARNING! due to distraction, resulting in In an accident, serious injury could death or injury. 2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear result if the removable floor console BASIC CONSOLE load floor hook. is not properly installed. Always be sure the removable floor console is Basic Console features consist of the 3. Remove the console. fully latched. following: To Reinstall The Basic Floor • The basic console profile allows ve- Console PREMIUM CONSOLE (for hicle occupants to easily pass versions/markets, where 1. Position the console at a slight through the first row to the second. provided) angle (front slightly higher than the • Four cupholders accept up to extra rear). The three-compartment console with large size beverage cups or 0.6 L sliding storage bin, sliding upper tray 2. Slide the console rearward into the plastic bottles. Cupholders are with storage and large console storage floor bracket/hook. dishwasher safe for cleaning. bin offers multiple configurations. 3. Align the console until the front • The cupholders are removable to • Four cupholders with dishwasher anchor cup plug hole is centered on access a large storage bin. safe liners for cleaning. The cup- the winch hole. holders can accept plastic bottles, large cups or mugs with handles. • Top tray storage

157 • Upper storage bin can hold nine This provides easy access to the stor- regular or 18 thin CDs or other age area below and provides two of items the four cupholders for the second row passengers. • Large console center storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items • 12 Volt DC power outlet provides Console Position 1 continuous power inside the con- Position 2 shows the raised storage sole for cell phones or other tray revealing a large storage area be- electronics. low. • Rear occupant accessible Console Position 3 Position 4 shows the complete console • Multiple adjustments in its rearmost position. Again, lifting • Removable from vehicle for addi- second latch handle at the front of the tional floor space. console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides addi- The top and center console sections tional cupholders for rear passengers. slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup Console Position 2 holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for cleaning. The cup- Dual Storage Bins holders will also accommodate large Position 3 shows the top portion of the size cups and 0.6 L bottles. console in a rearward position. This is Position 1 shows the console closed accomplished by lifting the upper with four cupholders and a conve- most latch at the front of the console. nient storage tray. Console Position 4

158 To Remove The Premium Floor WARNING! The super console tambour doors are Console opened by pushing down on the finger In an accident, serious injury could tabs and sliding the door. The front 1. Pull up on the bottom release result if the removable floor console tambour door slides forward, the rear handle in the front of the console. is not properly installed. Always be tambour door slides rearward. 2. Lift the rear of the console up sev- sure the removable floor console is eral inches/centimeters. fully latched. 3. Pull rearward to disengage from SUPER CONSOLE (for floor and remove console. versions/markets, where To Reinstall The Premium Floor provided) Console: The Super Console contains multiple 1. Position the console at a slight storage areas, front lower pass angle (rear slightly higher than the through, top forward bin, top rear- Super Console front). ward bin and rear pull out drawer. 1 — Front Sliding Tambour Door 2 — Cupholder Light Ring 2. Slide the console forward into the The super console contains a pass 3 — Rear Sliding Tambour Door floor bracket. through storage area accessible for both the driver and front passenger. 3. Rotate the rear of the console NOTE: The front cupholder light down until it is resting on the floor ring and pass through lighting is bracket. controlled by a dimming switch located on the instrument panel, re- 4. Push down on the rear of the confer to “Lights” in “Understanding sole until it is seated in the rear floor The Features Of Your Vehicle” for bracket. further information. 5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. Front Lower Pass Through

159 Located in the back of the super con- Press in on the flashlight to release it. REAR WINDOW sole is a storage drawer and cuphold- FEATURES ers for the rear passengers. REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this Press And Release button to turn on the rear window Rear Drawer Storage defroster and the heated outside mir- To operate the flashlight, press the rors (for versions/markets, where CARGO AREA FEATURES switch once for high, twice for low, provided). An indicator in the button and a third time to return to off. RECHARGEABLE will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window de- FLASHLIGHT (for froster automatically turns off after versions/markets, where approximately 10 minutes. For an ad- provided) ditional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time. The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the right side of the cargo NOTE: area. The flashlight snaps out of the • You can turn off the heated mir- bezel when needed. The flashlight Three-Press Switch ror feature at anytime by press- features two bright LED light bulbs ing the rear window defroster and is powered by a lithium battery switch a second time. that recharges when snapped back into place and the vehicle is either running or the key is in the accessory position.

160 • To prevent excessive battery ROOF LUGGAGE RACK load must not exceed 68 kg, and drain, use the rear window de- (for versions/markets, should be uniformly distributed over froster only when the engine is the luggage rack crossbars. operating. where provided) NOTE: The crossbars on your vehicle are de- • Crossbars are error-proofed and CAUTION! livered stowed within the roof rack side rails. If adding cargo, deploy the cannot be deployed or stowed in Failure to follow these cautions can crossbars. Distribute cargo weight the incorrect positions. cause damage to the heating ele- evenly on the roof rack crossbars, to • To help control wind noise, stow ments: maximum of 68 kg. The roof rack • Use care when washing the inside the crossbars in the side rails does not increase the total load carry- when they are not in use. of the rear window. Do not use ing capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the abrasive window cleaners on the total load of cargo inside the vehicle DEPLOYING THE interior surface of the window. plus that on the external rack does not CROSSBARS Use a soft cloth and a mild wash- exceed the maximum vehicle load ca- To deploy the crossbars, completely ing solution, wiping parallel to pacity. the heating elements. Labels can loosen the thumb screws at both ends be peeled off after soaking with of the crossbar and lift the crossbar warm water. from its stowed position in the side • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- rail. Repeat with crossbar on the op- ments, or abrasive window clean- posite side. ers on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Crossbar Stowed In Side Rail The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The Loosening Crossbars 161 CAUTION! Then, position the crossbars across Once the crossbars are set into posi- the roof. tion, tighten the thumb screws com- Use care when removing and han- pletely. dling the crossbars to prevent dam- NOTE: The crossbars are identi- age to the vehicle. cal and can be placed in any two of the three deploy positions. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down.

Tightening Crossbar Stowing the Crossbars Deploy Positions – Choose Two Of Reverse the procedure to stow the Three crossbars, again, taking care to keep Make sure the directional arrows on hand clear of pivoting joint. Crossbars the crossbars align with the direc- are identical and can be stowed in Stowed Position tional arrows on the side rails. Set the either rail nest. Once the crossbars are crossbars into the deployed positions. stowed, tighten the thumb screws completely. NOTE: Load should always be secured to crossbars first, with rail tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplemen- tary tie down points only. Do not Deployed Position use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Crossbar To Side Rail Installation 162 CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! • The load should be secured and Cargo must be securely tied before placed on top of the crossbars, not driving your vehicle. Improperly directly on the roof. If it is neces- secured loads can fly off the vehicle, sary to place the load on the roof, particularly at high speeds, result- place a blanket or other protec- ing in personal injury or property tive layer between the load and damage. Follow the roof rack cau- Rail Tie Loops the roof surface. tions when carrying cargo on your • Long loads which extend over the roof rack. CAUTION! windshield, such as wood panels • Check deployed crossbars fre- or surfboards, or loads with large HEADLIGHT WASHER quently and retighten thumb frontal area should be secured to (for versions/markets, screws as necessary. both the front and rear of the where provided) • To avoid damage to the roof rack vehicle. and vehicle, do not exceed the • Travel at reduced speeds and turn The multifunction lever operates the maximum roof rack load capacity corners carefully when carrying headlight washers when the ignition of 68 kg. Always distribute heavy large or heavy loads on the roof switch is in the ON position and the loads as evenly as possible and rack. Wind forces, due to natural headlights are turned on. The multi- secure the load appropriately. causes or nearby truck traffic, function lever is located on the left • To prevent damage to the roof of can add sudden upward lift to a side of the steering column. your vehicle, DO NOT carry any load. This is especially true on To use the headlight washers, push loads on the roof rack without the large flat loads and may result in the multifunction lever inward (to- crossbars deployed. damage to the cargo or your ve- ward the steering column) to the sec- hicle. ond detent and release it. The head- (Continued) light washers will spray a timed high- pressure spray of washer fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the

163 windshield washers will spray the Gently pull up on the tab to raise the windshield and the windshield wipers sun screen. Continue pulling the sun will cycle. screen until the tab is near the top of the window. NOTE: After turning the ignition switch and headlights ON, the Once the screen is completely to the headlight washers will operate on top of the window, extend the top bar the first spray of the windshield of the sun screen over the two hooks washer and then every eleventh attached to the top of the window. spray after that. SUN SCREENS (for versions/markets, where provided) Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, Sun Screen Extended and the tops of the windows are To lower the sun screen, gently lift the equipped with hooks that the sun tab upward to disengage the hooks, screens attach to when pulled out. and feed the screen back into the base sill.

Sun Screen Retracted

164 4

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ...... 169 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE ...... 170 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ...... 171 • INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....172 • ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) (for versions/markets, where provided) . .178 • ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) DISPLAYS...... 179 • EVIC WHITE TELLTALE LIGHTS ...... 181 • EVIC AMBER TELLTALE LIGHTS ...... 182 • EVIC RED TELLTALE LIGHTS...... 182 • OIL CHANGE DUE ...... 184 • FUEL ECONOMY ...... 184 • VEHICLE SPEED ...... 185 • TRIP INFO ...... 185 • TIRE BAR...... 186 • VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER INFORMATION FEATURES) ...... 186 • MESSAGES...... 186 • UNITS ...... 186

165 • KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ DISPLAY (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 186 • COMPASS / TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 186 • CUSTOMER-PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES (SYSTEM SETUP) ...... 189 • SOUND SYSTEMS ...... 193 • NAVIGATION SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 193 • iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL (for versions/markets, where equipped) ...... 193 • CONNECTING THE iPod® OR EXTERNAL USB DEVICE ...... 194 • USING THIS FEATURE...... 194 • CONTROLLING THE iPod® OR EXTERNAL USB DEVICE USING RADIO BUTTONS ...... 194 • PLAY MODE ...... 194 • LIST OR BROWSE MODE ...... 195 • BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO (BTSA). . . .197 • Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES™) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 197 • GETTING STARTED ...... 197 • Blu-ray® PLAYER ...... 197 • PLAY VIDEO GAMES ...... 198 • LISTEN TO AN AUDIO SOURCE ON CHANNEL 2 WHILE A VIDEO IS PLAYING ON CHANNEL 1 . .198 • DUAL VIDEO SCREEN ...... 198

166 • PLAY A DVD USING THE TOUCH-SCREEN RADIO ...... 198 • PLAY A DVD USING THE VES™ PLAYER (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 200 • PLAY A Blu-ray DISC USING THE BLU-RAY PLAYER (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 201 • LISTEN TO AN AUDIO SOURCE WHILE A VIDEO IS PLAYING ...... 202 • THIRD ROW SWIVEL SCREEN (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 202 • IMPORTANT NOTES FOR DUAL VIDEO SCREEN SYSTEM ...... 202 • VES™ REMOTE CONTROL (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 202 • Blu-ray PLAYER REMOTE CONTROL (for versions/markets, where provided)...... 204 • REMOTE CONTROL STORAGE ...... 205 • LOCKING THE REMOTE CONTROL...... 205 • REPLACING THE REMOTE CONTROL BATTERIES ...... 206 • HEADPHONES OPERATION...... 206 • Blu-ray HEADPHONES OPERATION ...... 206 • CONTROLS ...... 207 • REPLACING THE HEADPHONE BATTERIES. .207 • UNWIRED® STEREO HEADPHONE LIFETIME LIMITED WARRANTY ...... 207 • SYSTEM INFORMATION ...... 208 • SHARED MODES ...... 208

167 • INFORMATION MODE DISPLAY ...... 209 • NUMERIC KEYPAD MENU ...... 209 • DISC MENU ...... 209 • DISPLAY SETTINGS ...... 209 • LISTENING TO AUDIO WITH THE SCREEN CLOSED ...... 210 • DISC FORMATS ...... 210 • DISPLAY ...... 213 • PRODUCT AGREEMENT ...... 215 • STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...... 217 • RADIO OPERATION ...... 218 • CDPLAYER...... 218 • CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...... 218 • RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . . .218 • CLIMATE CONTROLS ...... 219 • AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC)...... 219 • SUMMER OPERATION ...... 224 • WINTER OPERATION ...... 225 • VACATION/STORAGE ...... 225 • WINDOW FOGGING ...... 225 • OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE ...... 225 • A/CAIRFILTER ...... 225 • OPERATING TIPS ...... 225

168 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Air Vents 5 — Analog Clock 9 — DVD (for versions/ 13 — Ignition Switch/Button markets, where provided) 2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Upper Glove Compart- 10 — Storage Bin 14 — Hood Release ment 3 — Shift Lever 7 — Lower Glove Compart- 11 — Cup Holders 15 — Dimmer Switch ment 4 — Radio 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Switch Bank 16 — Headlight Switch

169 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

170 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

171 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER the signal off. If either indicator LoW tirE flashes at a rapid rate, check for a DESCRIPTIONS When the appropriate condition ex- defective outside light bulb. 1. Tachometer ists, the odometer display will toggle 5. High Beam Indicator between LoW and tirE for three The red segments indicate the maxi- cycles. mum permissible engine revolutions This indicator shows that the gASCAP per minute (RPM x 1000) for each high beam headlights are on. gear range. Before reaching the red Push the multifunction lever forward If the vehicle diagnostic system deter- area, ease up on the accelerator. to switch the headlights to high beam, mines that the fuel filler cap is loose, and pull toward yourself (normal po- improperly installed, or damaged, a 2. Front Fog Light Indicator (for sition) to return to low beam. “gASCAP” message will display in the versions/markets, where provided) 6. Odometer Display / Electronic odometer display area. Tighten the This indicator will illumi- Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fuel filler cap properly and press the nate when the front fog Display STEP button on the steering wheel to lights are on. turn off the message. If the problem Odometer Display / Trip Odometer continues, the message will appear 3. Park/Headlight ON Indicator Display (for versions/markets, the next time the vehicle is started. This indicator will illumi- where provided) The odometer dis- noFUSE nate when the park lights or play shows the total distance the ve- headlights are turned on. hicle has been driven. If the vehicle diagnostic system deter- NOTE: Some warnings will be mines that the Ignition Off Draw 4. Turn Signal Indicators displayed in the Electronic Vehicle (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or The arrow will flash with Information Center Display Area damaged, a “noFUSE” message will the exterior turn signal located in the instrument cluster. display in the odometer display area. when the turn signal lever is Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Infor- For further information on fuses and operated. mation Center (EVIC) Display” fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in (for versions/markets, where pro- “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. If the vehicle is driven 1.6 km with vided) for further information. either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn 172 CHAngE OIL 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service Your vehicle is equipped with an en- OFF/LOCK position. is required. However, the conven- gine oil change indicator system. The NOTE: If the indicator message tional brake system will continue to CHAngE OIL message will flash in illuminates when you start the en- operate normally if the BRAKE warn- the instrument cluster odometer for gine, the oil change indicator sys- ing light is not on. approximately 12 seconds, after a tem did not reset. If necessary, re- single chime has sounded, to indicate peat these steps. If the ABS light is on, the brake sys- the next scheduled oil change inter- tem should be serviced as soon as Electronic Vehicle Information val. The engine oil change indicator possible to restore the benefits of Center (EVIC) Display (for versions/ system is duty cycle-based, which Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light markets, where provided) means the engine oil change interval does not turn on when the ignition may fluctuate dependent upon your The Electronic Vehicle Information switch is turned to the ON/RUN posi- personal driving style. Center (EVIC) features a driver- tion, have the light inspected by an interactive display that is located in authorized dealer. Unless reset, this message will con- the instrument cluster. For further in- tinue to display each time you turn the 8. Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- formation, refer to “Electronic Ve- ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- tale Light (for versions/markets, hicle Information Center (EVIC)”. tion. To turn off the message tempo- where provided) rarily, press and release the STEP 7. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light Each tire, including the button on the steering wheel. To reset This light monitors the spare (if provided), should the oil change indicator system (after Anti-Lock Brake System be checked monthly when performing the scheduled mainte- (ABS). The light will turn cold and inflated to the in- nance), perform the following steps. on when the ignition switch flation pressure recommended by the 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/ is turned to the ON/RUN position and vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle RUN position (do not start the en- may stay on for as long as four sec- placard or tire inflation pressure la- gine). onds. bel. 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, If the ABS light remains on or turns on As an added safety feature, your ve- slowly, three times within 10 seconds. while driving, it indicates that the hicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

173 that illuminates a low tire pressure system detects a malfunction, the tell- CAUTION! telltale when one or more of your tires tale will flash for approximately one is significantly under-inflated. Ac- minute and then remain continuously The TPMS has been optimized for cordingly, when the low tire pressure illuminated. This sequence will con- the original equipment tires and telltale illuminates, you should stop tinue upon subsequent vehicle start- wheels. TPMS pressures and warn- and check your tires as soon as pos- ups as long as the malfunction exists. ing have been established for the sible, and inflate them to the proper When the malfunction indicator is il- tire size equipped on your vehicle. pressure. Driving on a significantly luminated, the system may not be Undesirable system operation or under-inflated tire causes the tire to able to detect or signal low tire pres- sensor damage may result when us- overheat and can lead to tire failure. sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions ing replacement equipment that is Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi- may occur for a variety of reasons, not of the same size, type, and/or ciency and tire tread life, and may including the installation of replace- style. Aftermarket wheels can cause affect the vehicle’s handling and stop- ment or alternate tires or wheels on sensor damage. Do not use tire seal- ping ability. the vehicle that prevent the TPMS ant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a Please note that the TPMS is not a from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale TPMS, as damage to the sensors substitute for proper tire mainte- may result. nance, and it is the driver’s responsi- after replacing one or more tires or bility to maintain correct tire pres- wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that 9. Malfunction Indicator Light sure, even if under-inflation has not the replacement or alternate tires and (MIL) reached the level to trigger illumina- wheels allow the TPMS to continue to The Malfunction Indicator tion of the TPMS low tire pressure function properly. Light (MIL) is part of an on- telltale. board diagnostic system, Your vehicle has also been equipped called OBD, that monitors engine and with a TPMS malfunction indicator to automatic transmission control sys- indicate when the system is not oper- tems. The light will illuminate when ating properly. The TPMS malfunc- the key is in the ON/RUN position, tion indicator is combined with the before engine start. If the bulb does low tire pressure telltale. When the

174 not come on when turning the key WARNING! this light remains on after several ig- from OFF to ON/RUN, have the con- nition cycles, and the vehicle has been dition checked promptly. A malfunctioning catalytic con- driven several kilometers at speeds verter, as referenced above, can Certain conditions, such as a loose or greater than 48 km/h, see your autho- reach higher temperatures than in missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, rized dealer as soon as possible to normal operating conditions. This etc., may illuminate the MIL after en- have the problem diagnosed and cor- can cause a fire if you drive slowly gine start. The vehicle should be ser- rected. or park over flammable substances viced if the light stays on through such as dry plants, wood, card- NOTE: several of your typical driving cycles. board, etc. This could result in In most situations, the vehicle will • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” death or serious injury to the driver, drive normally and will not require and the “ESC Activation/ occupants or others. towing. Malfunction Indicator Light” 10. Electronic Stability Control come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to CAUTION! (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indi- cator Light (for versions/markets, ON/RUN. Prolonged driving with the Mal- where provided) • Each time the ignition is turned function Indicator Light (MIL) on to ON/RUN, the ESC system will The “ESC Activation/ could cause damage to the engine be ON, even if it was turned off Malfunction Indicator control system. It also could affect previously. fuel economy and driveability. If Light” in the instrument the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic cluster will come on when • The ESC system will make buzz- converter damage and power loss the ignition switch is turned to the ing or clicking sounds when it is will soon occur. Immediate service ON/RUN position. It should go out active. This is normal; the is required. with the engine running. If the “ESC sounds will stop when ESC be- Activation/Malfunction Indicator comes inactive following the Light” comes on continuously with maneuver that caused the ESC the engine running, a malfunction has activation. been detected in the ESC system. If

175 11. Electronic Stability Control while driving, have the system in- 17. Vehicle Security Light (for (ESC) OFF Indicator Light (for spected at an authorized dealer as versions/markets, where provided) versions/markets, where provided) soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant This light will flash at a fast Restraints” in “Things To Know Be- This light indicates the rate for approximately 15 fore Starting Your Vehicle” for further Electronic Stability Control seconds, when the vehicle information. (ESC) is off. security alarm is arming, 16. Shift Lever Indicator and then will flash slowly until the 12. Speedometer The Shift Lever Indicator is self- vehicle is disarmed. Indicates vehicle speed. contained within the instrument clus- 18. Brake Warning Light ter. It displays the gear position of the 13. Fuel Door Reminder This light monitors various automatic transmission. The arrow in this symbol is brake functions, including a reminder that the Fuel NOTE: brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on Filler Door is located on the • You must apply the brakes be- it may indicate that the parking brake left side of the vehicle. fore shifting from PARK. is applied, that the brake fluid level is 14. Fuel Gauge • The highest available transmis- low, or that there is a problem with the The pointer shows the level of fuel in sion gear is displayed in the anti-lock brake system reservoir. the fuel tank when the ignition switch lower right corner of the Elec- If the light remains on when the park- is in the ON/RUN position. tronic Vehicle Information Cen- ing brake has been disengaged, and ter (EVIC) whenever the Elec- 15. Air Bag Warning Light the fluid level is at the full mark on the tronic Range Select (ERS) master cylinder reservoir, it indicates This light will turn on for feature is active. Use the +/- se- a possible brake hydraulic system four to eight seconds as a lector on the shift lever to acti- malfunction or that a problem with bulb check when the igni- vate ERS (for versions/markets, the Brake Booster has been detected tion switch is first turned to where provided). Refer to “Auto- by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ON/RUN. If the light is either not on matic Transmission” in “Start- / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) during starting, stays on, or turns on ing And Operating” for further system. In this case, the light will re- information. main on until the condition has been 176 corrected. If the problem is related to WARNING! The light also will turn on when the the brake booster, the ABS pump will parking brake is applied with the ig- run when applying the brake and a Driving a vehicle with the red brake nition switch in the ON/RUN posi- brake pedal pulsation may be felt dur- light on is dangerous. Part of the tion. ing each stop. brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. NOTE: This light shows only The dual brake system provides a re- You could have a collision. Have the that the parking brake is applied. serve braking capacity in the event of vehicle checked immediately. It does not show the degree of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic brake application. system. A leak in either half of the Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock 19. Seat Belt Reminder Light dual brake system is indicated by the Brake System (ABS), are also Brake Warning Light, which will turn equipped with Electronic Brake Force When the ignition switch is on when the brake fluid level in the Distribution (EBD). In the event of an first turned to ON/RUN, this master cylinder has dropped below a EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light light will turn on for four to specified level. will turn on along with the ABS Light. eight seconds as a bulb check. During The light will remain on until the Immediate repair to the ABS system is the bulb check, if the driver or front cause is corrected. required. passenger's seat belt is unbuckled, a Operation of the Brake Warning Light chime will sound. After the bulb NOTE: The light may flash mo- can be checked by turning the ignition check or when driving, if the driver's mentarily during sharp cornering switch from the OFF position to the seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat maneuvers, which change fluid ON/RUN position. The light should Belt Reminder Light will illuminate level conditions. The vehicle illuminate for approximately two sec- and the chime will sound. Refer to should have service performed, onds. The light should then turn off “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To and the brake fluid level checked. unless the parking brake is applied or Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” If brake failure is indicated, immedi- a brake fault is detected. If the light for further information. ate repair is necessary. does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

177 20. Temperature Gauge WARNING! The temperature gauge shows engine A hot engine cooling system is dan- coolant temperature. Any reading gerous. You or others could be within the normal range indicates badly burned by steam or boiling that the engine cooling system is op- coolant. You may want to call an erating satisfactorily. authorized dealer for service if your The gauge pointer will likely indicate vehicle overheats. If you decide to a higher temperature when driving in look under the hood yourself, see Electronic Vehicle Information hot weather, up mountain grades, or “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Fol- Center (EVIC) low the warnings under the Cooling when towing a trailer. It should not be This system conveniently allows the System Pressure Cap paragraph. allowed to exceed the upper limits of driver to select a variety of useful in- the normal operating range. 21. Rear Fog Light Indicator formation by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel. The CAUTION! This indicator will illuminate EVIC consists of the following: when the rear fog lights are Driving with a hot engine cooling on. (Refer to “Lights” in “Un- • Radio Information system could damage your vehicle. derstanding The Features Of Your Ve- • Fuel Economy If the temperature gauge reads “H” hicle” for further information). pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle • Vehicle Speed the vehicle with the air conditioner ELECTRONIC VEHICLE • Trip Info turned off until the pointer drops INFORMATION CENTER back into the normal range. If the • Tire BAR pointer remains on the “H” and you (EVIC) (for versions/ • Vehicle Info hear continuous chimes, turn the markets, where provided) engine off immediately and call an The Electronic Vehicle Information • Messages authorized dealer for service. Center (EVIC) features a driver- • Units interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. • System Setup (Personal Settings)

178 • Turn Menu Off SELECT Button 3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odometer line. The system allows the driver to select The SELECT button allows information by pressing the following access to information in The main display area will normally buttons mounted on the steering EVIC submenus, selects display the main menu or the screens wheel: some feature settings, and of a selected feature of the main resets some EVIC features. The EVIC menu. The main display area also dis- prompts the driver when the SELECT plays "pop up" messages that consist button can be used by displaying the of approximately 60 possible warning right arrow graphic. or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several catego- BACK Button ries: Press the BACK button to • Five Second Stored Messages scroll back to a previous When the appropriate conditions oc- EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons menu or sub-menu. cur, this type of message takes control UP Button of the main display area for five sec- ELECTRONIC VEHICLE onds and then returns to the previous Press and release the UP INFORMATION CENTER screen. Most of the messages of this button to scroll upward (EVIC) DISPLAYS type are then stored (as long as the through the main menus condition that activated it remains ac- (Fuel Economy, Vehicle The EVIC display consists of three sections: tive) and can be reviewed from the Info, Tire BAR, Cruise, Messages, "Messages" main menu item. As long Units, System Setup) and sub-menus. 1. The top line where compass direc- as there is a stored message, an "i" DOWN Button tion, odometer line and outside tem- will be displayed in the EVIC's perature are displayed. compass/outside temp line. Examples Press and release the DOWN of this message type are "Right Front button to scroll downward 2. The main display area where the Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low through the main menus and menus and pop up messages are dis- Tire Pressure". sub-menus. played.

179 • Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions ex- • Turn Signal On This message type is displayed indefi- ist, the EVIC displays the following • RKE Battery Low nitely or until the condition that acti- messages: vated the message is cleared. Ex- • Service Keyless System • Key in ignition amples of this message type are "Turn • LOW WASHER FLUID Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) • Ignition or Accessory On and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the • Oil Change Required • Wrong Key vehicle). • Check Gascap • Unstored Messages Until RUN • Damaged Key • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out This message type is displayed until • Key not programmed the ignition is in the RUN state. Ex- • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out ample of this message type is "Press • Vehicle Not in Park • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out Brake Pedal and Push Button to • Key Left Vehicle Start". • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out • Key Not Detected • Five Second Unstored Messages • Park Assist Disabled When the appropriate conditions oc- • Press Brake Pedal and Push Button cur, this type of message takes control to Start • Service Park Assist System of the main display area for five sec- • Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound • Personal Settings Not Available — onds and then returns to the previous when vehicle starts moving) Vehicle Not in Park screen. Examples of this message type are "Memory System Unavailable - • Low Tire Pressure • Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed when the ignition Not in Park" and "Automatic High • Service TPM System (refer to “Tire is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Beams On". Pressure Monitoring System” in Spot System has been turned off. The Reconfigurable Telltales section “Starting And Operating”) • Blind Spot System Not Available — is divided into the white telltales area • Premium system Tire Pressure dis- This message is displayed to indi- on the right, amber telltales in the play screen With Low Tire(s) “In- cate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) middle, and red telltales on the left. flate Tire to XX” system is temporarily unavailable

180 due to sensor blockage, electronic “Exhaust System Regeneration Re- • Exhaust Filter Full — Power Re- interference, or other "temporary" quired Now” message will be dis- duced See Dealer. The PCM derates conditions. When this message is played on the EVIC. By driving your the engine in order to limit the like- displayed both outside rear view vehicle at highway speeds for as little lihood of permanent damage to the icons will be illuminated. If elec- as 30 minutes, you can remedy the after-treatment system. If this con- tronic interference is present, the condition in the particulate filter dition is not corrected and a dealer BSM system will illuminate the icon system by allowing the trapped PM service is not performed, extensive only on the side of interference as to be removed to restore the system exhaust after-treatment damage long as interference is present. to normal operating condition. can occur. In order to correct this condition it will be necessary to • Service Blind Spot System — This • Exhaust Service Require — See Dealer Now. The engine will be de- have your vehicle serviced by your message is displayed to indicate the rated to prevent permanent dam- local authorized dealer. See your Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is age to the after-treatment system. If authorized dealer, as damage to the permanently unavailable. The this condition occurs, it is necessary exhaust system could occur soon driver will receive an EVIC mes- to have your vehicle serviced by with continued operation. sage and the BSM display warning your local authorized dealer. in both mirrors will be permanently • Exhaust Filter % Full illuminated. If this message is pres- • Exhaust System — Regeneration ent see an authorized dealer. Completed. Indicates that the Die- EVIC WHITE TELLTALE sel Particulate Filter (DPF) self- LIGHTS • Obstacle Detected cleaning is completed. If this mes- This area will show reconfigurable • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled sage is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of white caution telltales. These telltales • Exhaust System — Regeneration this condition. include: Required Now. Under conditions of • Electronic Range Select (ERS) • Exhaust System — Regeneration In exclusive short duration and low Status speed driving and low speed driving Process. Indicates that the Diesel cycles, the engine and exhaust after- Particulate Filter (DPF) is self- The shift lever status “6,5,4,3,2,1” treatment system may never reach cleaning. Maintain your current are displayed indicating the shift lever the conditions required to remove driving condition until regenera- position. Telltales “6,5,4,3,2,1” indi- the trapped PM. If this occurs the tion is completed. cate the Electronic Range Select

181 (ERS) feature has been engaged and • Low Fuel Light • Wait To Start Light — Diesel the gear selected is displayed. For fur- Engines Only When the fuel level reaches ther information on ERS (for approximately 11.0 L this The Wait To Start Light will versions/markets, where provided), light will turn on, and remain on until turn on when the ignition key refer to “Starting And Operating” fuel is added. is first turned to the ON/RUN posi- • Electronic Speed Control Ready • Loose Gascap Indicator (for tion. Wait until the Wait To Start Light turns OFF to start the engine. This light will turn on when versions/markets, where provided) (Refer to “Starting Procedures” in the electronic speed control If the vehicle diagnostic sys- “Starting And Operating” for further is ready. For further infor- tem determines that the fuel information). mation, refer to “Electronic filler cap is loose, improp- Speed Control” in “Understanding • Water In Fuel Indicator Light — erly installed, or damaged, The Features Of Your Vehicle.” Diesel Engines Only a loose gascap indicator will display in • Electronic Speed Control SET the telltale display area. Tighten the Indicates there is water de- fuel filler cap properly and press the tected in the fuel filter. If This light will turn on when SELECT button to turn off the mes- this light remains on, DO the electronic speed control sage. If the problem continues, the NOT start the vehicle be- is SET. For further infor- message will appear the next time the fore you drain the water from the fuel mation, refer to “Electronic vehicle is started. filter to prevent engine damage. Refer Speed Control” in “Understanding to “Maintenance Procedures/ Drain- The Features Of Your Vehicle.” A loose, improperly installed, or dam- ing Fuel/Water Separator Filter” in aged fuel filler cap may also turn on EVIC AMBER TELLTALE “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for water the Malfunction Indicator Light drain procedure. LIGHTS (MIL). This area will show reconfigurable • Windshield Washer Fluid Low EVIC RED TELLTALE amber caution telltales. These tell- Indicator LIGHTS tales include: This light will turn on to This area will show reconfigurable red indicate the windshield telltales. These telltales include: washer fluid is low. 182 • Door Ajar non-essential electrical devices or in- If the light remains lit with the engine crease engine speed (if at idle). If the running, your vehicle will usually be This light will turn on to charging system light remains on, it drivable. However, see an authorized indicate that one or more means that the vehicle is experiencing dealer for service as soon as possible. doors may be ajar. a problem with the charging system. If the light is flashing when the engine • Oil Pressure Warning Light Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. is running, immediate service is re- See an authorized dealer. quired. You may experience reduced This light indicates low engine performance, an elevated/rough idle If jump starting is required, refer to oil pressure. The light should or engine stall and your vehicle may “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What turn on momentarily when the engine require towing. is started. If the light turns on while To Do In Emergencies”. • Engine Temperature Warning driving, stop the vehicle and shut off • Electronic Throttle Control Light the engine as soon as possible. A (ETC) Light chime will sound when this light turns This light warns of an over- This light informs you of a on. heated engine condition. As problem with the Electronic temperatures rise and the gauge ap- Do not operate the vehicle until the Throttle Control (ETC) sys- proaches H, this indicator will illumi- cause is corrected. This light does not tem. The light will come on nate and a single chime will sound show how much oil is in the engine. when the ignition is first turned ON after reaching a set threshold. Further The engine oil level must be checked and remain on briefly as a bulb check. overheating will cause the tempera- under the hood. If the light does not come on during ture gauge to pass H, a continuous starting, have the system checked by • Charging System Light chime will occur until the engine is an authorized dealer. This light shows the status of allowed to cool. If a problem is detected, the light will the electrical charging system. If the light turns on while driving, come on while the engine is running. The light should come on when the safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If Cycle the ignition key when the ve- ignition switch is first turned ON and the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, hicle has completely stopped and the remain on briefly as a bulb check. If shift the transmission into NEUTRAL the light stays on or comes on while shift lever is placed in the PARK posi- driving, turn off some of the vehicle's tion. The light should turn off.

183 and idle the vehicle. If the tempera- WARNING! To reset the oil change indicator sys- ture reading does not return to nor- tem please refer to a Lancia Dealer- mal, turn the engine off immediately If you continue operating the ve- ship. and call for service. Refer to “If Your hicle when the Transmission Tem- Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In perature Warning Light is illumi- FUEL ECONOMY Emergencies” for more information. nated you could cause the fluid to Press and release the UP or DOWN boil over, come in contact with hot button until “Fuel Economy” displays • Transmission Temperature engine or exhaust components and Warning Light highlighted in the EVIC and press the cause a fire. SELECT button. The following Fuel This light indicates that the Economy functions display in the transmission fluid tempera- EVIC: ture is running hot. This OIL CHANGE DUE • Average Fuel Economy (AVG) may occur with severe us- Your vehicle is equipped with an en- age, such as trailer towing. If this light gine oil change indicator system. The • Distance To Empty (DTE) turns on, safely pull over and stop the “Oil Change Due” message will flash • Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) vehicle. Then, shift the transmission in the EVIC display for approxi- into NEUTRAL and run the engine at mately 10 seconds after a single chime idle or faster until the light turns off. has sounded to indicate the next Average Fuel Economy scheduled oil change interval. The en- Shows the average fuel economy since gine oil change indicator system is CAUTION! the last reset. The Average Fuel duty cycle based, which means the Economy can be reset by following Continuous driving with the Trans- engine oil change interval may fluctu- the prompt in the EVIC to use the mission Temperature Warning ate dependent upon your personal SELECT button. When the fuel Light illuminated will eventually driving style. cause severe transmission damage economy is reset, the display will read or transmission failure. Unless reset, this message will con- “zero” for two seconds. Then, the his- tinue to display each time you cycle tory information will be erased, and the ignition to the ON/RUN position. the averaging will continue from the To turn off the message temporarily, last fuel average reading before the press and release the BACK button. reset.

184 fuel. Adding a significant amount of TRIP INFO fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL” message and a new Press and release the UP or DOWN but- DTE value will display. ton until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT but- Instantaneous Fuel Economy (IFE) ton. Press and release the UP/DOWN This display shows the instantaneous buttons to highlight one of the following functions if you want to reset it: Average Fuel Economy Display Liters Per 100km (L/100km) or Miles Per Gallon (MPG) in bar Distance To Empty (DTE) Trip A graph form while driving. This will Shows the estimated distance that can monitor the gas mileage in real-time Shows the total distance traveled for be traveled with the fuel remaining in as you drive and can be used to Trip A since the last reset. the tank. This estimated distance is modify driving habits in order to in- Trip B determined by a weighted average of crease fuel economy. the instantaneous and average fuel Shows the total distance traveled for economy, according to the current VEHICLE SPEED Trip B since the last reset. fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset Press and release the UP or DOWN Elapsed Time through the SELECT button. button until “Vehicle Speed” displays Shows the total elapsed time of travel NOTE: Significant changes in highlighted in the EVIC and press the since the last reset when the ignition driving style or vehicle loading SELECT button. Press the SELECT switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed will greatly affect the actual driv- button to display the current speed time will increment when the ignition able distance of the vehicle, rein km/h or mph. Pressing the SE- switch is in the ON or START position. gardless of the DTE displayed LECT button a second time will To Reset A Trip Function value. toggle the unit of measure between km/h or mph. Reset will only occur while a reset- When the DTE value is less than table function is selected (high- 48 km estimated driving distance, the NOTE: Changing the unit of mea- lighted). Press and hold the SELECT DTE display will change to a “LOW sure in the Vehicle Speed menu button to clear the resettable function FUEL” message. This display will will not change the unit of measure being displayed. continue until the vehicle runs out of in the EVIC. 185 TIRE BAR MESSAGES KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ Press and release the UP or DOWN Press and release the UP or DOWN DISPLAY (for button until ”Tire BAR” displays button until “Messages: XX” displays versions/markets, where highlighted in the EVIC. Press the highlighted in the EVIC. If there is provided) SELECT button to view a graphic of more than one message, pressing the When the ENGINE START/STOP the vehicle with a tire pressure value SELECT button will display a stored button is pressed to change ignition at each corner of the graphic. warning message. Press and release switch position, current ignition sta- the UP and DOWN buttons if there is tus will be displayed in the lower right VEHICLE INFO more than one message to step corner of the EVIC display to the right (CUSTOMER through the remaining stored mes- of the odometer value. INFORMATION FEATURES) sages. If there are no message, press- Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in Press and release the UP or DOWN ing the SELECT button will do noth- “Starting And Operating” for more button until “Vehicle Info” displays in ing. information. the EVIC and press the SELECT but- UNITS ton. Press the UP and DOWN button COMPASS / to scroll through the selections below: Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units” displays high- TEMPERATURE DISPLAY • Coolant Temp lighted in the EVIC and press the (for versions/markets, Displays the actual coolant tempera- SELECT button. The EVIC, odom- where provided) eter, and navigation system (for ture. The compass readings indicate the di- versions/markets, where provided) • Oil Pressure rection the vehicle is facing. The can be changed between English and EVIC will display one of eight com- Metric units of measure. To make Displays the actual oil pressure. pass readings and the outside tem- your selection, scroll up or down until • Engine Hours perature. the preferred setting is highlighted, Displays the number of hours of en- then press and release the SELECT NOTE: The system will display gine operation. button until a check-mark appears the last known outside tempera- next to the setting, showing that the ture when starting the vehicle and setting has been selected.

186 may need to be driven several min- Manual Compass Calibration (for Compass Variance utes before the updated tempera- versions/markets, where Compass Variance is the difference ture is displayed. Engine tempera- provided) between Magnetic North and Geo- ture can also affect the displayed If the compass appears erratic and the graphic North. To compensate for the temperature; therefore, tempera- CAL indicator does not appear in the differences the variance should be set ture readings are not updated EVIC display, you must put the com- for the zone where the vehicle is when the vehicle is not moving. pass into the Calibration Mode manu- driven, per the zone map. Once prop- Automatic Compass Calibration ally, as follows: erly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, This compass is self-calibrating, 1. Turn ON the ignition switch. and provide the most accurate com- which eliminates the need to manu- 2. Press the UP or DOWN button un- pass heading. For the most accurate ally reset the compass. When the ve- til the Setup (Customer- compass performance, the compass hicle is new, the compass may appear Programmable Features) menu is must be set using the following steps. erratic and the EVIC will display CAL reached, then press the SELECT but- until the compass is calibrated. You NOTE: Keep magnetic materials ton. may also calibrate the compass by away from the top of the instru- completing one or more 360–degree 3. Press the DOWN button until ment panel, such as iPod's, Mobile turns (in an area free from large metal “Calibrate Compass” is displayed in Phones, Laptops and Radar Detec- or metallic objects) until the CAL in- the EVIC. tors. This is where the compass dicator displayed in the EVIC turns module is located, and it can cause 4. Press and release the SELECT off. The compass will now function interference with the compass sen- button to start the calibration. The normally. sor, and it may give false readings. “CAL” indicator will be displayed in NOTE: A good calibration re- the EVIC. quires a level surface and an envi- 5. Complete one or more 360–degree ronment free from large metallic turns (in an area free from large metal objects such as buildings, bridges, or metallic objects) until the “CAL” underground cables, railroad indicator turns off. The compass will tracks, etc. now function normally.

187 Compass Variance Map 1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 3. Press the DOWN button until the 4. Press and release the SELECT “Compass Variance” message is dis- button until the proper variance zone 2. Press the UP or DOWN button un- played in the EVIC, then press the is selected, according to the map. til the Setup (Customer- SELECT button. The last variance Programmable Features) menu is 5. Press and release the RETURN zone number displays in the EVIC. reached, then press the SELECT but- button to exit. ton.

188 CUSTOMER- (for versions/markets, where pro- Enable/Disable the Rear Park PROGRAMMABLE vided). Press the UP or DOWN button Assist System (for versions/ FEATURES (SYSTEM while in this display and scroll markets, where provided) through the language choices. Press The Rear Park Assist system will scan SETUP) the SELECT button to select English, for objects behind the vehicle when Spanish (Español), French (Fran- Personal Settings allows you to set the transmission is in the REVERSE çais), etc. Then, as you continue, the and recall features when the transmis- position and the vehicle speed is less information will display in the se- sion is in PARK. If the transmission is than 18 km/h. The system can be lected language. out of PARK or the vehicle begins enabled with Sound Only, Sound and SYSTEM moving, a warning message Nav–Turn By Turn (for Display, or turned OFF through the SETUP NOT AVAILABLE VE- versions/markets, where EVIC. To make your selection, press HICLE NOT IN PARK displays when provided) and release the SELECT button until you try to select “System Setup” from a check-mark appears next to the fea- When this feature is selected, the the main menu. ture showing the system has been ac- navigation system utilizes voice com- Press and release the UP or DOWN tivated or the check-mark is removed mands, guiding through the drive button until "System Setup" is high- showing the system has been deacti- route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn un- lighted in the main menu of the EVIC. vated. Refer to “Rear Park Assist Sys- til the final destination is reached. To Then press the SELECT button to tem” in “Understanding The Features make your selection, press and release enter the System Setup sub-menu. Of Your Vehicle” for system function the SELECT button until a check- Press and release the UP or DOWN and operating information. mark appears next to the feature button to select a feature form the showing the system has been acti- Auto Unlock Doors following choices: vated or the check-mark is removed When ON is selected, all doors will showing the system has been deacti- Language unlock when the vehicle is stopped vated. When in this display you may select and the transmission is in the PARK one of five languages for all display or NEUTRAL position and the driv- nomenclature, including the trip er's door is opened. To make your functions and the navigation system

189 selection, press and release the SE- RKE Linked To Memory (for the SELECT button until a check- LECT button until a check-mark ap- versions/markets, where mark appears next to the feature pears next to the feature showing the provided) showing the system has been acti- system has been activated or the When this feature is selected the vated or the check-mark is removed check-mark is removed showing the memory seat, mirror, and radio set- showing the system has been deacti- system has been deactivated. tings will return to the memory set vated. Remote Unlock Sequence position when the RKE transmitter Automatic High Beams (for UNLOCK button is pressed. If this versions/markets, where When Driver Door 1st Press is se- feature is not selected then the provided) lected, only the driver's door will un- memory seat, mirror, and radio set- lock on the first press of the Remote When this feature is selected, the high tings can only return to the memory Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UN- beam headlights will deactivate auto- set position using the door mounted LOCK button. When Driver Door 1st matically under certain conditions. To switch. To make your selection, press Press is selected, you must press the make your selection, press and release and release the SELECT button until RKE transmitter UNLOCK button the SELECT button until a check- a check-mark appears next to the fea- twice, to unlock the passenger's mark appears next to the feature ture showing the system has been ac- doors. When All Doors 1st Press is showing the system has been acti- tivated or the check-mark is removed selected, all of the doors will unlock vated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deacti- on the first press of the RKE transmit- showing the system has been deactivated. ter UNLOCK button. To make your vated. Refer to “SmartBeam™” in selection, press and release the SE- Flash Lamps with Lock “Understanding The Features Of LECT button until a check-mark ap- When ON is selected, the front and Your Vehicle” for further information. pears next to the feature showing the rear turn signals will flash when the Headlamp Off Delay system has been activated or the doors are locked or unlocked with the check-mark is removed showing the When this feature is selected, the RKE transmitter. This feature may be system has been deactivated. driver can choose to have the head- selected with or without the sound lights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 horn on lock feature selected. To seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is 190 highlighted, then press and release the Intermittent Wiper Options (for or down until the preferred setting is SELECT button until a check-mark versions/markets, where highlighted, then press and release the appears next to the setting, showing provided) SELECT button until a check-mark that the setting has been selected. When this feature is selected, the appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Headlamps with Wipers driver can choose to have the stan- (Available with Auto Headlights dard intermittent wiper operation or Illuminated Approach Only) (for versions/markets, rain sensing auto wiper operation that When this feature is selected, the where provided) senses moisture on the windshield and headlights will activate and remain on automatically activates the wipers. To When ON is selected, and the head- for up to 90 seconds when the doors make your selection, scroll up or light switch is in the AUTO position, are unlocked with the RKE transmit- down until the preferred setting is the headlights will turn on approxi- ter. To make your selection, scroll up highlighted, then press and release the mately 10 seconds after the wipers are or down until the preferred setting is SELECT button until a check-mark turned on. The headlights will also highlighted, then press and release the appears next to the setting showing turn off when the wipers are turned SELECT button until a check-mark that the setting has been selected. off if they were turned on by this appears next to the setting, showing feature. To make your selection, press Key-Off Power Delay that the setting has been selected. and release the SELECT button until When this feature is selected, the Flashers with Sliding Door (for a check-mark appears next to the set- power window switches, radio, versions/markets, where ting, showing that the setting has been Uconnect® phone (for versions/ provided) selected. markets, where provided), DVD video When this feature is selected the sig- NOTE: Turning the headlights on system (for versions/markets, where nal lamps activate when power or during the daytime causes the in- provided), power sunroof (for manual sliding doors are in operation, strument panel lights to dim. To versions/markets, where provided), signaling other drivers that someone increase the brightness, refer to and power outlets will remain active may be exiting or entering the vehicle. “Lights” in “Understanding The for up to 10 minutes after the ignition To make your selection, press and re- Features Of Your Vehicle.” switch is turned OFF. Opening either lease the SELECT button until a front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, scroll up

191 check-mark appears next to the fea- button until a check-mark appears Blind Spot Alert (for ture showing the system has been ac- next to the feature showing the system versions/markets, where tivated or the check-mark is removed has been activated or the check-mark provided) showing the system has been deacti- is removed showing the system has There are three selections when oper- vated. been deactivated. ating Blind Spot Alert (“Blind Spot Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive NOTE: The seat will return to the Alert Lights”, “Blind Spot Alert Entry) (for versions/markets, memorized seat location (if Recall Lights/CHM”, “Blind Spot Alert where provided) Memory with Remote Key Unlock is Off”). The Blind Spot Alert feature set to ON) when the RKE transmitter can be activated in “Blind Spot Alert This feature allows you to lock and is used to unlock the door. Refer to Lights” mode, when this mode is se- unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- lected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) having to press the RKE transmitter standing The Features Of Your Ve- system is activated and will only show lock or unlock buttons. To make your hicle” for further information. a visual alert in the outside mirrors. selection, press and release the SE- The Blind Spot Alert feature can be LECT button until a check-mark ap- Tilt Mirror In Reverse (for activated in “Blind Spot Alert Lights/ pears next to the feature showing the versions/markets, where CHM” mode, in this mode the Blind system has been activated or the provided) Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a vi- check-mark is removed showing the When this feature is selected and the sual alert in the outside mirrors as system has been deactivated. Refer to vehicle is placed in a reverse gear, the well as an audible alert when the turn “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things driver's side mirror will tilt downward signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert To Know Before Starting Your Ve- to allow the driver to see into the pre- Off” is selected the Blind Spot Moni- hicle”. vious blind spot and avoid objects in tor (BSM) system is deactivated. Easy Exit Seat (for versions/ close proximity to the rear of the ve- To make your selection, press and re- markets, where provided) hicle. To make your selection, press lease the SELECT button until a and release the SELECT button until a This feature provides automatic check-mark appears next to the fea- check-mark appears next to the feature driver seat positioning to enhance ture showing the system has been ac- showing the system has been activated driver mobility when entering and ex- tivated or the check-mark is removed or the check-mark is removed showing iting the vehicle. To make your selec- showing the system has been deacti- the system has been deactivated. tion, press and release the SELECT vated. 192 NOTE: If your vehicle has experi- SOUND SYSTEMS This feature allows an iPod® or exter- enced any damage in the area nal USB device to be plugged into the where the sensor is located, even if Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet. USB port, located in the glove com- the fascia is not damaged, the sen- partment. sor may have become misaligned. NAVIGATION SYSTEM iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Take your vehicle to an authorized (for versions/markets, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® dealer to verify sensor alignment. where provided) devices. Some iPod® software ver- Having a sensor that is misaligned sions may not fully support the iPod® will result in the BSM not operat- Refer to your Uconnect® User Manual. control features. Please visit Apple’s ing to specification. iPod®/USB/MP3 website for software updates. Calibrate Compass (for CONTROL (for NOTE: versions/markets, where versions/markets, where provided) • If the radio has a USB port, refer equipped) to the appropriate Uconnect® Refer to “Compass Display” for more Multimedia radio User’s Manual information. NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/REL/RET ra- for iPod® or external USB de- Compass Variance (for dios only with Uconnect®. For vice support capability. versions/markets, where sales code RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, • Connecting an iPod® or con- provided) RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio sumer electronic audio device to Refer to “Compass Display” for more iPod®/USB/MP3 control feature, the AUX port located in the ra- information. refer to the separate RBZ/RHB, dio faceplate, plays media, but RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User's Turn Menu Off does not use the iPod® /MP3 Manual. iPod®/USB/MP3 control control feature to control the Press and release SELECT to turn the is available only for versions/ connected device. menu off. markets, where provided with these radios.

193 CONNECTING THE iPod® Once the audio device is connected • The audio device can be controlled OR EXTERNAL USB and synchronized to the vehicle's using the radio buttons to Play, DEVICE iPod®/USB/MP3 control system Browse, and List the iPod® (iPod® or external USB device may contents. Use the connection cable to connect an take a few minutes to connect), the • The audio device battery charges iPod® or external USB device to the audio device starts charging and is when plugged into the USB/AUX vehicle's USB connector port which is ready for use by pressing radio connector (if supported by the spe- located in the glove compartment. switches, as described below. cific audio device). NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may CONTROLLING THE iPod® not communicate with the iPod®/ OR EXTERNAL USB USB/MP3 control system until a DEVICE USING RADIO minimum charge is attained. BUTTONS Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/MP3 To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 con- control system may charge it to the trol mode and access a connected au- USB Connector Port required level. dio device, either press the “AUX” NOTE: The glove compartment button on the radio faceplate or press will have a position where the USING THIS FEATURE the VR button and say "USB" or "Switch to USB". Once in the iPod®/ iPod® or consumer electronic au- By using an iPod® cable, or an exter- USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks dio device cable can be routed nal USB device to connect to the USB through without damaging the (if available from audio device) start port: cable when closing the lid. This playing over the vehicle's audio sys- allows routing of the cable without • The audio device can be played on tem. damaging it while closing the lid. If the vehicle’s sound system, provid- a cut out is not available in the ing metadata (artist, track title, al- PLAY MODE glove compartment, route the bum, etc.) information on the radio When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 cable away from the lid latch and display. control mode, the iPod® or external in a place that will allow the lid to USB device automatically starts Play close without damaging the cable. 194 mode. In Play mode, the following • A single press backward << RW or • Press the SCAN button to use buttons on the radio faceplate may be forward FF>> will jump backward iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan used to control the iPod® or external or forward respectively, for five sec- mode, which will play the first 10 USB device and display data: onds. seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next • Use the TUNE control knob to se- • Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> song. To stop SCAN mode and start lect the next or previous track. buttons to jump to the previous or playing the desired track, when it is next track. Pressing the SEEK>> • Turning it clockwise (forward) playing the track, press the SCAN button during play mode will jump by one click, while playing a button again. During Scan mode, to the next track in the list, or press track, skips to the next track or pressing the << SEEK and the VR button and say "Next or press the VR button and say SEEK>> buttons will select the Previous Track". "Next Track". previous and next tracks. • Turning it counterclockwise • While a track is playing, press the • RND button (available on sales (backward) by one click, will INFO button to see the associated code RES radio only): Pressing this jump to the previous track in the metadata (artist, track title, album, button toggles between Shuffle ON list or press the VR button and etc.) for that track. Pressing the and Shuffle OFF modes for the say "Previous Track" INFO button again jumps to the iPod® or external USB device, or next screen of data for that track. • Jump backward in the current press the VR button and say Once all screens have been viewed, track by pressing and holding the "Shuffle ON" or "Shuffle Off". If the last INFO button press will go << RW button. Holding the << RW the RND icon is showing on the back to the play mode screen on the button long enough will jump to the radio display, then the shuffle mode radio. beginning of the current track. is ON. • Pressing the REPEAT button will • Jump forward in the current track LIST OR BROWSE MODE by pressing and holding the FF>> change the audio device mode to button. repeat the current playing track or During Play mode, pressing any of the press the VR button and say "Re- buttons described below, will bring up peat ON" or "Repeat Off". List mode. List mode enables scroll- ing through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.

195 • TUNE control knob: The TUNE • In List mode, the radio PRESET iPod® or external USB device sub- control knob functions in a similar buttons are used as shortcuts to menu levels are available on this manner as the scroll wheel on the the following lists on the iPod® system. audio device or external USB de- or external USB device. • MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC vice. • Preset 1 – Playlists TYPE button is another shortcut • Turning it clockwise (forward) • Preset 2 – Artists button to the genre listing on your and counterclockwise (back- • Preset 3 – Albums audio device. ward) scrolls through the lists, • Preset 4 – Genres displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to • Preset 5 – Audiobooks CAUTION! be played is highlighted on the • Preset 6 – Podcasts • Leaving the iPod® or external radio display, press the TUNE • Pressing a PRESET button will USB device (or any supported de- control knob to select and start display the current list on the top vice) anywhere in the vehicle in playing the track. Turning the line and the first item in that list extreme heat or cold can alter the TUNE control knob fast will on the second line. operation or damage the device. scroll through the list faster. Dur- • To exit List mode without select- Follow the device manufacturer’s ing fast scroll, a slight delay in ing a track, press the same PRE- guidelines. updating the information on the SET button again to go back to • Placing items on the iPod® or radio display may be noticeable. Play mode. external USB device, or connec- • During all List modes, the iPod® tions to the iPod® or external • LIST button: The LIST button will displays all lists in “wrap- USB device in the vehicle, can display the top level menu of the around” mode. So if the track is cause damage to the device iPod® or external USB device. at the bottom of the list, just turn and/or to the connectors. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the wheel backward (counter- the top-menu item to be selected clockwise) to get to the track and press the TUNE control knob. faster. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all 196 WARNING! refers to Screen 2 (third row). Refer to the Dual Video Screen section for Do not plug in or remove the iPod® more information. or external USB device while driving. Failure to follow this warning Blu-ray® PLAYER could result in an accident. Play A Blu-ray Disc BLUETOOTH STREAMING To view a Blu-ray insert the disc into AUDIO (BTSA) the Blu-ray VES™ disc Player. Play- • Cycle the ignition to the ON or ACC back will begin automatically after Music can be streamed from your cel- position. the Blu-ray is recognized by the disc lular phone to the Uconnect® phone • Turn on the VES™ player (for drive. If playback does not begin au- system. versions/markets, where provided) tomatically after the disc is inserted Uconnect® MULTIMEDIA Dual Screen System by pushing the into the Blu-ray player press the play Power button, located on the far button. If playback does not begin VIDEO left, or by pressing the button on automatically after the disc is inserted ENTERTAINMENT the Remote Control. into Blu-ray VES™ disc Player follow these steps: SYSTEM (VES™) (for • When the Video Screen(s) are open versions/markets, where and a DVD is inserted into the Using the Touch-Screen Radio provided) VES™ player, the screen(s) turn(s) • Press the MENU hard-key, then on automatically, the headphone GETTING STARTED touch the Rear VES™ soft key. If a transmitters turn on and playback chapter list appears on the right • Screen(s) located in the over- begins. side of the screen, touch the hide list head console: Unfold the over- • For Dual Video Screen System, soft key to display the Rear VES™ head LCD screen(s) by pushing the Channel 1 on the Remote Control control screen. button on the overhead console be- and Headphones refers to Screen 1 hind the screen(s). (second row) and Channel 2 on the Remote Control and Headphones

197 • Touch the 1 soft-key to select an LISTEN TO AN AUDIO audio channel, then touch the SOURCE ON CHANNEL 2 VES™ Disc soft-key in the media WHILE A VIDEO IS column. PLAYING ON CHANNEL 1 Using the Remote Control Ensure the Remote Control and • Select an audio channel (Channel 1 Headphone switch is on Channel 2. for 2nd row screen and Channel 2 DUAL VIDEO SCREEN for 3rd row screen), then press the 1. HDMI port source key and select VES™ Disc 2. Audio/Video In NOTE: Typically there are two from the menu. 3. Power Outlet different ways to operate the fea- 4. USB Ports (Charge Only) • Press popup/menu key to navigate 5. Power Inverter tures of the Video Entertainment disc menu and options. System (VES™). NOTE: Due to the size of the con- When connecting an external source • The Remote Control tent on a Blu-ray disc, the disc may to the AUX input, be sure to follow the • The Touch-Screen Radio (for not start playing immediately. standard color coding for the VES™ versions/markets, where pro- jacks. PLAY VIDEO GAMES vided) NOTE: Certain high-end video PLAY A DVD USING THE Connect the video game console to the games, such as Playstation3 and Auxiliary RCA input jacks or HDMI XBox360 will exceed the power TOUCH-SCREEN RADIO port, located on the left side behind limit of the vehicle's Power In- NOTE: Headunit DVD player the second row seat. verter. Refer to the Power Inverter does not play Blu-Ray discs. section in your vehicle's Owner's Manual for more information. 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).

198 2. Insert the DVD with the label fac- NOTE: NOTE: ing up. The radio automatically se- • Channel/Screen 1 select mode • To view a DVD on the radio lects the appropriate mode after the information is shown on the left press the RADIO/MEDIA hard- disc is recognized and displays the side of the screen. key, on the radio faceplate, then menu screen or starts playing the first touch the DISC tab soft-key and track. • Channel/Screen 2 select mode then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key. information is shown on the 3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for right side of the screen. • Viewing a DVD on the Touch- second row passengers, ensure the Re- Screen radio screen is not avail- mote Control and Headphone switch • The VES™ will retain the last able in all states/provinces. If is on Channel 1. setting when turned off. available, the vehicle must be 4. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for Using The Touch-Screen Radio stopped and the shift lever must third row passengers, ensure the Re- Controls be in the PARK position for ve- mote Control and Headphone switch hicles with an automatic trans- 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the is on Channel 2. mission. In vehicles with a radio faceplate. manual transmission the park- Using The Remote Control 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to ing brake must be engaged. 1. Press the SOURCE button on the display the Rear VES Controls. If a • Touching the screen on a Touch- Remote Control. channel list is displayed, press the Screen radio while a DVD is HIDE LIST soft-key to display the 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, playing brings up basic remote Rear VES Controls screen. highlight DISC by either pressing Up/ control functions for DVD play Down/Left/Right buttons or by re- 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then such as scene selection, Play, peatedly pressing the SOURCE but- the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA col- Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Press- ton, then press ENTER/OK. umn. To exit touch the back arrow at ing the X in the upper corner the top left of the screen. will turn off the remote control screen functions.

199 PLAY A DVD USING THE 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then VES™ PLAYER (for highlight VES DISC by either press- the DISC soft-key in the VES column. versions/markets, where ing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or To exit touch the back arrow soft-key by repeatedly pressing the SOURCE at the top left of the screen. provided) button, then press ENTER/OK on the NOTE: 1. Insert the DVD with the label fac- Remote Control. • To view a DVD on the radio ing up. The VES™ player automati- NOTE: cally selects the appropriate mode af- press the RADIO/MEDIA hard- ter the disc is recognized and starts • Channel/Screen 1 select mode key, on the radio faceplate, then playing the DVD. information is shown on the left touch the DISC tab soft-key and side of the screen. then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key. NOTE: The VES™ player has basic DVD control function such as • Channel/Screen 2 select mode • Viewing a DVD on the Touch- Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and information is shown on the Screen radio screen is not avail- Stop. right side of the screen. able in all states/provinces. If available, the vehicle must be • The VES™ will retain the last 2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for stopped and the shift lever must setting when turned off. second row passengers, ensure the Re- be in the PARK position for ve- mote Control and Headphone switch Using The Touch-Screen Radio hicles with an automatic trans- is on Channel 1. Controls mission. In vehicles with a manual transmission the park- 3. To watch a DVD on Screen 2 for 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the ing brake must be engaged. third row passengers, ensure the Re- radio faceplate. mote Control and Headphone switch is on Channel 2. 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls. If a Using The Remote Control channel list is displayed, touch the 1. Press the SOURCE button on the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Remote Control. Rear VES Controls screen.

200 PLAY A Blu-ray DISC 2. While looking at Screen 1 or 2, 3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then USING THE BLU-RAY highlight Blu-ray by either pressing the VES™ Disc soft-key in the VES™ PLAYER (for versions/ Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by column. To exit touch the back arrow repeatedly pressing the SOURCE but- soft-key at the top left of the screen. markets, where provided) ton, then press OK on the Remote NOTE: 1. Insert the Blu-ray disc with the Control. • To view a Blu-ray Disc on the label facing up. The Blu-ray player NOTE: automatically selects the appropriate radio press the RADIO/MEDIA mode after the disc is recognized and • Channel/Screen 1 select mode hard-key, on the radio faceplate, starts playing the Blu-ray disc. information is shown on the left then touch the VES™ Disc tab side of the screen. soft-key and then the VIEW NOTE: The Blu-ray player has VIDEO soft-key. basic control functions such as • Channel/Screen 2 select mode Menu, Play, Pause, FF, RW and information is shown on the • Viewing a Blu-ray Disc on the Stop. right side of the screen. Touch-Screen radio screen is not available in all states/ • The VES™ will retain the last 2. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Screen provinces. If available, the ve- setting when turned off. 1 for second row passengers, ensure hicle must be stopped and the the Remote Control and Headphone Using The Touch-Screen Radio shift lever must be in the PARK switch is on Channel 1. Controls position for vehicles with an automatic transmission. In ve- 3. To watch a Blu-ray disc on Screen 1. Press the MENU hard-key on the hicles with a manual transmis- 2 for third row passengers, ensure the radio faceplate. Remote Control and Headphone sion the parking brake must be switch is on Channel 2. 2. Touch the Rear VES™ soft-key to engaged. display the Rear VES™ Controls. If a Using The Remote Control channel list is displayed, touch the 1. Press the SOURCE button on the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Blu-ray player Remote Control. Rear VES™ Controls screen.

201 LISTEN TO AN AUDIO • Selecting a video source on Channel SOURCE WHILE A VIDEO 2, the video source will display on IS PLAYING the third row screen or Screen 2 and can be heard on Channel 2. Ensure the Remote Control and • The 2nd row screen and 3rd row Headphone switch are on the same screen of the Video Entertainment channel. If watching a video on System can play two separate discs Screen 1 (second row), then Channel by utilizing the touch-screen radio 2 could be used for audio. If watching IMPORTANT NOTES FOR DVD player and Blu-ray Disc a video on Screen 2 (third row), then Player. Channel 1 could be used for audio. DUAL VIDEO SCREEN SYSTEM THIRD ROW SWIVEL • Audio can be heard through the • VES is able to transmit two chan- headphones even when the SCREEN (for versions/ screen(s) are closed. markets, where provided) nels of stereo audio and video simultaneously. VES™ REMOTE CONTROL • The third row screen or Screen 2 • The Blu-ray Disc Player can play (for versions/markets, has the ability to lower and swivel CDs, DVDs and Blu-ray Discs. where provided) to face forward. • The DVD Player can play CDs and • While the swivel screen is facing DVDs. forward, the second row screen or Screen 1 must be fully open in order • In split screen mode the left side for the swivel screen (Screen 2) to equates to Channel 1 and the right work. side equates to Channel 2. • Selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video source will display on the second row screen or Screen 1 and can be heard on Channel 1. Remote Control

202 Controls And Indicators 5. ►► – In radio modes, press to audio on a data disc, PROG Up selects seek the next tunable station. In disc the next directory and PROG Down 1. Power – Turns the screen and modes, press and hold to fast forward selects the previous directory. When wireless headphone transmitter for through the current audio track or listening to a disc in a radio with a the selected Channel on or off. To hear video chapter. In menu modes use to multiple-disc changer, PROG Up se- audio while the screen is closed, press navigate in the menu. lects the next disc and PROG Down the Power button to turn the head- selects the previous disc. phone transmitter on. 6. ▼ / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the previous station. In disc 11. MUTE – Press to mute the head- 2. Channel Selector Indicators – modes, press to advance to the start of phone audio output for the selected When a button is pressed, the cur- the current or previous audio track or channel. rently affected channel or channel video chapter. In menu modes, use to button is illuminated momentarily. 12. SLOW – If Equipped – Press to navigate in the menu. slow playback of a DVD disc. Press 3. Light – Turns the remote control 7. POP UP/MENU – Press to return play (►) to resume normal play. backlighting on or off. The remote to the main menu of a DVD disc, to backlighting turns off automatically 13. STATUS – If Equipped – Press to select a satellite audio channel from after five seconds. display the current status. the Station list, or select playback 4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a CD). 14. MODE/SOURCE – Press to Indicates which channel is being con- change the mode of the selected chan- 8. ► / || (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume trolled by the remote control. When nel. See the Mode Selection section of or pause disc play. the selector switch is in the Channel 1 this manual for details on changing position, the remote controls the func- 9. ■ (Stop) – Stops disc play modes. tionality of headphone Channel 1 (left 10. PROG Up/Down / Rewind/skip 15. SETUP – When in a video mode, side of the screen). When the selector back and fast fwd/skip forward – press the SETUP button to access the switch is in the Channel 2, position When listening to a radio mode, display settings (see the display set- the remote controls the functionality pressing PROG Up selects the next tings section) to access the DVD setup of headphone Channel 2 (right side of preset and pressing PROG Down se- menu, select the menu button on the the screen). lects the previous preset stored in the radio. When a disc is loaded in the radio. When listening to compressed DVD player (if equipped) and the

203 VES™ mode is selected and the disc is Blu-ray PLAYER REMOTE 4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - stopped, press the SETUP button to CONTROL (for Indicates which channel is being con- access the DVD Setup menu. (see the versions/markets, where trolled by the remote control. When DVD Setup Menu of this manual.) the selector switch is in the Rear 1 provided) position, the remote controls the func- 16. BACK – When navigating in tionality of headphone Channel 1 menu mode, press to return to the (second row). When the selector previous screen. When navigating a switch is in the Rear 2, position the DVDs disc menu, the operation de- remote controls the functionality of pends on the disc’s contents. headphone Channel 2 (third row). 17. ◄◄ – In radio modes, press to 5. ► – Press to navigate menus. seek to the previous tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast 6. SETUP – Press to access the Blu- rewind through the current audio ray Setup menu screen. When a disc is track or video chapter. In menu Blu-ray Player Remote Control loaded in the Blu-ray player (if modes use to navigate in the menu. Controls And Indicators equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected and the disc is stopped, press 18. ENTER/OK – Press to select the 1. Power – Turns the screen and the SETUP button to access the Blu- highlighted option in a menu. wireless headphone transmitter for ray Setup menu. the selected Channel on or off. To hear 19. ▲ / NEXT – In radio modes, audio while the screen is closed, press 7. ►► – Press and release to jump press to select to the next station. In the Power button to turn the head- to the next available audio track or disc modes, press to advance to the phone transmitter on. video chapter. Press and hold to fast next audio track or video chapter. In forward through the current audio menu modes, use to navigate in the 2. Channel Selector Indicators – track or video chapter. menu. When a button is pressed, the currently affected channel or channel 8. ► / || (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume button is illuminated momentarily. or pause disc play. 3. SOURCE – Press to enter Source 9. Four Colored Buttons – Press to Selection screen. access Blu-ray disc features.

204 10. POPUP/MENU – Press to access REMOTE CONTROL LOCKING THE REMOTE the Blu-ray main menu when in Blu- STORAGE CONTROL ray or DVD mode. Press to start Scan or start Random track functions in The video screen(s) come with a built All remote control functionality can CD or HDD modes. in storage compartment for the re- be disabled as a parental control fea- mote control which is accessible when ture. 11. KEYPAD – Press to navigate the screen is opened. To remove the • To disable the Remote Control from chapters or titles. remote, use your index finger to pull making any changes, press the and rotate the remote towards you. Do 12. ■ (Stop) – Stops disc play. Video Lock button on the DVD not try to pull the remote straight player (for versions/markets, 13. ◄◄ – Press and release to jump down as it will be very difficult to where provided). If the vehicle is to the previous audio track or video remove. To return the remote back not equipped with a DVD player, chapter. Press and hold to fast rewind into its storage area, insert one long follow the radio’s instructions to through the current audio track or edge of the remote into the two retain- turn Video Lock on. The radio and video chapter. ing clips first, and then rotate the the video screen(s) indicate when remote back up into the other two 14. MUTE – Mutes headphone au- Video Lock is active. dio. retaining clips until it snaps back into position. • Pressing the Video Lock again or 15. BACK – Press to exit out of turning the ignition OFF turns menus or return to source selection Video Lock OFF and allows remote screen. control operation of the VES™. 16. ▼ – Press to navigate menus. 17. OK – Press to select the highlighted option in a menu. 18. ◄ – Press to navigate menus. The Remote Control Storage 19. ▲ – Press to navigate menus.

205 REPLACING THE REMOTE If no audio is heard after increasing Front seat occupants receive some CONTROL BATTERIES the volume control, verify that the headphone audio coverage to allow screen is turned on and in the down them to adjust the headphone volume The remote control requires two AAA position and that the channel is not for the young rear seat occupants that batteries for operation. To replace the muted and the headphone channel se- may not be able to do so for them- batteries: lector switch is on the desired chan- selves. • Locate the battery compartment on nel. If audio is still not heard, check If no audio is heard after increasing the back of the remote, then slide that fully charged batteries are in- the volume control, verify that the the battery cover downward. stalled in the headphones. screen is turned on and in the down • Replace the batteries, making sure position and that the channel is not to orient them according to the po- muted and the headphone channel se- larity diagram shown. lector switch is on the desired channel. If audio is still not heard, check • Replace the battery compartment that fully charged batteries are in- cover. stalled in the headphones. HEADPHONES OPERATION The headphones receive two separate 1. Volume Control channels of audio using an infrared 2. Power Button transmitter from the video screen. 3. Channel Selection Switch 4. Power Indicator Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio coverage to allow Blu-ray HEADPHONES them to adjust the headphone volume for the young rear seat occupants that OPERATION 1. Power Button may not be able to do so for them- The headphones receive two separate 2. Volume Control 3. Channel Selection Switch selves. channels of audio using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.

206 CONTROLS • When both switches are on REPLACING THE Channel 2, the Remote is con- HEADPHONE BATTERIES The headphone power indicator and trolling Channel 2 and the head- controls are located on the right ear phones are tuned to the audio of Each set of headphones requires two cup. the VES™ Channel 2. AAA batteries for operation. To re- NOTE: The rear video system place the batteries: 2. Press the MODE button on the re- must be turned on before sound mote control. • Locate the battery compartment on can be heard from the head- the left ear cup of the headphones, phones. To conserve battery life, 3. If the video screen is displaying a and then slide the battery cover the headphones will automatically video source (such as a DVD Video), downward. turn off approximately three min- pressing STATUS shows the status on utes after the rear video system is a popup banner at the bottom of the • Replace the batteries, making sure turned off. screen. Pressing the MODE button to orient them according to the po- will advance to the next mode. When larity diagram shown. Changing the Audio Mode for the mode is in an audio only source Headphones • Replace the battery compartment (such as FM), the Mode Selection cover. 1. Ensure the Remote Control menu appears on screen. channel/screen selector switch is in UNWIRED® STEREO 4. When the Mode Selection menu the same position as the headphone HEADPHONE LIFETIME appears on screen, use the cursor but- selector switch. tons on the remote control to navigate LIMITED WARRANTY NOTE: to the available modes and press the Who Does This Warranty Cover? ENTER button to select the new • When both switches are on This warranty covers the initial user mode. Channel 1, the Remote is con- or purchaser ("you" or "your") of this trolling Channel 1 and the head- 5. To cancel out of the Mode Selec- particular Unwired Technology LLC phones are tuned to the audio of tion menu, press the BACK button on ("Unwired") wireless headphone the VES™ Channel 1. the remote control. ("Product"). The warranty is not transferable.

207 How Long Does The Coverage states and jurisdictions may not allow vehicle speakers. When the radio and Last? This warranty lasts as long as the exclusion or limitation of incidental VES™ channel 1 or 2 are in the same you own the Product. or consequential damages, so the above (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be What Does This Warranty Cover? limitation may not apply to you. This visible on the radio’s display for that warranty gives you specific legal rights. channel, and the shared icon will be Except as specified below, this war- You may also have other rights, which visible on the VES™ screen. When in ranty covers any Product that in nor- vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. shared mode, the same audio source is mal use is defective in workmanship heard in the shared headphone chan- or materials. What Will Unwired® Do? Un- nel 1 or channel 2. What Does This Warranty Not wired®, at its option, will repair or If the radio functions (FM, AM) are in Cover? This warranty does not cover replace any defective Product. Un- the shared mode with the VES™, only any damage or defect that results from wired® reserves the right to replace the radio is able to control the radio misuse, abuse or modification of the any discontinued Product with a com- functions. In this case, VES™ can Product other than by Unwired. Foam parable model. THIS WARRANTY IS share the radio mode, but not change earpieces, which will wear over time THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS stations until the radio mode is through normal use, are specifically PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR changed to a mode that is different not covered (replacement foam is EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARD- from the VES™ selected radio mode. available for a nominal charge). UN- ING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND When shared, the radio has priority WIRED TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LI- IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR- over the VES™ or all radio modes ABLE FOR ANY INJURIES OR DAM- RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), (FM, AM). The VES™ has the ability AGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OR to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, RESULTING FROM THE USE OF,OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. radio modes as long as it is not in PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LI- SYSTEM INFORMATION shared mode. ABLE FOR ANY GENERAL, SPE- CIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCI- SHARED MODES When in shared disc mode both the DENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, This allows the VES™ to output radio radio and the VES™ have control of EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR sources to the headphones and the the video functions. The VES™ has OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND radio to output VES™ sources to the the ability to control the following OR NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some video modes: 208 1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Re- 2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute 3. To delete the last digit, navigate to wind, Scan, and Track Up/Down. the Del button and press the remote 3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute control’s ENTER/OK button. 2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to 4. Channel 2 Mode Disk Up/Down and program all listed 4. After all of the digits are entered, CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind, 5. Remote Control Lock Out navigate to the Go button and press Scan, and Track Up/Down). the remote control’s ENTER/OK but- 6. Clock ton. The VES™ can even control radio 7. Source Mode modes or video modes while the radio DISC MENU is turned off. The VES™ can access NUMERIC KEYPAD MENU the radio modes or disc modes by When listening to a CD Audio or CD navigating to those modes on the When the display for either Channel 1 Data disc, pressing the remote con- VES™ and activating a radio mode or or Channel 2 shows DIRECT TUNE, trol’s POP UP/MENU button displays disc mode. pressing the remote control’s OK but- a list of all commands which control ton activates a numeric keypad menu. playback of the disc. Using the op- INFORMATION MODE This screen makes it easy to enter a tions you can activate or cancel Scan DISPLAY specific tuner frequency, or track play and Random play. number. To enter the desired digit: DISPLAY SETTINGS 1. Press the remote control’s naviga- When watching a video source (DVD tion buttons (▲, ▼, ►, ◄) to navi- Video with the disc in Play mode, Aux gate to the desired digit. Video, etc.), pressing the remote con- 2. When the digit is highlighted, trol’s SETUP button activates the press the remote control’s Display Settings menu. These settings ENTER/OK button to select the digit. control the appearance of the video on Repeat these steps until all digits are the screen. The factory default set- Information Mode Video Screen entered. tings are already set for optimum Display viewing, so there is no need to change 1. Channel 1 Mode these settings under normal circumstances.

209 To change the settings, press the re- button. This will automatically se- • CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA mote control’s navigation buttons (▲, lect the next available audio mode compressed audio format files ▼) to select an item, then press the without using the MODE/SOURCE • Video CDs (MPEG-1 video com- remote control’s navigation buttons Select menu. pression) ► ◄ ( , ) to change the value for the If the screen is closed and there is no The Blu-Ray player is capable of the currently selected item. To reset all audio heard, verify that the head- playing the following types of discs values back to the original settings, phones are turned on (the ON indica- (12 cm diameter): select the Default Settings menu op- tor is illuminated) and the headphone tion and press the remote control’s selector switch is on the desired chan- • BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV, ENTER/OK button. nel. If the headphones are turned on, • DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, Disc Features control the remote DVD press the remote control’s power but- AVCREC, AVCHD, DVD-VR / Blu-ray Disc player's (for versions/ ton to turn audio on. If audio is still markets, where provided) settings of not heard, check that fully charged • CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT DVD being watched in the remote batteries are installed in the head- • DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX player. phones. (versions3–6)profile 3.0 LISTENING TO AUDIO DISC FORMATS Compressed Video Files (DivX) WITH THE SCREEN The VES™ DVD player is capable of The Blu-ray player is capable of play- CLOSED playing the following types of discs ing DivX files from a CD disc (usually To listen to only audio portion of the (12 cm or 8 cm diameter): a CD-R, CD-RW) or a DVD disc (usu- channel with the screen closed: • DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video ally a DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW or DVD+RW). • Set the audio to the desired source compression) (see notes about DVD and channel. Region Codes) • The Blu-ray player always uses the file extension to determine the • Close the video screen. • DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only) video format, so DivX files must • To change the current audio mode, always end with the extension press the remote control’s MODE • Audio Compact Discs (CDs) “.div”, “divx” or “.avi”. To prevent

210 incorrect playback, do not use these • Maximum frame rate for pro- have a Video title, but the Video title is extensions for any other types of gressive source 30 frames per ignored). All multi - channel program files. second material is automatically mixed down to two channels, which may result in a • For DivX files, only DivX Home • Maximum field rate for inter- lowered apparent volume level. If you Theater Profile Ver.3.0 is laced source 60 fields per second increase the volume level to account supported. • To change the current chapter, use for this change in level, remember to • Any file that is copy protected will the remote control’s or Blu-ray lower the volume before changing the not play. The Blu-ray player will player’s “Fast Forward” button to disc or to another mode. advance to the next chapter, or the automatically skip the file and be- Recorded Discs gin playing the next available file. “Fast Rewind” button to return to the start of the current or previous The VES™ DVD player will play • Other compression formats such as chapter. CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in Xvid and RMP4 will not play. The DVD/Blu-ray/BD Region Codes CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as Blu-ray player will automatically a CD-ROM containing MP3, WMA or skip the file and begin playing the The VES™ DVD player/Blu-ray AAC (Blu-ray Disc Player only) files. next available file. player and many DVD/Blu-ray discs The player will also play DVD-Video are coded by geographic region. These • For the lack of indexes DivX files, content recorded to a DVD-R or region codes must match in order for “Resume Play, “Fast Forward” and DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (ei- the disc to play. If the region code for “Fast Rewind” cannot be ther pressed or recorded) are not sup- the DVD/Blu-ray disc does not match supported. ported. the region code for the player, the disc • DivX Home Theater Profile 3.0 re- will stop playing and a warning will If you record a disc using a personal quires: be displayed. computer, there may be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be • Maximum resolution 720 x 480 DVD Audio Support @ 30fps or 720 x 576 @ 25fps able to play some or the entire disc, When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in even if it is recorded in a compatible • Minimum resolution 16 x 16 the VES™ DVD player, the DVD- Audio title on the disc is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs also

211 format and is playable on other play- • Mixed disc which contains "DivX" • The DVD player always uses the ers. To help avoid playback problems, will be priority played on Blu-ray file extension to determine the au- use the following guidelines when re- Disc Player . dio format, so MP3 files must al- cording discs. If you are still having trouble writing a ways end with the extension ".mp3" or ".MP3" and WMA files • Open sessions are ignored. Only disc that is playable in the VES™ must always end with the extension sessions that are closed are play- DVD player, check with the disc re- ".wma" or ".WMA." AAC files able. cording software publisher for more information about burning playable must always end with the extension • For multi-session CDs that contain discs. "aac" or "AAC." To prevent incor- only multiple CD-Audio sessions, rect playback, do not use these ex- the player will renumber the tracks The recommended method for label- tensions for any other types of files. so each track number is unique. ing recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, marker. Do not use adhesive labels as tag data (such as artist name, track always use the ISO-9660 (Level 1 they may separate from the disc, be- title, album, etc.) are supported. or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo for- come stuck, and cause permanent • For Blu-ray files, only version 1.0 / mat. Other formats (such as HFS, damage to the DVD player. 1.1 / 2.2 / 2.3 and 2.4 ID3 tag data or others) are not supported. Compressed Audio Files (MP3 / (such as artist name, track title, • Blu-ray Disc Player can extend WMA and ACC) album, etc.) are supported. 2000 files and 255 folders. The DVD / Blu-ray player (for • Any file that is copy protected (such • The player recognizes a maximum versions/markets, where provided) is as those downloaded from many of 512 files and 99 folders per capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1 online music stores) will not play. CD-R and CD-RW disc. Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows The DVD player will automatically skip the file and begin playing the • Mixed media recordable DVD for- Media Audio) files from a CD Data next available file. mats will only play the Video_TS disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW). portion of the disc. • Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD

212 player will automatically skip the ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incom- cold weather conditions. When this file and begin playing the next patible disc format are all potential occurs, allow the vehicles interior available file. causes for a "Disc Error" message. temperature to warm, then insert disc into player. • If you are creating your own files, If a disc has a damaged track which the recommended fixed bit rate for results in audible or visible errors that DISPLAY MP3 files is between 96 and 192 persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD Other Language Setup Kbps and the recommended fixed player will attempt to continue play- bit rate for WMA files is between 64 ing the disc by skipping forward 1.0 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end of are also supported. For both for- the disc is reached, the DVD player mats, the recommended sample will return to the beginning of the disc rate is either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. and attempt to play the start of the first track. • To change the current file, use the DVD player’s ▲ button to advance The DVD player may shut down dur- to the next file, or the ▼ button to ing extremely hot conditions, such as return to the start of the current or when the vehicle’s interior tempera- previous file. ture is above 120° F. The Blu-ray player may shut down when the vehi- DVD Player Language Menu • To change the current directory, use cle's interior temperature exceeds All of the Language settings have a the remote control’s PROG UP and 140° F. When this occurs, the DVD / special "Other" setting to accommo- Down buttons or Rewind/skip back Blu-ray player will display "VES date languages other than Japanese or and fast fwd/skip forward. High Temp" and will shut off the English. These languages are selected VES™ displays until a safe tempera- Disc Errors using a special four-digit code. ture is reached. This shutdown is nec- If the DVD player is unable to read the essary to protect the optics of the DVD To enter a new language code, acti- disc, a "Disc Error" message is dis- / Blu-ray player. vate the DVD Setup Menu. To enter played on the VES™ and Radio dis- DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter The Blu-ray player may require addi- plays and the disc is automatically radio disc mode, then DVD setup and tional reading time during extremely follow these additional instructions:

213 • Using the remote control Up and please contact the dealer where the must enter the correct password using Down cursor buttons, highlight the vehicle was purchased. the password entry method described Language item you want to edit, below. Lan- Code Lan- Code and then press the remote control To play all discs without requiring a guage guage ENTER/OK button. password, set the DVD player’s rating Dutch 2311 French 1517 • Using the remote control Down cur- to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level sor button, select the "Other" set- 1 always requires the password to ting, then press the remote control’s Ger- 1304 Ital- 1819 play any DVD disc. Not all DVD discs Right cursor button to begin editing man ian encode a Rating, so it is still possible the setting. Portu- 2519 Span- 1418 that discs designed for adult audi- guese ish ences can still play without requiring • Using the remote control Up and a password. Down cursor buttons, select a digit Rating and Password Setup for the current position. After se- The Rating and Password settings The default rating is Level 8 (play all lecting the digit, press the remote work together to control the types of discs without a password) and the control’s Right cursor button to se- DVDs that your family watches. Most default password is 0000. lect the next digit. Repeat this digit DVD-Video discs have a rating (from selection sequence for all four 1 to 8) assigned to them where lower digits. numbers are designated for all audi- • When the entire four-digit code is ences and higher numbers are desig- entered, press the remote control’s nated for more adult audiences. ENTER/OK button. If the language When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its code is not valid, the numbers all rating is compared to the setting in the change back to "*". If the digits are DVD player. If the rating of the disc is visible after this step, then the lan- higher than the setting in the player, a guage code is valid. Password screen is displayed. In order Here is an abbreviated list of language to watch the disc, the rear passenger DVD Password Entry codes. For more language codes,

214 To set the password, activate the DVD remote control’s Right cursor but- • Enter the current password. Select Setup Menu and follow these addi- ton to select digits, enter the new a digit, use the remote control’s Up tional instructions: password. and Down cursor buttons to set the value for the current digit, and then • Using the remote control Left and • After the four-digit password is en- press the remote control’s Right Right cursor buttons, select the tered, press the remote control’s cursor button to select the next Rating tab. ENTER/OK button to accept the digit. Repeat this digit selection se- change. • Highlight "Change Password", and quence for all four digits. then press the remote control’s • After the four-digit password is en- ENTER/OK button. tered, press the remote control’s • Enter the current password. Select ENTER/OK button. If the pass- a digit, use the remote control Up word is correct, the Rating Level and Down cursor buttons to set the menu is displayed. value for the current digit, and then • Using the remote control’s Up and press the remote control’s Right Down cursor buttons, select the cursor button to select the next new rating level, and then press the digit. Repeat this digit selection se- remote control’s ENTER/OK but- quence for all four digits. DVD Player Level Menu ton to accept the change. • After the four-digit password is entered, press the remote control’s To set the rating, activate the DVD PRODUCT AGREEMENT ENTER/OK button. If the pass- Setup Menu and follow these addi- Software word is correct, the set password tional instructions: This product contains software li- screen is displayed. • Using the remote control’s Left and censed under GNU General Public Li- • Using the remote control’s Up and Right cursor buttons, select the cense (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Down cursor buttons to set the Rating tab. Public License (LGPL), etc. You have value for the current digit and the • Highlight "Change Rating", and the right of acquisition, modification, then press the remote control’s and distribution of the source code of ENTER/OK button. the GPL/LGPL software.

215 • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED VC-1 STANDARD ("VC-1 http://www.cinavia.com. To request UNDER THE AVC PATENT VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE additional information about Cinavia PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS EN- by mail, send a postcard with your PERSONAL AND NON- CODED BY A CONSUMER EN- mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer COMMERCIAL USE OF A CON- GAGED IN A PERSONAL AND Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, SUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY San Diego, CA, 92138, USA. IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM This product incorporates proprietary AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED technology under license from Ver- AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO ance Corporation and is protected by VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY LICENSE IS GRANTED OR U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY and worldwide patents issued and PERSONAL AND NON- OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL IN- pending as well as copyright and COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY FORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED trade secret protection for certain as- AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE pects of such technology. Cinavia is a A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM trademark of Verance Corporation. TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO Patents Copyright 2004-2010 Verance LICENSE IS GRANTED OR Corporation. All rights reserved by SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY Cinavia Notice Verance. Reverse engineering or dis- OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL IN- This product uses Cinavia technology assembly is prohibited. FORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED to limit the use of unauthorized copies FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE of some commercially-produced film • This product incorporates copy- HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM and videos and their soundtracks. right protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other • THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED When a prohibited use of an unau- intellectual property rights. Use of UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT thorized copy is detected, a message this copyright protection technol- PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE will be displayed and playback or ogy must be authorized by Macro- PERSONAL AND NON- copying will be interrupted. More in- vision, and is intended for home COMMERCIAL USE OF A CON- formation about Cinavia technology and other limited viewing uses only SUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO is provided at the Cinavia Online unless otherwise authorized by IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE Consumer Information Center at

216 Macrovision. Reverse engineering play purchased DivX Video-on- STEERING WHEEL or disassembly is prohibited. Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain AUDIO CONTROLS your registration code, locate the • Manufactured under license under DivX VOD section in your device U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; more information on how to complete 6,487,535 & other U.S. and world- your registration. wide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and DivX®, DivX Certified® and associ- the DTS logos, Symbol and DTS ated logos are trademarks of Rovi 2.0 Channel are trademarks of Corporation or its subsidiaries and DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. are used under license. All Rights Reserved. Trademark Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) • Manufactured under license from • Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ and the The remote sound system controls are Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray located on the rear surface of the double-D symbol are trademarks of Disc Association. Dolby Laboratories. steering wheel, at the three and nine • Java is a registered trademark of o'clock positions. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a Oracle and/or its affiliates. digital video format created by DivX, The right-hand rocker switch has a LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi pushbutton in the center, and controls Corporation. This is an official DivX CAUTION! the volume and mode of the sound Certified® device that plays DivX Use of controls or adjustments or system. Pressing the top of the rocker video. Visit divx.com for more infor- performance of procedures other switch will increase the volume. mation and software tools to convert than those specified herein may re- Pressing the bottom of the rocker your files into DivX videos. sult in hazardous radiation expo- switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON- sure. the operation of the radio from MW to DEMAND: This DivX Certified® de- LW, or to CD mode, depending on vice must be registered in order to which radio is in the vehicle.

217 The left-hand rocker switch has a If you press the switch up or down 7. Do not store the disc where tem- pushbutton in the center. The func- twice it plays the second track; three peratures may become too high. tion of the left-hand switch is differ- times, it will play the third, etc. NOTE: If you experience diffi- ent, depending on which mode you The button in the center of the left- culty in playing a particular disc, it are in. hand switch has no function in this may be damaged (i.e., scratched, The following describes the left-hand mode. reflective coating removed, a hair, rocker switch operation in each mode. moisture or dew on the disc) over- CD/DVD DISC sized, or have protection encoding. RADIO OPERATION MAINTENANCE Try a known good disc before con- Pressing the top of the switch will sidering disc player service. To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, SEEK up for the next listenable sta- take the following precautions: tion, and pressing the bottom of the RADIO OPERATION AND switch will SEEK down for the next 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid MOBILE PHONES listenable station. touching the surface. Under certain conditions, the mobile The button located in the center of the 2. If the disc is stained, clean the phone being on in your vehicle can left-hand switch will tune to the next surface with a soft cloth, wiping from cause erratic or noisy performance preset station that you have pro- center to edge. from your radio. This condition may grammed in the radio preset push- be lessened or eliminated by relocat- 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the button. ing the mobile phone antenna. This disc; avoid scratching the disc. CD PLAYER condition is not harmful to the radio. 4. Do not use solvents such as ben- If your radio performance does not Pressing the top of the switch once zene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static satisfactorily “clear” by the reposi- will go to the next track on the CD. sprays. tioning of the antenna, it is recom- Pressing the bottom of the switch once mended that the radio volume be 5. Store the disc in its case after play- will go to the beginning of the current turned down or off during mobile ing. track, or to the beginning of the pre- phone operation. vious track if it is within one second 6. Do not expose the disc to direct after the current track begins to play. sunlight.

218 CLIMATE CONTROLS The Three-Zone ATC system auto- 3. Mode Display matically maintains the interior com- This display shows the current Mode The Climate Control system allows fort level desired by the driver and all selection (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, you to regulate the temperature, passengers. The system automatically Mix). amount, and direction of air circulat- adjusts the air temperature, the air- ing throughout the vehicle. The con- flow volume, amount of outside air 4. Blower Control Display trols are located on the instrument recirculation and the airflow direc- panel, below the radio. This display shows the current Blower tion. This maintains a comfortable speed selection. AUTOMATIC temperature, even under changing 5. Front Auto Indicator TEMPERATURE CONTROL conditions. (ATC) This indicates when the system is in Front Auto mode. • Front Three-Zone ATC allows both 6. Auto Indicator driver and front passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to This indicates when the system is in select individual comfort settings. Auto mode. • When occupants in the vehicle se- 7. Right Front Seat Occupant Tem- lect the AUTO mode operation, a perature Display comfort temperature can be set by 1. Air Conditioning (A/C) Button This display shows the temperature using the temperature up and down Press and release to change the current setting for the right front seat occu- buttons, and the auto blower op- Air Conditioning (A/C) setting, the in- pant. eration will be set automatically. dicator illuminates when A/C is ON. 8. Front Defrost Button • The system can be controlled Performing this function will cause the manually, if desired. ATC to switch into manual mode. Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates • SYNC feature links the controls for 2. Left Front Seat Occupant Tem- perature Display when ON. Performing this function all three zones, allowing one com- will cause the ATC to switch into fort setting (driver setting) for the This display shows the temperature cabin, if desired. setting for the left front seat occupant. 219 manual mode. The blower will engage release to select. Refer to “Automatic 17. SYNC Button immediately if the Defrost mode is Operation” for more information. Press and release to control the tem- selected. Performing this function will cause perature setting for all three zones the ATC to switch between manual 9. Passenger Temperature Control from the driver temperature control. Up/Down Button mode and automatic modes. 18. Driver Temperature Control 13. Climate Control OFF Button Provides the passenger with indepen- Up/Down Button dent temperature control. Push the Press and release to turn the Climate Provides the driver with independent top button for warmer temperatures Control OFF. temperature control. Push the top or the lower button for cooler tem- 14. Blower Control button for warmer temperatures or perature settings. There are seven blower speeds, the the lower button for cooler tempera- 10. Rear Control Button blower speed increases as you move ture settings. Provides toggle operation between the control to the right from the lowest Automatic Operation front control screen and rear control blower setting. Performing this func- screen. Push the button to activate the tion will cause the ATC to switch into 1. Press the AUTO button on the rear climate control screen and allow manual mode. front ATC Panel and the words Front Auto will illuminate in the front ATC the front seat occupants control over 15. Mode Control Button the rear climate settings. display, along with two temperatures Press and release to select between for the driver and front passenger. 11. Rear Lock Modes (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix). The system will then automatically Press and release the Rear Lock but- Performing this function will cause regulate the amount of airflow. ton on the front ATC panel to lock and the ATC to switch into manual mode. 2. Next, adjust the temperature you unlock the rear climate controls. 16. Recirculation Control Button would like the system to maintain, by 12. Auto Temperature Control But- adjusting the driver, front passenger, Press and release to change the cur- ton and rear seat rotary temperature rent setting, the indicator illuminates knobs. Once the desired temperature Controls airflow temperature, distri- when ON. is displayed, the system will achieve bution, volume, and the amount of air and automatically maintain that com- recirculation automatically. Press and fort level. 220 3. When the system is set up for your if the Defrost mode is selected, or by NOTE: comfort level, it is not necessary to changing the front blower knob set- • If the system is in Mix, Floor or change the settings. You will experi- ting. Defrost Mode, the A/C can be ence the greatest efficiency by simply Manual Operation Override turned off, but the A/C system allowing the system to function auto- shall remain active to prevent matically. This system offers a full complement fogging of the windows. of manual override features. The NOTE: AUTO symbol in the front ATC dis- • If fog or mist appears on the • It is not necessary to move the play will be turned off when the sys- windshield or side glass, select temperature settings for cold or tem is being used in the manual mode. Defrost mode and increase hot vehicles. The system auto- NOTE: If not operating in AUTO blower speed. matically adjusts the tempera- mode, the system will not auto- Recirculation Control ture, mode and fan speed to pro- matically sense the presence of fog, vide comfort as quickly as mist or ice on the windshield. DE- possible. FROST mode must be manually When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high hu- • The temperature can be dis- selected to clear the windshield midity, or if rapid cooling is played in English or Metric units and side glass. desired, you may wish to by selecting the “Display Units • Air Conditioning (A/C) recirculate interior air by pressing the of Measure in” customer- Recirculation control button. Recir- programmable feature. Refer to The Air Conditioning (A/C) button culation mode should only be used the “Electronic Vehicle Informa- allows the operator to manually acti- temporarily. A LED will illuminate on tion Center (EVIC) — Customer- vate or deactivate the air conditioning the Recirculation control button when Programmable Features” in this system. When in A/C mode and the Recirculation mode is selected. Push Section. ATC is set to a cool temperature, de- humidified air flows through the air the button a second time to turn off To provide you with maximum com- outlets. If Economy mode is desired, the Recirculation mode LED and al- fort in the automatic mode, during press the A/C button to turn off the low outside air into the vehicle. cold start-ups, the blower fan will re- A/C mode in the ATC display and main on low until the engine warms deactivate the A/C system. up. The fan will engage immediately 221 Controlling The Rear Climate 2. Rear Temperature Display Bi-Level Mode Controls From The Front ATC This display shows the temperature Air comes from both the head- Panel setting for the rear seat occupants. liner outlets and the floor The Three-Zone ATC system allows 3. Blower Control Display outlets. for adjustment of the rear climate NOTE: In many temperature po- controls from the front ATC panel. This display shows the current Blower sitions, the BI-LEVEL mode is de- speed selection. To change the rear system settings: signed to provide cooler air out of 4. Rear Auto Indicator the headliner outlets and warmer • Press "REAR" button to change con- air from the floor outlets. trol to rear control mode, Rear dis- This indicates when the system is in play (below) will appear. Control Rear Auto mode. Floor Mode functions now operate rear system. Rear Mode Control Air comes from the floor • To return to Front screen, press Auto Mode outlets. "REAR" button again, or it will Rear Automatic Temperature revert to the Front screen after six The rear system automatically main- Control (ATC) (for versions/ seconds. tains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu- markets, where provided) pants. The rear ATC system has floor air Headliner Mode outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at Air comes from the outlets in each outboard rear seating position. the headliner. Each of these The system provides heated air outlets can be individually adjusted to through the floor outlets or cool, de- direct the flow of air. Moving the air humidified air through the headliner Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display vanes of the outlets to one side will outlets. shut off the airflow. 1. Mode Display The rear system temperature control This display shows the current Mode is on the front ATC panel located on selection. the instrument panel.

222 Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock 1. Press the Rear Temperature Lock NOTE: button on the front ATC panel, illumi- button on the front ATC panel. This • It is not necessary to move the nates a lock symbol in the rear dis- turns off the Rear Temperature Lock temperature settings for cold or play. The rear temperature and air icon in the rear temperature knob. hot vehicles. The system auto- source are controlled from the front 2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Tem- matically adjusts the tempera- ATC panel. perature and the Rear Mode Control ture, mode and fan speed to pro- Rear second row occupants can only knobs to suit your comfort needs. vide comfort as quickly as adjust the rear ATC control when the possible. 3. ATC is selected by adjusting the Rear Temperature Lock button is rear blower knob counterclockwise to • The temperature can be dis- turned off. AUTO. played in English or Metric units The rear ATC system is located in the by selecting the “Display Units Once the desired temperature is dis- headliner, near the center of the ve- of Measure in” customer- played, the ATC System will auto- hicle. programmable feature. Refer to matically achieve and maintain that the “Electronic Vehicle Informa- comfort level. When the system is set tion Center (EVIC) — Customer- up for your comfort level, it is not Programmable Features” in this necessary to change the settings. You Section. will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to Rear Blower Control function automatically. The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off, or any fixed Rear ATC Control Features blower speed, by rotating the knob from low to high. This allows the rear 1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear Mode 2 - Rear Tem- 4 - Rear Tem- seat occupants to control the volume perature perature Lock of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.

223 CAUTION! Rear Mode Control Recirculation Control Auto Mode Interior air enters the Rear Auto- When outside air contains matic Temperature Control System The rear system automatically main- smoke, odors, or high hu- through an intake grille, located in tains the correct mode and comfort midity, or if rapid cooling is the right side trim panel behind the level desired by the rear seat occu- desired, you may wish to third row seats. The rear outlets are pants. recirculate interior air by pressing the located in the right side trim panel Recirculation control button. Recir- Headliner Mode of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or culation mode should only be used place objects directly in front of the Air comes from the outlets in temporarily. The recirculation LED inlet grille or heater outlets. The the headliner. Each of these will illuminate when this button is electrical system could overload outlets can be individually adjusted to selected. Push the button a second causing damage to the blower mo- direct the flow of air. Moving the air time to turn off the Recirculation tor. vanes of the outlets to one side will mode LED and allow outside air into shut off the airflow. the vehicle. Rear Temperature Control Bi-Level Mode NOTE: In cold weather, use of the To change the temperature in the rear Recirculation mode may lead to of the vehicle, rotate the temperature Air comes from both the head- excessive window fogging. The Re- knob counterclockwise to lower the liner outlets and the floor out- circulation mode is not allowed in temperature, and clockwise to in- lets. Defrost mode to improve window crease the temperature. The rear tem- NOTE: In many temperature po- clearing operation. Recirculation perature settings are displayed in the sitions, the Bi-Level mode is de- will be disabled automatically if front ATC panel. signed to provide cooler air out of this mode is selected. When rear controls are locked by the the headliner outlets and warmer SUMMER OPERATION front system, the Rear Temperature air from the floor outlets. The engine cooling system in air con- Lock symbol on the temperature Floor Mode knob is illuminated and any rear over- ditioned vehicles must be protected head adjustments are ignored. Air comes from the floor out- with a high-quality antifreeze coolant lets. to provide proper corrosion protection

224 and to protect against engine over- adequate system lubrication to mini- and pollen from the air. Refer to “Air heating. A solution of 50% ethylene mize the possibility of compressor Conditioning” in “Maintaining Your glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% damage when the system is started Vehicle” for filter replacement in- water is recommended. Refer to again. structions. “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main- taining Your Vehicle” for proper cool- WINDOW FOGGING OPERATING TIPS ant selection. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the WINTER OPERATION inside in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select To ensure the best possible heater and Defrost or Mix mode and increase the defroster performance, make sure the front blower speed. Do not use the engine cooling system is functioning Recirculation mode without A/C for properly and the proper amount, long periods, as fogging may occur. type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Proce- OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE dures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” Make sure the air intake, located di- for proper coolant selection. Use of rectly in front of the windshield, is the air Recirculation mode during free of obstructions such as leaves. Winter months is not recommended, Leaves collected in the air intake may because it may cause window fogging. reduce airflow, and if they enter the VACATION/STORAGE plenum they could plug the water drains. In Winter months make sure Before you store your vehicle, or keep the air intake is clear of ice, slush and it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two snow. weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five min- A/C AIR FILTER utes, in fresh air with the blower set- On vehicles equipped with Automatic ting on high. This will ensure Temperature Control (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust

225 226 5

STARTING AND OPERATING

• STARTING PROCEDURES ...... 231 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 231 • KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 232 • NORMAL STARTING — GASOLINE ENGINE . .232 • EXTREME COLD WEATHER (BELOW −29°C) . .233 • IF ENGINE FAILS TO START ...... 233 • AFTER STARTING ...... 234 • NORMAL STARTING – DIESEL ENGINE .....234 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 236 • KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK ...... 237 • BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK SYSTEM ...... 237 • SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . .237 • DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES ...... 242 • ACCELERATION...... 242 • TRACTION ...... 242 • DRIVING THROUGH WATER ...... 243 • FLOWING/RISING WATER...... 243 • SHALLOW STANDING WATER...... 243 • POWER STEERING ...... 244 • POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK ...... 245 227 • PARKING BRAKE ...... 245 • ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)...... 246 • ANTI-LOCK BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ...... 247 • ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 248 • TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 248 • BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM (BAS) (for versions/ markets, where provided) ...... 249 • ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) . .249 • TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (TSC) ...... 251 • HILL START ASSIST (HSA) ...... 252 • TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION ...... 252 • Tire Markings ...... 252 • Tire Identification Number (TIN) ...... 255 • Tire Terminology And Definitions...... 256 • Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...... 256 • TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ...... 258 • Tire Pressure ...... 258 • Tire Inflation Pressures ...... 259 • Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .260 • Radial Ply Tires ...... 260 • Tire Types...... 261 • Run Flat Tires (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 261 • Spare Tires (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 262

228 • Tire Spinning ...... 263 • Tread Wear Indicators ...... 264 • Life Of Tire ...... 264 • Replacement Tires ...... 264 • TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) ...... 265 • TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 266 • TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .266 • BASE SYSTEM ...... 268 • PREMIUM SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 270 • FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE . . .272 • METHANOL ...... 273 • ETHANOL ...... 273 • CLEAN AIR GASOLINE ...... 274 • MMT IN GASOLINE ...... 274 • MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL ...... 274 • FUEL REQUIREMENTS — DIESEL ENGINE . . . .275 • BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 275 • ADDING FUEL ...... 275 • LOCKING FUEL FILLER CAP (GAS CAP) (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 275 • TRAILER TOWING ...... 276 • COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS ...... 276 • BREAKAWAY CABLE ATTACHMENT ...... 277 • TOWING TIPS ...... 282

229 • RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...... 284 • TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE ...... 284 • RECREATIONAL TOWING – ALL MODELS . . .284

230 STARTING WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) PROCEDURES • Do not leave the key fob in or near • Shift into PARK only after the Before starting your vehicle, adjust the vehicle, or in a location acces- vehicle has come to a complete your seat, adjust the inside and out- sible to children, and do not leave stop. side mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and the ignition of a vehicle equipped • Shift into or out of REVERSE if present, instruct all other occupants with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the only after the vehicle has come to to buckle their seat belts. ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child a complete stop and the engine is could operate power windows, at idle speed. other controls, or move the ve- WARNING! • Before shifting into any gear, hicle. make sure your foot is firmly on • Never leave children alone in a the brake pedal. vehicle, or with access to an un- AUTOMATIC locked vehicle. Allowing children TRANSMISSION Using Fob With Integrated Key to be in a vehicle unattended is (Tip Start) dangerous for a number of rea- The shift lever must be in the NEU- NOTE: Normal starting of either a sons. A child or others could be TRAL or PARK position before you cold or a warm engine is obtained seriously or fatally injured. Chil- can start the engine. Apply the brakes without pumping or pressing the dren should be warned not to before shifting into any driving gear. accelerator pedal. touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. CAUTION! Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly Damage to the transmission may (Continued) turn the ignition switch to the START occur if the following precautions position and release it as soon as the are not observed: starter engages. The starter motor will • Do not shift from REVERSE, continue to run, and it will disengage PARK, or NEUTRAL into any automatically when the engine is run- forward gear when the engine is ning. If the engine fails to start, the above idle speed. starter will disengage automatically in (Continued) 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the

231 ignition switch to the LOCK position, 3. Press firmly on the center of the and hold the brake pedal while press- wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the button to secure it into position. ing the ENGINE START/STOP but- “Normal Starting” procedure. ton once. The system takes over and Removing The Button attempts to start the vehicle. If the KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ 1. The ENGINE START/STOP but- vehicle fails to start, the starter will (for versions/markets, ton can be removed from the ignition disengage automatically after 10 sec- where provided) switch for key fob use. onds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine start- 2. Insert the metal part of the emer- ing, press the button again. This feature allows gency key under the chrome bezel at the driver to oper- the 6 o’clock position and gently pry To Turn Off The Engine Using ate the ignition the button loose. ENGINE START/STOP Button switch with the NOTE: The ENGINE START/ 1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then push of a button, STOP button should only be re- press and release the ENGINE as long as the EN- moved or inserted with the ignition START/STOP button. GINE START/ in the OFF position (OFF position STOP button is installed and the Re- 2. The ignition switch will return to for Keyless Enter-N-Go™). mote Keyless Entry (RKE) the OFF position. transmitter is in the passenger NORMAL STARTING — 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK and compartment. GASOLINE ENGINE the vehicle speed is above 8 km/h, the Installing And Removing The Using The ENGINE START/STOP ENGINE START/STOP button must ENGINE START/STOP Button Button be held for two seconds before the Installing The Button engine shuts off. The ignition switch NOTE: Normal starting of either position will remain in the ACC posi- 1. Remove the key fob from the igni- a cold or a warm engine is ob- tion until the shift lever is in PARK tion switch. tained without pumping or press- and the button is pressed twice to the ing the accelerator pedal. 2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP OFF position. If the shift lever is not button into the ignition switch with To start the engine, the transmission in PARK and the ENGINE START/ the lettering facing up and readable. must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. Press STOP button is pressed once, the

232 EVIC will display a “Vehicle Not In • Starting with the ignition switch in IF ENGINE FAILS TO Park” message and the engine will the OFF position: START remain running. Never leave a vehicle • Press the ENGINE START/STOP out of the PARK position, or it could button once to change the ignition roll. WARNING! switch to the ACC position (EVIC NOTE: If the ignition switch is left displays “IGNITION MODE • Never pour fuel or other flam- in the ACC or RUN (engine not run- ACCESSORY”), mable liquids into the throttle ning) position and the transmis- body air inlet opening in an at- • Press the ENGINE START/STOP sion is in PARK, the system will tempt to start the vehicle. This button a second time to change the automatically time out after 30 could result in a flash fire causing ignition switch to the RUN position minutes of inactivity and the igni- serious personal injury. (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE tion will switch to the OFF posi- • Do not attempt to push or tow RUN”), tion. your vehicle to get it started. Ve- • Press the ENGINE START/STOP hicles equipped with an auto- Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – button a third time to return the matic transmission cannot be With Driver’s Foot OFF The ignition switch to the OFF position started this way. Unburned fuel Brake Pedal (In PARK Or (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE could enter the catalytic con- NEUTRAL Position) OFF”). verter and once the engine has The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature started, ignite and damage the operates similar to an ignition switch. EXTREME COLD converter and vehicle. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN WEATHER (BELOW −29°C) (Continued) and START. To change the ignition To ensure reliable starting at these switch positions without starting the temperatures, use of an externally vehicle and use the accessories follow powered electric engine block heater these steps. is recommended.

233 accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, WARNING! (Continued) AFTER STARTING wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the • If the vehicle has a discharged “Normal Starting” procedure. The idle speed is controlled automati- battery, booster cables may be cally and it will decrease as the engine used to obtain a start from a Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using warms up. Fob With Integrated Key) booster battery or the battery in NORMAL STARTING – another vehicle. This type of start If the engine fails to start after you DIESEL ENGINE can be dangerous if done improp- have followed the “Normal Starting” erly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON “What To Do In Emergencies” for dures, it may be flooded. To clear any position. further information. excess fuel: 2. Watch for the “Wait To Start Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using 1. Press the accelerator pedal all the Light” in the instrument cluster. Refer ENGINE START/STOP Button) way to the floor and hold it. to “Instrument Cluster” in “Under- standing Your Instrument Panel” for 2. place the ignition in the START If the engine fails to start after you further information. It will illuminate position and release it as soon as the have followed the “Normal Starting” for two to ten seconds or more, de- starter engages. or “Extreme Cold Weather" proce- pending on engine temperature. dures, it may be flooded. To clear any The starter motor will disengage auto- When the “Wait To Start Light” goes excess fuel: matically in 10 seconds. Once this oc- out, the engine is ready to start. curs, release the accelerator pedal, turn 1. Press and hold the brake pedal. 3. DO NOT press the accelerator. the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- Turn the ignition switch to the START 2. Press the accelerator pedal all the tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat position and release when the engine way to the floor and hold it. the “Normal Starting” procedure. starts. 3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button once. CAUTION! The starter motor will engage auto- To prevent damage to the starter, matically, run for 10 seconds, and then wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying disengage. Once this occurs, release the again.

234 CAUTION! Starting And Operating Cautions proper lubrication of the turbo- – Diesel Engine charger. This is particularly neces- To prevent damage to the starter, sary after any period of hard driv- DO NOT crank the engine for more ing. than 15 second intervals at one WARNING! time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before NEVER pour fuel or other flam- Turbocharger Cool Down trying again. mable liquid into the air inlet open- NOTE: Letting the engine idle af- ing in an attempt to start the ve- ter extended operation allows the 4. After the engine starts, allow it to hicle. This could result in a flash turbine housing to cool to normal idle for approximately 30 seconds be- fire causing serious personal injury. operating temperature. fore driving. This allows oil to circu- late and lubricate the turbocharger. • Running a cold engine at high The following chart should be used as speeds during driving or idling may a guide in determining the amount of damage engine components. engine idle time required to suffi- • Before turning off your turbo diesel ciently cool down the turbocharger engine, always allow the engine to before shut down, depending upon return to normal idle speed and run the type of driving and the amount of for several seconds. This assures cargo. Turbocharger "Cool Down" Chart Driving Load Turbocharger Idle Time (in minutes) Conditions Temperature Before Shut Down Stop & Go Empty Cool Less than 1 Stop & Go Medium Warm 1 Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2 City Traffic Max. GCWR Warm 3 Highway Speeds Max. GCWR Warm 4 Uphill Grade Max. GCWR Hot 5

235 AUTOMATIC WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) TRANSMISSION • It is dangerous to shift out of • When leaving the vehicle, always PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine remove the key fob and lock your CAUTION! speed is higher than idle speed. If vehicle. your foot is not firmly pressing • Never leave children alone in a Damage to the transmission may the brake pedal, the vehicle could vehicle, or with access to an un- occur if the following precautions accelerate quickly forward or in locked vehicle. Allowing children are not observed: reverse. You could lose control of to be in a vehicle unattended is • Shift into PARK only after the the vehicle and hit someone or dangerous for a number of rea- vehicle has come to a complete something. Only shift into gear sons. A child or others could be stop. when the engine is idling nor- seriously or fatally injured. Chil- • Shift into or out of REVERSE mally and your foot is firmly dren should be warned not to only after the vehicle has come to pressing the brake pedal. touch the parking brake, brake a complete stop and the engine is • Unintended movement of a ve- pedal or the shift lever. at idle speed. hicle could injure those in or near • Do not leave the key fob in or near • Do not shift between PARK, RE- the vehicle. As with all vehicles, the vehicle (or in a location acces- VERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE you should never exit a vehicle sible to children), and do not when the engine is above idle while the engine is running. Be- leave the ignition (in a vehicle speed. fore exiting a vehicle, always ap- equipped with Keyless Enter-N- • Before shifting into any gear, ply the parking brake, shift the Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN make sure your foot is firmly transmission into PARK, turn the position. A child could operate pressing the brake pedal. engine OFF, and remove the key power windows, other controls, or fob. When the ignition is in the NOTE: You must press and hold move the vehicle. LOCK position, the transmission the brake pedal while shifting out is locked in PARK, securing the of PARK. vehicle against unwanted movement.

(Continued)

236 KEY IGNITION PARK To shift the transmission out of PARK, INTERLOCK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine run- This vehicle is equipped with a Key ning or not) and the brake pedal must Ignition Park Interlock which re- be pressed. quires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC turned to the LOCK position. The key TRANSMISSION fob can only be removed from the The transmission gear position dis- Shift Lever ignition when the ignition is in the play (located in the instrument clus- Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or LOCK position, and the transmission ter) indicates the transmission gear REVERSE when the accelerator is locked in PARK whenever the igni- range. You must press the brake pedal pedal is released and the vehicle is tion switch is in the LOCK position. to move the shift lever out of PARK stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, (Refer to Brake/Transmission Shift the brake pedal when shifting be- the system will trap the key fob in Interlock System in this section). To tween these gears. the ignition switch to warn you drive, move the shift lever from PARK The transmission shift lever has only that this safety feature is inoper- or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and able. The engine can be started The electronically-controlled trans- DRIVE shift positions. Manual down- and stopped but the key fob cannot mission provides a precise shift sched- shifts can be made using the Elec- be removed until you obtain ser- ule. The transmission electronics are tronic Range Select (ERS) shift con- vice. self-calibrating; therefore, the first trol (described later in this section). BRAKE/TRANSMISSION few shifts on a new vehicle may be Moving the shift lever to the left or SHIFT INTERLOCK somewhat abrupt. This is a normal right (–/ +) while in the DRIVE posi- SYSTEM condition, and precision shifts will de- tion will select the highest available velop within a few hundred kilome- transmission gear, and will display This vehicle is equipped with a Brake ters. that gear in the instrument cluster as Transmission Shift Interlock System 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied.

237 GEAR RANGES an added precaution, turn the front WARNING! (Continued) wheels toward the curb on a downhill DO NOT race the engine when shift- grade, and away from the curb on an • It is dangerous to shift out of ing from PARK or NEUTRAL into uphill grade. PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine another gear range. speed is higher than idle speed. If NOTE: After selecting any gear your foot is not firmly pressing range, wait a moment to allow the WARNING! the brake pedal, the vehicle could selected gear to engage before ac- • Never use the PARK position as a accelerate quickly forward or in celerating. This is especially im- substitute for the parking brake. reverse. You could lose control of portant when the engine is cold. Always apply the parking brake the vehicle and hit someone or fully when parked to guard something. Only shift into gear PARK (P) against vehicle movement and when the engine is idling nor- This range supplements the parking possible injury or damage. mally and your foot is firmly brake by locking the transmission. • Your vehicle could move and in- pressing the brake pedal. The engine can be started in this jure you and others if it is not • Unintended movement of a ve- range. Never attempt to use PARK completely in PARK. Check by hicle could injure those in or near while the vehicle is in motion. Apply trying to move the shift lever out the vehicle. As with all vehicles, the parking brake when leaving the of PARK with the brake pedal you should never exit a vehicle vehicle in this range. released. Make sure the transmis- while the engine is running. Be- When parking on a level surface, you sion is in PARK before leaving the fore exiting a vehicle, always ap- may shift the transmission into PARK vehicle. ply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the first, and then apply the parking (Continued) brake. engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the When parking on a hill, apply the LOCK position, the transmission parking brake before shifting the is locked in PARK, securing the transmission to PARK, otherwise the vehicle against unwanted move- load on the transmission locking ment. mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As (Continued) 238 REVERSE (R) WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • When leaving the vehicle, always • Before moving the shift lever out This range is for moving the vehicle remove the key fob and lock your of PARK, you must place the ig- backward. Shift into REVERSE only vehicle. nition from the LOCK/OFF posi- after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Never leave children alone in a tion to the ON/RUN position, and vehicle, or with access to an un- also press the brake pedal. Other- NEUTRAL (N) locked vehicle. wise, damage to the shift lever Use this range when the vehicle is could result. • Allowing children to be in a ve- standing for prolonged periods with • DO NOT race the engine when hicle unattended is dangerous for the engine running. The engine may shifting from PARK or NEU- a number of reasons. A child or be started in this range. Apply the TRAL into another gear range, as others could be seriously or fa- parking brake and shift the transmis- this can damage the drivetrain. tally injured. Children should be sion into PARK if you must leave the warned not to touch the parking vehicle. brake, brake pedal or the shift The following indicators should be lever. used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- • Do not leave the key fob in or near WARNING! tion: the vehicle, (or in a location ac- Do not coast in NEUTRAL and cessible to children), and do not • When shifting into PARK, firmly never turn off the ignition to coast leave the ignition (in a vehicle move the shift lever all the way down a hill. These are unsafe prac- equipped with Keyless Enter-N- forward and to the left until it stops tices that limit your response to Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN and is fully seated. changing traffic or road conditions. position A child could operate You might lose control of the ve- • Look at the transmission gear posi- power windows, other controls, or hicle and have a collision. tion display and verify that it indi- move the vehicle. cates the PARK position. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

239 CAUTION! Range Select (ERS) shift control (de- could result in transmission damage, scribed below) to select a lower gear Transmission Limp Home Mode is ac- Towing the vehicle, coasting, or range. Under these conditions, using a tivated. In this mode, the transmis- driving for any other reason with lower gear range will improve perfor- sion remains in third gear regardless the transmission in NEUTRAL can mance and extend transmission life of which forward gear is selected. cause severe transmission damage. by reducing excessive shifting and PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL Refer to “Recreational Towing” in heat buildup. will continue to operate. The Mal- “Starting And Operating” and function Indicator Light (MIL) may During cold temperatures, transmis- “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in be illuminated. Limp Home Mode al- sion operation may be modified de- “What To Do In Emergencies” for lows the vehicle to be driven to an pending on engine and transmission further information. authorized dealer for service without temperature as well as vehicle speed. damaging the transmission. DRIVE (D) This feature improves warm up time In the event of a momentary problem, This range should be used for most of the engine and transmission to the transmission can be reset to regain city and highway driving. It provides achieve maximum efficiency. Engage- all forward gears by performing the the smoothest upshifts and down- ment of the torque converter clutch is following steps: shifts, and the best fuel economy. The inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under transmission automatically upshifts 1. Stop the vehicle. through all forward gears. The “Torque Converter Clutch” in this 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. DRIVE position provides optimum section). During extremely cold temperatures (-27°C or below), operation driving characteristics under all nor- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the may briefly be limited to third gear mal operating conditions. LOCK/OFF position. only. Normal operation will resume When frequent transmission shifting once the transmission temperature 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. occurs (such as when operating the has risen to a suitable level. 5. Restart the engine. vehicle under heavy loading condi- Transmission Limp Home Mode tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If strong head winds, or while towing Transmission function is monitored the problem is no longer detected, the heavy trailers), use the Electronic electronically for abnormal condi- transmission will return to normal options. If a condition is detected that eration.

240 NOTE: Even if the transmission (except to prevent engine overspeed), To exit ERS mode, simply press and can be reset, we recommend that but will shift down into second and hold the shift lever to the right (+) you visit your authorized dealer at first gears normally. until “D” is once again displayed in your earliest possible conve- the instrument cluster. You can switch between DRIVE and nience. Your authorized dealer has ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When diagnostic equipment to deter- the shift lever is in the DRIVE posi- WARNING! mine if the problem could recur. tion, the transmission will operate au- Do not downshift for additional en- If the transmission cannot be reset, tomatically, shifting between all gine braking on a slippery surface. authorized dealer service is required. available gears. Tapping the shift le- The drive wheels could lose their ver to the left (-) will activate ERS Electronic Range Select (ERS) grip and the vehicle could skid, mode, display the current gear in the Operation causing a collision or personal in- instrument cluster, and maintain that jury. The Electronic Range Select (ERS) gear as the top available gear. Once in shift control allows the driver to limit ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the highest available gear when the the left (-) or right (+) will change the shift lever is in the DRIVE position. top available gear. For example, if you shift the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will not shift above third gear Transmission Gear Position Display 123456D Actual Gear(s) Allowed 1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6 NOTE: To select the proper gear the vehicle can best be slowed automatically shift into Overdrive if position for maximum decelera- down. the following conditions are present: tion (engine braking), tap the shift Overdrive Operation • The shift lever is in the DRIVE po- lever to the left (-) repeatedly as the sition. vehicle slows. The transmission The automatic transmission includes will shift to the range from which an electronically controlled Overdrive • The transmission fluid has reached (sixth gear). The transmission will an adequate temperature.

241 • The engine coolant has reached an torque converter clutch is not en- WARNING! adequate temperature. gaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Over- Rapid acceleration on slippery sur- • The vehicle speed is sufficiently drive when cold. This is normal. faces is dangerous. Unequal trac- high. Using the Electronic Range Select tion can cause sudden pulling of the • The driver is not heavily pressing (ERS) shift control, when the front wheels. You could lose control the accelerator. transmission is sufficiently warm, of the vehicle and possibly have a will demonstrate that the trans- collision. Accelerate slowly and Torque Converter Clutch mission is able to shift into and out carefully whenever there is likely to A feature designed to improve fuel of Overdrive. be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, economy has been included in the au- mud, loose sand, etc.). tomatic transmission on your vehicle. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY TRACTION A clutch within the torque converter SURFACES engages automatically at calibrated When driving on wet or slushy roads, speeds. This may result in a slightly ACCELERATION it is possible for a layer of water to different feeling or response during Rapid acceleration on snow covered, build up between the tire and road normal operation in the upper gears. wet, or other slippery surfaces may surface. This is known as hydroplan- When the vehicle speed drops or dur- cause the driving wheels to pull errati- ing and may cause partial or complete ing some accelerations, the clutch au- cally to the right or left. This phenom- loss of vehicle control and stopping tomatically disengages. enon occurs when there is a difference ability. To reduce this possibility, the NOTE: The torque converter in the surface traction under the front following precautions should be ob- clutch will not engage until the (driving) wheels. served: transmission fluid and engine 1. Slow down during rainstorms or coolant are warm [usually after 2 when roads are slushy. to 5 km of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

242 3. Replace the tires when tread wear FLOWING/RISING WATER CAUTION! indicators first become visible. • Always check the depth of the 4. Keep the tires properly inflated. WARNING! standing water before driving 5. Maintain sufficient distance be- Do not drive on or across a road or through it. Never drive through tween your vehicle and the vehicle in path where water is flowing and/or standing water that is deeper front of you to avoid a collision in a rising (as in storm run-off). Flow- than the bottom of the tire rims sudden stop. ing water can wear away the road mounted on the vehicle. or path's surface and cause your • Determine the condition of the DRIVING THROUGH vehicle to sink into deeper water. road or the path that is under WATER Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water and if there are any ob- water can carry your vehicle away stacles in the way before driving Driving through water more than a swiftly. Failure to follow this warn- through the standing water. few centimeters deep will require ex- ing may result in injuries that are • Do not exceed 8 km/h when driv- tra caution to ensure safety and pre- serious or fatal to you, your passen- ing through standing water. This vent damage to your vehicle. gers, and others around you. will minimize wave effects. SHALLOW STANDING (Continued) WATER Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so.

243 in tight spaces. The system will pro- CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! vide mechanical steering capability if • Driving through standing water • Driving through standing water power assist is lost. may cause damage to your vehi- limits your vehicle’s traction ca- cle’s drivetrain components. Al- pabilities. Do not exceed 8 km/h If for some reason the power assist is ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids when driving through standing interrupted, it will still be possible to (i.e., engine oil, transmission, water. steer your vehicle. Under these condi- axle, etc.) for signs of contamina- • Driving through standing water tions, you will observe a substantial tion (i.e., fluid that is milky or limits your vehicle’s braking ca- increase in steering effort, especially foamy in appearance) after driv- pabilities, which increases stop- at very low vehicle speeds and during ing through standing water. Do ping distances. Therefore, after parking maneuvers. not continue to operate the ve- driving through standing water, NOTE: hicle if any fluid appears con- drive slowly and lightly press on taminated, as this may result in the brake pedal several times to • Increased noise levels at the end further damage. Such damage is dry the brakes. of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not not covered by the New Vehicle • Getting water inside your vehi- indicate that there is a problem Limited Warranty. cle’s engine can cause it to lock up with the power steering system. • Getting water inside your vehi- and stall out, and leave you cle’s engine can cause it to lock up stranded. • Upon initial start-up in cold and stall out, and cause serious • Failure to follow these warnings weather, the power steering internal damage to the engine. may result in injuries that are se- pump may make noise for a Such damage is not covered by rious or fatal to you, your passen- short amount of time. This is due the New Vehicle Limited War- gers, and others around you. to the cold, thick fluid in the ranty. steering system. This noise POWER STEERING should be considered normal, and it does not in any way dam- The standard power steering system age the steering system. will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

244 WARNING! CAUTION! PARKING BRAKE Continued operation with reduced Do not use chemical flushes in your Before leaving the vehicle, make sure power steering assist could pose a power steering system as the that the parking brake is fully applied safety risk to yourself and others. chemicals can damage your power and place the shift lever in the PARK Service should be obtained as soon steering components. Such damage position. as possible. is not covered by the New Vehicle The foot operated parking brake is Limited Warranty. positioned below the lower left corner CAUTION! of the instrument panel. To apply the WARNING! park brake, firmly push the park Prolonged operation of the steering brake pedal fully. To release the park- system at the end of the steering Fluid level should be checked on a ing brake, press the park brake pedal wheel travel will increase the steer- level surface and with the engine off a second time and let your foot up as ing fluid temperature and it should to prevent injury from moving parts you feel the brake disengage. be avoided when possible. Damage and to ensure accurate fluid level to the power steering pump may reading. Do not overfill. Use only occur. manufacturer's recommended power steering fluid. POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean Checking the power steering fluid cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all level at a defined service interval is surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri- not required. The fluid should only be cants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main- Parking Brake checked if a leak is suspected, abnor- taining Your Vehicle” for further in- When the parking brake is applied mal noises are apparent, and/or the formation. with the ignition switch in the ON system is not functioning as antici- position, the “Brake Warning Light” pated. Coordinate inspection efforts in the instrument cluster will illumi- through an authorized dealer. nate.

245 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • When the parking brake is ap- • Never use the PARK position as a • Do not leave the key fob in or near plied and the automatic trans- substitute for the parking brake. the vehicle (or in a location acces- mission is placed in gear, the Always apply the parking brake sible to children), and do not “Brake Warning Light” will fully when parked to guard leave the ignition of a vehicle flash. If vehicle speed is de- against vehicle movement and equipped with Keyless Enter-N- tected, a chime will sound to possible injury or damage. Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN alert the driver. Fully release the • When leaving the vehicle, always mode. A child could operate parking brake before attempting remove the key fob from the igni- power windows, other controls, or to move the vehicle. tion and lock your vehicle. move the vehicle. • This light only shows that the • Never leave children alone in a parking brake is applied. It does vehicle, or with access to an un- not show the degree of brake ap- locked vehicle. Allowing children CAUTION! plication. to be in a vehicle unattended is If the Brake System Warning Light dangerous for a number of rea- remains on with the parking brake When parking on a hill, it is important sons. A child or others could be released, a brake system malfunc- to turn the front wheels toward the seriously or fatally injured. Chil- tion is indicated. Have the brake curb on a downhill grade and away dren should be warned not to system serviced by an authorized from the curb on an uphill grade. For touch the parking brake, brake dealer immediately. vehicles equipped with an automatic pedal or the shift lever. transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, (Continued) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE otherwise the load on the transmis- SYSTEM (ABS) sion locking mechanism may make it The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) difficult to move the shift lever out of provides increased vehicle stability PARK. The parking brake should al- and brake performance under most ways be applied whenever the driver braking conditions. The system oper- is not in the vehicle. ates with a separate computer to

246 modulate hydraulic pressure to pre- WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) vent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. • The Anti-Lock Brake System • The capabilities of an ABS- contains sophisticated electronic equipped vehicle must never be ABS is activated during braking un- equipment that may be suscep- exploited in a reckless or danger- der certain road or stopping condi- tible to interference caused by ous manner, which could jeopar- tions. ABS-inducing conditions can improperly installed, or high out- dize the user’s safety or the safety include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, rail- put radio transmitting equip- of others. road tracks, loose debris, or panic ment. This interference can cause • The ABS cannot prevent the stops. possible loss of anti-lock braking natural laws of physics from act- You may experience the following capability. Installation of such ing on the vehicle, nor can it in- when the brake system goes into anti- equipment should be performed crease braking or steering effi- lock: by qualified professionals. ciency beyond that afforded by • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes the condition of the vehicle • The ABS motor running (it may will diminish their effectiveness brakes and tires or the traction continue to run for a short time and may lead to a collision. afforded. after the stop). Pumping makes the stopping dis- • A clicking sound of solenoid valves. tance longer. Just press firmly on All vehicle wheels and tires must be your brake pedal when you need the same size and type, and tires must • Brake pedal pulsations. to slow down or stop. be properly inflated to produce accu- • A slight drop or fall away of the • The Anti-Lock Brake System rate signals for the computer. brake pedal at the end of the stop. cannot prevent collisions, includ- ANTI-LOCK BRAKE ing those resulting from excessive WARNING LIGHT speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” monitors (Continued) the anti-lock brake system. The light will come on when

247 the ignition switch is turned to the ON required. Consult with your autho- spin is detected, brake pressure is ap- position and may stay on for as long rized dealer service center as soon as plied to the slipping wheel(s) and en- as four seconds. possible. gine power is reduced, to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning ELECTRONIC BRAKE feature of the TCS functions similarly Light” remains on or comes on while to a limited-slip differential, and con- driving, it indicates that the anti-lock CONTROL SYSTEM (for trols the wheel spin across a driven portion of the brake system is not versions/markets, where axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is functioning and that service is re- provided) spinning faster than the other, the sys- quired. However, the conventional tem will apply the brake of the spin- brake system will continue to operate Your vehicle is equipped with an ad- ning wheel. This will allow more en- normally if the “Brake Warning vanced electronic brake control sys- gine torque to be applied to the wheel Light” is not on. tem that includes the Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System that is not spinning. This feature re- If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning (BAS) and Electronic Stability Con- mains active even if the ESC is in the Light” is on, the brake system should trol (ESC), Trailer Sway Control “Partial Off” mode. be serviced as soon as possible to re- (TSC), and Hill Start Assist (HSA). The “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- store the benefits of anti-lock brakes. These systems complement the Anti- dicator Light” (in the instrument If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Lock Brake System (ABS) by opti- cluster) will start to flash as soon as Light” does not come on when the mizing the vehicle braking capability the tires lose traction and the wheels ignition switch is turned to the ON during emergency braking maneu- begin to spin. This indicates that the position, have the bulb repaired as vers. TCS is active. If the indicator light soon as possible. TRACTION CONTROL flashes during acceleration, ease up If both the “Brake Warning Light” SYSTEM (TCS) (for on the accelerator and apply as little and the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt Light” remain on, the ABS and Elec- versions/markets, where your speed and driving to the prevail- tronic Brake Force Distribution provided) ing road conditions, and do not switch (EBD) systems are not functioning. The Traction Control System (TCS) off the ESC or TCS. Immediate repair to the ABS system is monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel

248 WARNING! The BAS complements the ABS. Ap- ELECTRONIC STABILITY plying the brakes very quickly results CONTROL (ESC) • The TCS cannot prevent the in the best BAS assistance. To receive natural laws of physics from act- the benefit of the system, you must The Electronic Stability Control ing on the vehicle, nor can it in- apply continuous braking pressure (ESC) enhances directional control crease the traction afforded. during the stopping sequence. Do not and stability of the vehicle under vari- • The TCS cannot prevent colli- reduce brake pedal pressure unless ous driving conditions. ESC corrects sions, including those resulting braking is no longer desired. Once the for over/under steering of the vehicle from excessive speed in turns, or brake pedal is released, the BAS is by applying the brake of the appro- hydroplaning. deactivated. priate wheel to assist in counteracting • The capabilities of a TCS- the over/under steer condition. En- equipped vehicle must never be gine power may also be reduced to exploited in a reckless or danger- WARNING! help the vehicle maintain the desired ous manner, which could jeopar- • The BAS cannot prevent the path. dize the user's safety or the safety natural laws of physics from act- ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to of others. ing on the vehicle, nor can it in- determine the vehicle path intended crease the traction afforded by by the driver and compares it to the BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM prevailing road conditions. actual path of the vehicle. When the (BAS) (for versions/markets, • The BAS cannot prevent colli- actual path does not match the in- where provided) sions, including those resulting tended path, ESC applies the brake of from excessive speed in turns, The Brake Assist System (BAS) is de- the appropriate wheel to assist in driving on very slippery surfaces, counteracting the oversteer or under- signed to optimize the vehicle’s brak- or hydroplaning. ing capability during emergency steer condition. • The capabilities of a BAS- braking maneuvers. The system de- equipped vehicle must never be • Oversteer - when the vehicle is tects an emergency braking situation exploited in a reckless or danger- turning more than appropriate for by sensing the rate and amount of ous manner which could jeopar- the steering wheel position. brake application, and then applies dize the user's safety or the safety optimum pressure to the brakes. This of others. can help reduce braking distances.

249 • Understeer - when the vehicle is ESC Operating Modes vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel turning less than appropriate for conditions and more wheel spin than the steering wheel position. ESC would normally allow is required The “ESC Off” switch is lo- to gain traction. To turn ESC on cated in the center switch again, momentarily press the “ESC WARNING! bank, next to the hazard Off” switch. This will restore the nor- The Electronic Stability Control flasher switch. mal “ESC On” mode of operation. System (ESC) cannot prevent the ESC On NOTE: To improve the vehicle's natural laws of physics from acting traction when driving with snow on the vehicle, nor can it increase the This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC on two-wheel drive ve- chains, or starting off in deep traction afforded by prevailing road snow, sand or gravel, it may be hicles. Whenever the vehicle is conditions. ESC cannot prevent all desirable to switch to the “Partial started, the ESC system will be in this accidents, including those resulting Off” mode by pressing the “ESC mode. This mode should be used for from excessive speed in turns, driv- Off” switch. Once the situation re- ing on very slippery surfaces, or hy- most driving situations. ESC should quiring ESC to be switched to the droplaning. ESC also cannot prevent only be turned off for specific reasons “Partial Off” mode is overcome, accidents resulting from loss of ve- as noted below. turn ESC back on by momentarily hicle control due to inappropriate ESC Partial Off pressing the “ESC Off” switch. driver input for the conditions. Only This may be done while the vehicle a safe, attentive, and skillful driver This mode is entered by momentarily is in motion. can prevent accidents. The capabili- pressing the “ESC Off” switch. ties of an ESC equipped vehicle must When in the “Partial Off” mode, the WARNING! never be exploited in a reckless or TCS portion of ESC, except for the In partial ESC mode, the engine dangerous manner which could “limited slip” feature described in the jeopardize the user’s safety or the TCS section, has been disabled and power reduction feature of ESC is safety of others. the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve- illuminated. When in the “Partial hicle stability offered by the ESC Off” mode, ESC will operate without system is reduced. engine torque management. This mode is intended to be used if the

250 ESC Activation/Malfunction If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- TRAILER SWAY CONTROL Indicator Light And ESC OFF dicator Light” begins to flash during (TSC) Indicator Light acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to Be sure to adapt your speed and driving recognize an excessively swaying The “ESC Activation/ to the prevailing road conditions. trailer and will take the appropriate Malfunction Indicator actions to attempt to stop the sway. Light” in the instrument NOTE: The system may reduce engine power cluster will come on when • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction and apply the brake of the appropri- the ignition switch is turned to the ON Indicator Light” and the “ESC ate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of position. It should turn off with the OFF Indicator Light” come on the trailer. TSC will become active engine running. If the “ESC momentarily each time the igni- automatically once an excessively Activation/Malfunction Indicator tion switch is turned ON. swaying trailer is recognized. No Light” comes on continuously with the driver action is required. Note that engine running, a malfunction has • Each time the ignition is turned TSC cannot stop all trailers from been detected in the ESC system. If this ON, the ESC system will be ON swaying. Always use caution when light remains on after several ignition even if it was turned off towing a trailer and follow the trailer cycles, and the vehicle has been driven previously. tongue weight recommendations. Re- several kilometers at speeds greater • The ESC system will make buzz- fer to “Trailer Towing” in this section than 48 km/h, see your authorized ing or clicking sounds when it is for further information. When TSC is dealer as soon as possible to have the active. This is normal; the functioning, the “ESC Activation/ problem diagnosed and corrected. sounds will stop when ESC be- Malfunction Indicator Light” will The “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- comes inactive following the flash, the engine power may be re- dicator Light” (located in the instru- maneuver that caused the ESC duced and you may feel the brakes ment cluster) starts to flash as soon as activation. being applied to individual wheels to the tires lose traction and the ESC sys- attempt to stop the trailer from sway- The “ESC OFF Indicator tem becomes active. The “ESC ing. TSC is disabled when the ESC Light” indicates the Elec- Activation/Malfunction Indicator system is in the “Partial Off” mode. tronic Stability Control Light” also flashes when TCS is active. (ESC) is off.

251 WARNING! TIRE SAFETY NOTE: • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing If TSC activates while driving, slow INFORMATION is based on U.S. design standards. the vehicle down, stop at the near- Tire Markings P-Metric tires have the letter “P” est safe location, and adjust the molded into the sidewall preced- trailer load to eliminate trailer ing the size designation. Ex- sway. ample: P215/65R15 95H. HILL START ASSIST (HSA) • European-Metric tire sizing is The HSA system is designed to assist based on European design stan- the driver when starting a vehicle dards. Tires designed to this from a stop on a hill. HSA will main- standard have the tire size tain the level of brake pressure the molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The driver applied for a short period of 1—U.S.DOT 4 — Maximum time after the driver takes their foot Safety Standards Load letter "P" is absent from this tire off of the brake pedal. If the driver Code (TIN) size designation. 2—Size Designa- 5 — Maximum Example: 215/65R15 96H. does not apply the throttle during this tion Pressure short period of time, the system will 3 — Service De- 6 — Treadwear, • LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire siz- scription Traction and Tem- release brake pressure and the vehicle perature Grades ing is based on U.S. design stan- will roll down the hill. The system will dards. The size designation for release brake pressure in proportion LT-Metric tires is the same as for to the amount of throttle applied as P-Metric tires except for the let- the vehicle starts to move in the in- ters “LT” that are molded into the tended direction of travel. sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

252 • Temporary spare tires are de- • High flotation tire sizing is signed for temporary emergency based on U.S. design standards use only. Temporary high pres- and it begins with the tire diam- sure compact spare tires have eter molded into the sidewall. the letter “T” or “S” molded into Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Size Designation: P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards TorS= Temporary spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — "R" means radial construction — "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

253 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: "....blank...." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

254 Tire Identification Number code may only be on one side. Tires of black sidewall tires as mounted on (TIN) with white sidewalls will have the full the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on TIN, including the date code, located the outboard side, then you will find it The TIN may be found on one or both on the white sidewall side of the tire. on the inboard side of the tire. sides of the tire, however, the date Look for the TIN on the outboard side EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) — 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) — 01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

255 Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on Pressure the tire placard. Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. Tire Loading And Tire Tire And Loading Information Pressure Placard Tire And Loading Information This placard tells you important Placard Location information about the: NOTE: The proper cold tire infla- 1) Number of people that can be tion pressure is listed on the driv- carried in the vehicle. er’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge 2) Total weight your vehicle can of the driver's side door. B-Pillar Location For Tire And carry. Loading Information Placard

256 3) Tire size designed for your vehicle. and Loading Information placard. (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = 4) Cold tire inflation pressures for The combined weight of occupants, 650 lbs [295 kg]). the front, rear, and spare tires. cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never 5. Determine the combined weight of Loading exceed the weight referenced here. luggage and cargo being loaded on the The vehicle maximum load on the tire Steps For Determining Correct vehicle. That weight may not safely must not exceed the load carrying ca- Load Limit exceed the available cargo and luggage pacity of the tire on your vehicle. You load capacity calculated in Step 4. will not exceed the tire's load carrying 1. Locate the statement “The com- capacity if you adhere to the loading bined weight of occupants and cargo NOTE: should never exceed XXX lbs or conditions, tire size, and cold tire in- • If your vehicle will be towing a XXX kg” on your vehicle's placard. flation pressures specified on the Tire trailer, load from your trailer and Loading Information placard and 2. Determine the combined weight of will be transferred to your ve- in the “Vehicle Loading” section of the driver and passengers that will be hicle. The following table shows this manual. riding in your vehicle. examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and NOTE: Under a maximum loaded 3. Subtract the combined weight of towing capacities of your vehicle vehicle condition, gross axle the driver and passengers from with varying seating configura- weight ratings (GAWRs) for the XXX lbs or XXX kg. front and rear axles must not be tions and number and size of exceeded. For further information 4. The resulting figure equals the occupants. This table is for il- on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and available amount of cargo and luggage lustration purposes only and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle load capacity. For example, if “XXX” may not be accurate for the seat- Loading” in this section. amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and ing and load carry capacity of there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passen- your vehicle. To determine the maximum loading gers in your vehicle, the amount of • For the following example, the conditions of your vehicle, locate the available cargo and luggage load capac- combined weight of occupants statement “The combined weight of ity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs occupants and cargo should never ex- and cargo should never exceed ceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the Tire 865 lbs (392 kg).

257 TIRES — GENERAL Safety WARNING! INFORMATION WARNING! Overloading of your tires is danger- Tire Pressure ous. Overloading can cause tire • Improperly inflated tires are dan- failure, affect vehicle handling, and Proper tire inflation pressure is essen- gerous and can cause collisions. increase your stopping distance. tial to the safe and satisfactory opera- • Under-inflation increases tire Use tires of the recommended load tion of your vehicle. Three primary flexing and can result in over- capacity for your vehicle. Never areas are affected by improper tire heating and tire failure. overload them. pressure: (Continued)

258 increases tire rolling resistance result- At least once a month: WARNING! (Continued) ing in higher fuel consumption. • Over-inflation reduces a tire's • Check and adjust tire pressure with ability to cushion shock. Objects Ride Comfort And Vehicle a good quality pocket-type pressure on the road and chuckholes can Stability gauge. Do not make a visual judge- ment when determining proper in- cause damage that result in tire Proper tire inflation contributes to a flation. Tires may look properly in- failure. comfortable ride. Over-inflation pro- flated even when they are under- • Over-inflated or under-inflated duces a jarring and uncomfortable inflated. tires can affect vehicle handling ride. Both under-inflation and over- and can fail suddenly, resulting in inflation affect the stability of the ve- • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or loss of vehicle control. hicle and can produce a feeling of visible damage. • Unequal tire pressures can cause sluggish response or over responsive- steering problems. You could lose ness in the steering. CAUTION! control of your vehicle. NOTE: • Unequal tire pressures from one After inspecting or adjusting the side of the vehicle to the other can • Unequal tire pressures from side tire pressure, always reinstall the cause the vehicle to drift to the to side may cause erratic and valve stem cap. This will prevent right or left. unpredictable steering re- moisture and dirt from entering the • Always drive with each tire in- sponse. valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. flated to the recommended cold • Unequal tire pressure from side tire inflation pressure. to side may cause the vehicle to Inflation pressures specified on the drift left or right. Economy placard are always “cold tire inflation Tire Inflation Pressures pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure Improper inflation pressures can is defined as the tire pressure after the cause uneven wear patterns to de- The proper cold tire inflation pressure vehicle has not been driven for at least velop across the tire tread. These ab- is listed on the driver's side “B” Pillar three hours, or driven less than normal wear patterns will reduce or rear edge of the driver's side door. 1.6 km after a three hour period. The tread life resulting in a need for earlier cold tire inflation pressure must not tire replacement. Under-inflation also

259 exceed the maximum inflation pres- Tire Pressures For High Radial Ply Tires sure molded into the tire sidewall. Speed Operation Check tire pressures more often if The manufacturer advocates driving WARNING! subject to a wide range of outdoor at safe speeds and within posted speed Combining radial ply tires with temperatures, as tire pressures vary limits. Where speed limits or condi- other types of tires on your vehicle with temperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be will cause your vehicle to handle Tire pressures change by approxi- driven at high speeds, maintaining poorly. The instability could cause mately 7 kPa per 7°C of air tempera- correct tire inflation pressure is very a collision. Always use radial ply ture change. Keep this in mind when important. Increased tire pressure tires in sets of four. Never combine checking tire pressure inside a garage, and reduced vehicle loading may be them with other types of tires. especially in the winter. required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire Tire Repair Example: If garage temperature = dealer or original equipment vehicle 20°C and the outside temperature = If your tire becomes damaged, it may dealer for recommended safe operat- 0°C then the cold tire inflation pres- be repaired if it meets the following ing speeds, loading and cold tire infla- sure should be increased by 21 kPa, criteria: tion pressures. which equals 7 kPa for every 7°C for • The tire has not been driven on this outside temperature condition. when flat. WARNING! Tire pressure may increase from 13 to • The damage is only on the tread High speed driving with your ve- 40 kPa during operation. DO NOT section of your tire (sidewall dam- hicle under maximum load is dan- reduce this normal pressure build up age is not repairable). or your tire pressure will be too low. gerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You • The puncture is no greater than 6 could have a serious collision. Do mm. not drive a vehicle loaded to the Consult an authorized tire dealer for maximum capacity at continuous tire repairs and additional informa- speeds above 120 km/h. tion.

260 Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat summer tires, be aware these tires are speeds over 120 km/h. For speeds tires that have experienced a loss of not designed for winter or cold driving above 120 km/h refer to original pressure should be replaced immedi- conditions. For more information, equipment or an authorized tire ately with another Run Flat tire of contact a authorized dealer. Summer dealer for recommended safe operat- identical size and service description tires do not contain the all season ing speeds, loading and cold tire infla- (Load Index and Speed Code). designation or mountain/snowflake tion pressures. symbol on the tire sidewall. Tire Types While studded tires improve perfor- Use summer tires only in sets of four; mance on ice, skid and traction capa- All Season Tires (for failure to do so may adversely affect bility on wet or dry surfaces may be versions/markets, where the safety and handling of your ve- poorer than that of non-studded tires. provided) hicle. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be All Season tires provide traction for Snow Tires all seasons (spring, summer, fall and checked before using these tire types. Some areas of the country require the winter). Traction levels may vary be- Run Flat Tires (for tween different all season tires. All use of snow tires during the winter. season tires can be identified by the Snow tires can be identified by a versions/markets, where M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on mountain/snowflake symbol on the provided) tire sidewall. the tire sidewall. Use all season tires Run Flat tires allow you the capability only in sets of four; failure to do so If you need snow tires, select tires to drive 80 km at 80 km/h after a may adversely affect the safety and equivalent in size and type to the rapid loss of inflation pressure. This handling of your vehicle. original equipment tires. Use snow rapid loss of inflation is referred to as Summer Or Three Season Tires tires only in sets of four; failure to do the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode (for versions/markets, where so may adversely affect the safety and occurs when the tire inflation pressure provided) handling of your vehicle. is of/or below 96 kPa. Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it Snow tires generally have lower speed Summer tires provide traction in both has limited driving capabilities and ratings than what was originally wet and dry conditions, and are not needs to be replaced immediately. A equipped with your vehicle and intended to be driven in snow or on Run Flat tire is not repairable. ice. If your vehicle is equipped with should not be operated at sustained

261 It is not recommended driving a ve- Spare Tire Matching Original Since this tire has limited tread life, hicle loaded at full capacity or to tow Equipped Tire And Wheel (for the original equipment tire should be a trailer while a tire is in the run flat versions/markets, where repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled mode. provided) on your vehicle at the first opportunity. See the tire pressure monitoring sec- Your vehicle may be equipped with a tion for more information. spare tire and wheel equivalent in Do not install a wheel cover or at- look and function to the original Spare Tires (for tempt to mount a conventional tire on equipment tire and wheel found on the compact spare wheel, since the versions/markets, where the front or rear axle of your vehicle. wheel is designed specifically for the provided) This spare tire may be used in the tire compact spare tire. Do not install rotation for your vehicle. If your ve- NOTE: For vehicles equipped more than one compact spare tire and hicle has this option, refer to an au- with TIREFIT instead of a spare wheel on the vehicle at any given time. thorized tire dealer for the recom- tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” mended tire rotation pattern. in “In an emergency” for further WARNING! information. Compact Spare Tire (for Compact spares are for temporary versions/markets, where provided) emergency use only. With these CAUTION! The compact spare is for temporary spares, do not drive more than emergency use only. You can identify if 80 km/h. Temporary use spares Because of the reduced ground your vehicle is equipped with a com- have limited tread life. When the clearance, do not take your vehicle pact spare by looking at the spare tire tread is worn to the tread wear in- through an automatic car wash description on the Tire and Loading dicators, the temporary use spare with a compact, full size or limited- Information Placard located on the tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to use temporary spare installed. driver’s side door opening or on the follow the warnings, which apply to Damage to the vehicle may result. sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire your spare. Failure to do so could descriptions begin with the letter “T” result in spare tire failure and loss or “S” preceding the size designation. of vehicle control. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T,S=Temporary Spare Tire 262 Full Size Spare (for rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Tire Spinning versions/markets, where Installation of this limited-use spare When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice provided) tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is conditions, do not spin your vehicle's not the same as your original equip- The full size spare is for temporary wheels above 48 km/h or for longer ment tire, replace (or repair) the origi- emergency use only. This tire may than 30 seconds continuously without nal equipment tire and reinstall on the look like the originally equipped tire stopping. on the front or rear axle of your ve- vehicle at the first opportunity. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in hicle, but it is not. This spare tire may “In an emergency” for further infor- have limited tread life. When the WARNING! mation. tread is worn to the tread wear indi- Limited-use spares are for emer- cators, the temporary use full size gency use only. Installation of this spare tire needs to be replaced. Since limited-use spare tire affects ve- WARNING! it is not the same as your original hicle handling. With this tire, do Fast spinning tires can be danger- equipment tire, replace (or repair) the not drive more than the speed listed ous. Forces generated by excessive original equipment tire and reinstall on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep wheel speeds may cause tire dam- on the vehicle at the first opportunity. inflated to the cold tire inflation age or failure. A tire could explode Limited-Use Spare (for pressures listed on your Tire and and injure someone. Do not spin versions/markets, where Loading Information Placard lo- your vehicle's wheels faster than provided) cated on the driver’s side B-Pillar or 48 km/h for more than 30 seconds the rear edge of the driver’s side continuously when you are stuck, The limited-use spare tire is for tem- door. Replace (or repair) the origi- and do not let anyone near a spin- porary emergency use only. This tire is nal equipment tire at the first op- ning wheel, no matter what the identified by a label located on the portunity and reinstall it on your speed. limited-use spare wheel. This label vehicle. Failure to do so could result contains the driving limitations for in loss of vehicle control. this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or

263 Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as Tread wear indicators are in the origi- The service life of a tire is dependent possible. Protect tires from contact nal equipment tires to help you in upon varying factors including, but with oil, grease, and gasoline. determining when your tires should not limited to: be replaced. Replacement Tires • Driving style The tires on your new vehicle provide • Tire pressure a balance of many characteristics. • Distance driven They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation • Performance tires, tires with a pressure. The manufacturer strongly speed rating of V or higher, and recommends that you use tires summer tires typically have a re- equivalent to the originals in size, duced tread life. Rotation of these quality and performance when re- tires per the vehicle maintenance 1—WornTire placement is needed. Refer to the schedule is highly recommended. 2 — New Tire paragraph on “Tread Wear Indica- tors”. Refer to the Tire and Loading These indicators are molded into the WARNING! Information placard or the Vehicle bottom of the tread grooves. They will Tires and the spare tire should be Certification Label for the size desig- appear as bands when the tread depth replaced after six years, regardless nation of your tire. The Load Index becomes 2 mm. When the tread is of the remaining tread. Failure to and Speed Symbol for your tire will be worn to the tread wear indicators, the follow this warning can result in found on the original equipment tire tire should be replaced. Refer to “Re- sudden tire failure. You could lose sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart placement Tires” in this section for control and have a collision result- example found in the Tire Safety In- further information. ing in serious injury or death. formation section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

264 It is recommended to replace the two WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously • Do not use a tire, wheel size or • Failure to equip your vehicle with affect your vehicle’s handling. If you rating other than that specified for tires having adequate speed capa- ever replace a wheel, make sure that your vehicle. Some combinations bility can result in sudden tire fail- the wheel’s specifications match those of unapproved tires and wheels ure and loss of vehicle control. of the original wheels. may change suspension dimen- sions and performance character- It is recommended you contact your istics, resulting in changes to steer- CAUTION! authorized tire dealer or original ing, handling, and braking of your Replacing original tires with tires of equipment dealer with any questions vehicle. This can cause unpredict- a different size may result in false you may have on tire specifications or able handling and stress to steer- speedometer and odometer read- capability. Failure to use equivalent ing and suspension components. replacement tires may adversely af- You could lose control and have a ings. fect the safety, handling, and ride of collision resulting in serious injury your vehicle. or death. Use only the tire and TIRE CHAINS wheel sizes with load ratings ap- (TRACTION DEVICES) proved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller Use of traction devices require suffi- load index or capacity, other than cient tire-to-body clearance. Follow what was originally equipped on these recommendations to guard your vehicle. Using a tire with a against damage. smaller load index could result in • Traction device must be of proper tire overloading and failure. You size for the tire, as recommended by could lose control and have a col- the traction device manufacturer. lision. • Install on Rear Tires Only (Continued) • Due to limited clearance, on a 225/ 65R17 102H, use reduced size snow chains or traction devices

265 with a maximum projection of and braking functions. For these rea- CAUTION! (Continued) 6 mm beyond the tire profile. sons, they wear at unequal rates. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after These effects can be reduced by WARNING! driving about 0.8 km. timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile Using tires of different size and type • Do not exceed 48 km/h. with aggressive tread designs such as (M+S, Snow) between front and • Drive cautiously and avoid severe those on all season type tires. Rotation rear axles can cause unpredictable turns and large bumps, especially will increase tread life, help to main- handling. You could lose control with a loaded vehicle. and have a collision. tain mud, snow and wet traction lev- • Do not drive for prolonged period els, and contribute to a smooth, quiet on dry pavement. ride. CAUTION! • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on NOTE: Rotate tires at the first To avoid damage to your vehicle or the method of installation, oper- sign of irregular wear. tires, observe the following precau- ating speed, and conditions for tions: use. Always use the suggested op- TIRE PRESSURE • Because of restricted traction de- erating speed of the device manu- MONITOR SYSTEM vice clearance between tires and facturer’s if it is less than (TPMS) other suspension components, it 48 km/h. is important that only traction • Do not use traction devices on a The TPMS will warn the driver of a devices in good condition are compact spare tire. low tire pressure based on the cold used. Broken devices can cause inflation tire pressure requirements serious damage. Stop the vehicle TIRE ROTATION found on the tire placard located on immediately if noise occurs that the driver's-side B-pillar. could indicate device breakage. RECOMMENDATIONS The tire pressure will vary with tem- Remove the damaged parts of the The tires on the front and rear of your perature by about 0.07 BAR for every device before further use. vehicle operate at different loads and 7°C. This means that when the out- (Continued) perform different steering, driving, side temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure

266 should always be set based on cold in order for the “Tire Pressure Moni- CAUTION! inflation tire pressure. This is defined toring Telltale Light” to be turned off. as the tire pressure after a vehicle has The system will automatically update • The TPMS has been optimized not been driven for more than three and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring for the original equipment tires hours - and in outside ambient tem- Telltale Light” will extinguish once and wheels. TPMS pressures have perature. Refer to “Tires – General the updated tire pressures have been been established for the tire size Information” in “Starting and Op- received. The vehicle may need to be equipped on your vehicle. Unde- erating” for information on how to driven for up to 20 minutes above sirable system operation or sensor properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. 24 km/h to receive this information. damage may result when using The tire pressure will also increase as replacement equipment that is For example, your vehicle may have a the vehicle is driven - this is normal not of the same size, type, and/or recommended cold (parked for more and there should be no adjustment for style. Aftermarket wheels can than three hours) tire pressure of 2.4 this increased pressure. cause sensor damage. It is recom- BAR. If the ambient temperature is mended not to use aftermarket The TPMS will warn the driver of a 20°C and the measured tire pressure sealants or balance beads if your low tire pressure if the tire pressure is 2.1 BAR, a temperature drop to vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, falls below the low pressure warning -7°C will decrease the tire pressure to as damage to the sensors may re- threshold for any reason, including approximately 1.8 BAR. This tire sult. In case of use of aftermarket low temperature effects, or natural air pressure is sufficiently low enough to tire sealants not equivalent to the pressure loss through the tire. turn on the “Tire Pressure Monitoring original TIREFIT sealant, please Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle The TPMS will continue to warn the take your vehicle to a authorized may cause the tire pressure to rise to driver of low tire pressure as long as dealer to have the sensor function approximately 2.1 BAR, but the “Tire the condition exists, and will not turn checked. Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” off until the tire pressure is at or above • After inspecting or adjusting the will still be on. In this situation, the recommended cold tire placard pres- tire pressure always reinstall the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale sure. Once the low tire pressure warn- valve stem cap. This will prevent Light” will turn off only after the tires ing has been illuminated, the tire moisture and dirt from entering have been inflated to the vehicle’s rec- pressure must be increased to the rec- the valve stem, which could dam- ommended cold tire pressure value. ommended cold tire placard pressure age the TPMS sensor.

267 NOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes Tire Pressure Monitoring Low will affect tire pressure, and the Tire Pressure Warnings • The TPMS is not intended to re- TPMS will monitor the actual place normal tire care and tire pressure in the tire. maintenance, or to provide The “Tire Pressure Moni- warning of a tire failure or con- BASE SYSTEM toring Telltale Light” will dition. illuminate in the instru- The TPMS uses wireless technology ment cluster, an “Inflate • The TPMS should not be used as with wheel rim mounted electronic Tire to XX” message and a "TIRE a tire pressure gauge while ad- sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. LOW PRESSURE" message will dis- justing your tire pressure. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as play in the instrument cluster, and an part of the valve stem, transmit tire • Driving on a significantly under- audible chime will be activated when pressure readings to the Receiver inflated tire causes the tire to one or more of the four active road tire Module. overheat and can lead to tire pressures are low. The recommended failure. Under-inflation also re- NOTE: It is particularly impor- cold placard pressure inflation value duces fuel efficiency and tire tant for you to check the tire pres- is the pressure value displayed in the tread life, and may affect the ve- sure in all of your tires regularly "Inflate Tire to XX" message dis- hicle’s handling and stopping and to maintain the proper pres- played in the EVIC. Should this occur, ability. sure. you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each • The TPMS is not a substitute for The Basic TPMS consists of the fol- tire on your vehicle, and inflate each proper tire maintenance, and it lowing components: tire to the vehicle's recommended cold is the driver's responsibility to • Receiver Module tire pressure value (located on the maintain correct tire pressure, placard on the driver's-side B-Pillar). using an accurate tire pressure • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring The system will automatically update gage, even if under-inflation has Sensors and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring not reached the level to trigger • TPMS Telltale Warning Light Telltale Light” will extinguish once illumination of the “Tire Pres- the updated tire pressures have been sure Monitoring Telltale Light.” received.

268 NOTE: The vehicle may need to 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped 5. Once you repair or replace the be driven for up to 20 minutes with TPMS sensors. original road tire and reinstall it on above 24 km/h to receive this in- the vehicle in place of the compact Vehicles With Compact Spare formation. spare tire, the TPMS will automati- 1. The compact spare tire (for cally update, and the “Tire Pressure The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- versions/markets, where provided) Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn tale Light” will flash on and off for 75 does not have a TPMS sensor. There- off as long as no tire pressure is below seconds, and remain on solid when a fore the TPMS will not monitor the the low-pressure warning limit in any system fault is detected. The system pressure in the compact spare tire. of the four active road tires. The ve- fault will also sound a chime. If the hicle may need to be driven for up to ignition switch is cycled, this se- 2. If you install the compact spare 20 minutes above 24 km/h for the quence will repeat, providing the sys- tire in place of a road tire that has a TPMS to receive this information. tem fault still exists. The “Tire Pres- pressure below the low-pressure sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will warning limit, upon the next ignition TPMS Deactivation And turn off when the fault condition no switch cycle, a chime will sound, a Reactivation longer exists. A system fault can occur "TIRE LOW PRESSURE" and "In- The TPMS can be deactivated if re- with any of the following scenarios: flate Tire to XX" message will be dis- placing all four wheel and tire assem- played and the “Tire Pressure Moni- 1. Jamming due to electronic devices blies (road tires) with wheel and tire toring Telltale Light” will turn on. or driving next to facilities emitting assemblies that do not have TPMS the same radio frequencies as the 3. After driving for up to 20 minutes Sensors, such as when installing win- TPMS sensors. above 24 km/h, the “Tire Pressure ter wheel and tire assemblies on your Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, 2. Installing some form of aftermar- on and off for 75 seconds and then replace all four wheel and tire assem- ket window tinting that affects radio remain on solid. blies (road tires) with those not wave signals. equipped with TPM Sensors. Then, 4. For each subsequent ignition 3. Accumulation of excessive snow drive the vehicle for at least 20 min- switch cycle, a chime will sound, the and/or ice around the wheels or wheel utes above 24 km/h. The TPMS will “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale housings. chime and the “TPM Telltale Light” Light” will flash on and off for 75 will flash on and off for 75 seconds 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. seconds and then remain on solid. and then remain on solid. Upon the 269 next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS The Premium TPMS consists of the will no longer chime or turn on the following components: “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale • Receiver Module Light.” To reactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire assem- • Four TPMS Sensors blies (road tires) with those equipped • Various TPMS messages, which with TPM Sensors. Then, drive the display in the Electronic Vehicle In- vehicle for up to 20 minutes above formation Center (EVIC), and 24 km/h. The TPMS will chime and Low Tire Pressure Display graphics displaying tire pressures the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Should a low tire condition occur on Light” will flash on and off for 75 • TPMS Telltale Warning Light any of the four active road tire(s), you seconds. TPMS Low Pressure Warnings should stop as soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing PREMIUM SYSTEM (for The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- versions/markets, where on the graphic display to the vehicle’s tale Light” will illuminate in the in- recommended cold tire pressure provided) strument cluster, and an audible value. The system will automatically chime will be activated when one or The TPMS uses wireless technology update, the “Inflate Tire to XX” mes- more of the four active road tire pres- with wheel rim-mounted electronic sage will no longer be displayed, the sures are low. In addition, the EVIC sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. graphic display of the pressure val- will display a “Inflate Tire to XX” Sensors mounted to each wheel as ue(s) will stop flashing, and the “Tire message and a “LOW TIRE” message part of the valve stem transmit tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” in the graphic display with the pres- pressure readings to the Receiver will extinguish once the updated tire sure value(s) with the low tire(s) Module. pressure(s) have been received. The flashing. The recommended cold vehicle may need to be driven for up NOTE: It is particularly impor- placard pressure inflation value is the to 20 minutes above 24 km/h to re- tant to regularly check and main- pressure value displayed in the “In- ceive this information. tain proper tire pressure in all the flate Tire to XX” message displayed in tires. the EVIC.

270 SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Message SYSTEM” message will not be pres- still shown. This indicates that the The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- ent, and a pressure value will be dis- pressure values are still being received tale Light” will flash on and off for 75 played instead of dashes. A system from the TPM sensors but they may seconds, and remain on solid when a fault can occur by any of the following not be in the correct vehicle position. system fault is detected. The system scenarios: The system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE TPM SYS- fault will also sound a chime. The 1. Jamming due to electronic devices TEM” message exists. EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM or driving next to facilities emitting SYSTEM” message for a minimum of the same radio frequencies as the Vehicles With Compact Spare five seconds. This text message is then TPMS sensors. followed by a graphic display, with -- 1. The compact spare tire (for in place of the pressure value(s) indi- 2. Installing some form of aftermar- versions/markets, where provided) cating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not ket window tinting that affects radio does not have a TPMS. Therefore, the being received. wave signals. TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around the wheels or wheel 2. If you install the compact spare housings. tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. warning limit, upon the next ignition 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure Moni- with TPMS sensors. toring Telltale Light” will remain on, the “Inflate Tire to XX” message and The EVIC will also display a “SER- SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Display the "LOW TIRE" message will be dis- VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a played, a chime will sound, and the If the ignition switch is cycled, this minimum of five seconds when a sys- EVIC will still display a flashing pres- sequence will repeat, providing the tem fault possibly related to an incor- sure value in the graphic display. system fault still exists. If the system rect sensor location fault is present. In fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pres- this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYS- 3. After driving the vehicle for up to sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will TEM” message is then followed by a 20 minutes above 24 km/h, the “Tire no longer flash, the “SERVICE TPM graphic display with pressure values Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”

271 will flash on and off for 75 seconds pressure is below the low pressure and the graphic will display “- -“ in and then remain on solid. In addition, warning limit in any of the four active place of four tire pressure values. the EVIC will display a “SERVICE road tires. Upon the next ignition switch cycle, TPM SYSTEM” message for a mini- the TPMS will no longer chime or turn NOTE: The vehicle may need to mum of five seconds and then display on the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- be driven for up to 20 minutes dashes (- -) in place of the pressure tale Light” or display the text message above 24 km/h in order for the value. in the EVIC. However, the graphic TPMS to receive this information. will still display “- -.“ 4. For each subsequent ignition TPMS DEACTIVATION AND switch cycle, a chime will sound, the To reactivate the TPMS, first, replace REACTIVATION “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale all four wheel and tire assemblies Light” will flash on and off for 75 The TPMS can be deactivated if re- (road tires) with those equipped with seconds and then remain on solid, and placing all four wheel and tire assem- TPM Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle the EVIC will display a “SERVICE blies (road tires) with wheel and tire for up to 20 minutes above 24 km/h. TPM SYSTEM” message for a mini- assemblies that do not have TPMS The TPMS will chime and the “Tire mum of five seconds and then display Sensors, such as when installing win- Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” dashes (- -) in place of the pressure ter wheel and tire assemblies on your will flash on and off for 75 seconds, value. vehicle. the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message, and the 5. Once you repair or replace the To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace graphic will display tire pressure val- original road tire, and reinstall it on all four wheel and tire assemblies ues to show that the TPMS is receiving the vehicle in place of the compact (road tires) with those not equipped sensor data. spare, the TPMS will update auto- with TPM Sensors. Then, drive the matically. In addition, the “Tire Pres- vehicle for at least 20 minutes above FUEL REQUIREMENTS sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will 24 km/h. The TPMS will chime and turn off and the graphic in the EVIC the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale — GASOLINE ENGINE will display a new pressure value in- Light” will flash on and off for 75 All engines are designed to meet all stead of dashes (- -), as long no tire seconds and then remain on solid. In emissions regulations and provide ex- addition, the Electronic Vehicle Infor- cellent fuel economy and performance mation Center (EVIC) will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message, 272 when using high quality unleaded METHANOL supplier may reduce the risk of ex- gasoline with a minimum research oc- ceeding this 10% limit and/or of re- (Methyl or Wood Alcohol) is used in a tane rating (RON) of 91. ceiving fuel with abnormal properties. variety of concentrations when It should also be noted that an in- Light spark knock at low engine blended with unleaded gasoline. You crease in fuel consumption should be speeds is not harmful to your engine. may find fuels containing 3% or more expected when using ethanol-blended However, continued heavy spark methanol along with other alcohols fuels, due to the lower energy content knock at high speeds can cause dam- called cosolvents. Problems that re- of ethanol. age and immediate service is required. sult from using methanol/gasoline or E-85 Ethanol blends are not the re- Problems that result from using Poor quality gasoline can cause prob- sponsibility of the manufacturer. methanol/gasoline or E-85 Ethanol lems such as hard starting, stalling, While MTBE is an oxygenate made blends are not the responsibility of the and hesitations. If you experience from Methanol, it does not have the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxy- these symptoms, try another brand of negative effects of Methanol. genate made from Methanol, it does gasoline before considering service for not have the negative effects of the vehicle. Methanol. Over 40 automobile manufacturer's CAUTION! Do not use gasolines containing world wide have issued and endorsed CAUTION! consistent gasoline specifications (the Methanol. Use of these blends may World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) result in starting and drivability Use of fuel with Ethanol content which define fuel properties necessary problems and may damage critical higher than 10% may result in en- to deliver enhanced emissions, perfor- fuel system components. gine malfunction, starting and op- mance, and durability for your ve- erating difficulties, and materials hicle. The manufacturer recommends ETHANOL degradation. These adverse effects could result in permanent damage the use of gasoline that meets the The manufacturer recommends that to your vehicle. WWFC specifications if they are your vehicle be operated on fuel con- available. taining no more than 10% ethanol. Purchasing your fuel from a reputable

273 CLEAN AIR GASOLINE you should ask your gasoline retailer WARNING! whether or not his/her gasoline con- Many gasolines are now being tains MMT. Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust blended that contribute to cleaner air, gases is deadly. Follow the precau- especially in those areas where air MATERIALS ADDED TO tions below to prevent carbon mon- pollution levels are high. These new FUEL oxide poisoning: blends provide a cleaner burning fuel • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They Besides using unleaded gasoline with and some are referred to as “reformu- contain carbon monoxide, a col- the proper octane rating, gasolines lated gasoline.” orless and odorless gas which can that contain detergents, corrosion and kill. Never run the engine in a The manufacturer supports these ef- stability additives are recommended. closed area, such as a garage, and forts toward cleaner air. You can help Using gasolines that have these addi- never sit in a parked vehicle with by using these blends as they become tives will help improve fuel economy, the engine running for an ex- available. reduce emissions, and maintain ve- tended period of time. If the vehicle performance. MMT IN GASOLINE hicle is stopped in an open area MMT is a manganese containing me- Indiscriminate use of fuel system with the engine running for more tallic additive that is blended into cleaning agents should be avoided. than a short period, adjust the some gasoline to increase octane. Many of these materials intended for ventilation system to force fresh, Gasoline blended with MMT provides gum and varnish removal may con- outside air into the vehicle. no performance advantage beyond tain active solvents or similar ingredi- • Guard against carbon monoxide gasoline of the same octane number ents. These can harm fuel system gas- with proper maintenance. Have without MMT. Gasoline blended with ket and diaphragm materials. the exhaust system inspected ev- MMT reduces spark plug life and re- ery time the vehicle is raised. duces emission system performance in Have any abnormal conditions some vehicles. The manufacturer rec- repaired promptly. Until re- ommends that gasoline without MMT paired, drive with all side win- be used in your vehicle. The MMT dows fully open. content of gasoline may not be indi- (Continued) cated on the gasoline pump; therefore,

274 WARNING! (Continued) ADDING FUEL CAUTION! • Keep the liftgate closed when LOCKING FUEL FILLER • Damage to the fuel system or driving your vehicle to prevent CAP (GAS CAP) (for emissions control system could carbon monoxide and other poi- versions/markets, where result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap). sonous exhaust gases from enter- provided) ing the vehicle. A poorly fitting cap could let im- The locking fuel filler cap is located purities into the fuel system and FUEL REQUIREMENTS behind the fuel filler door, on the left may cause the “Malfunction Indi- — DIESEL ENGINE side of the vehicle. If the cap is lost or cator Light (MIL)” to turn on, damaged, be sure the replacement cap due to fuel vapors escaping from Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels has been designed for use with this the system. with a Cetane rating of 50 or higher, vehicle. • To avoid fuel spillage and over- and meeting the EN590 standard are filling, do not “top off” the fuel NOTE: The driver's side sliding highly recommended. See your autho- tank after filling. door cannot be opened while the rized dealer for further information fuel door is open. This feature op- regarding fuels available in your area. erates only when the sliding door WARNING! BIODIESEL FUEL is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door. • Never have any smoking materi- REQUIREMENTS als lit in or near the vehicle when 1. Insert the fuel cap key into the key the gas cap is removed or the tank A maximum blend of 7% biodiesel cylinder and turn the key to the right is being filled. meeting the EN590 standard are also to unlock. recommended for use with your diesel • Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may cause the MIL to engine. See your authorized dealer for 2. Turn the gas cap knob to the left to turn on and could cause a fire. further information regarding fuels remove the cap. available in your area. 3. When tightening the filler cap, (Continued) tighten until two or three clicks are heard to ensure that the cap is properly seated. 275 carefully review this information to temporary) loaded in or on the trailer WARNING! (Continued) tow your load as efficiently and safely in its "loaded and ready for opera- • A fire may result if gasoline is as possible. tion" condition. The recommended pumped into a portable container way to measure GTW is to put your that is inside of a vehicle. You To maintain the New Vehicle Limited fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. could be burned. Always place Warranty coverage, follow the re- The entire weight of the trailer must gas containers on the ground quirements and recommendations in be supported by the scale. while filling. this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) NOTE: COMMON TOWING The GCWR is the total permissible • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or DEFINITIONS weight of your vehicle and trailer shuts off, the fuel tank is full. The following trailer towing related when weighed in combination. • Tighten the fuel filler cap until definitions will assist you in under- NOTE: The GCWR rating in- you hear a “clicking” sound. This standing the following information: cludes a 68 kg allowance for the is an indication that the fuel filler presence of a driver. cap is properly tightened. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may come on. The GVWR is the total allowable weight The GAWR is the maximum capacity of your vehicle. This includes driver, Be sure the gas cap is tightened of the front and rear axles. Distribute passengers, cargo and trailer tongue every time the vehicle is refueled. the load over the front and rear axles weight. The total load must be limited evenly. Make sure that you do not so that you do not exceed the GVWR. TRAILER TOWING exceed either front or rear GAWR. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type The GTW is the weight of the trailer of towing you can reasonably do with plus the weight of all cargo, consum- your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, ables and equipment (permanent or

276 WARNING! WARNING! With Attachment Point It is important that you do not ex- An improperly adjusted hitch sys- 1. For detachable tow bar pass the ceed the maximum front or rear tem may reduce handling, stability cable through the attachment point GAWR. A dangerous driving condi- and braking performance and and clip it back onto itself. tion can result if either rating is could result in an accident. Consult exceeded. You could lose control of with your hitch and trailer manu- the vehicle and have an accident. facturer or a reputable trailer/ caravan dealer for additional infor- Trailer Tongue Weight (TW) mation. The tongue weight is the downward Frontal Area force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be The frontal area is the maximum less than 7% or more than 10% of the height multiplied by the maximum Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method trailer load. Trailer tongue weight width of the front of a trailer. 2. For fixed ball tow bar attach the must not exceed the lesser of either the clip directly to the designated point. hitch certification rating, or the trailer BREAKAWAY CABLE This alternative must be specifically tongue chassis rating. It should never ATTACHMENT permitted by the trailer manufacturer be less than 4% of the trailer load, and European braking regulations for since the clip may not be sufficiently not less than 25 kg. You must consider braked trailers up to 3 500 kg, require strong for use in the way. tongue load as part of the load on your trailers to be fitted with either a sec- vehicle and its GAWR. ondary coupling or breakaway cable. The recommended location for attaching the normal trailer's breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch receiver. Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method

277 Without Attachment Points Trailer Towing Weights Trailer And Tongue Weight (Maximum Trailer Weight 1. For detachable ball tow bar you Loads balanced over the wheels or Ratings) must follow the recommended manu- heavier in the rear can cause the facturer or supplier procedure. The following chart provides the trailer to sway severely side to side maximum trailer weight ratings tow- which will cause loss of control of the able for your given drivetrain. vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of Engine/ Max. Trailer many trailer accidents. Trans- GTW Tongue mission (Gross Weight Never exceed the maximum trailer Trailer (See tongue weight stamped on your trailer Weight) Note) hitch. Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method All 1 600 kg 65 kg Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle 2. For fixed ball tow bar loop the Maximum trailer towing speed of the vehicle: cable around the neck of the tow ball. is limited to 100 km/h unless If you fit the cable like this, use a local laws require a lower • The tongue weight of the trailer. speed. single loop only. • The weight of any other type of NOTE: The trailer tongue weight cargo or equipment put in or on must be considered as part of the your vehicle. combined weight of occupants and • The weight of the driver and all cargo, and should never exceed the passengers. weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The NOTE: Remember that every- Tire and Loading Information thing put into or on the trailer adds placard is located on the drivers to the load on your vehicle. Also, Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method door pillar. additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the

278 total load on your vehicle. Refer to WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) the Tire and Loading Information placard, located on the drivers Improper towing can lead to an in- • Safety chains must always be door pillar, for the maximum com- jury accident. Follow these guide- used between your vehicle and bined weight of occupants and lines to make your trailer towing as trailer. Always connect the chains cargo for your vehicle. safe as possible: to the frame or hook retainers of • Make certain that the load is se- the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains Towing Requirements cured in the trailer and that it will under the trailer tongue and al- To promote proper break-in of your not shift during travel. When low enough slack for turning cor- new vehicle drivetrain components trailering cargo that is not fully ners. the following guidelines are recom- secured, dynamic load shifts can • Vehicles with trailers should not mended: occur that may be difficult for the be parked on a grade. When driver to control. You could lose parking, apply the parking brake control of your vehicle and have on the tow vehicle. Always, block CAUTION! an accident. or "chock" the trailer wheels. • Do not tow a trailer at all during • All trailer hitches should be pro- • GCWR must not be exceeded. the first 805 km the new vehicle is fessionally installed on your ve- • Total weight must be distrib- driven. The engine, axle or other hicle. uted between the tow vehicle parts could be damaged. • When hauling cargo or towing a and the trailer such that the • Then, during the first 805 km trailer, do not overload your ve- following four ratings are not that a trailer is towed, do not hicle or trailer. Overloading can exceeded: drive over 80 km/h and do not cause a loss of control, poor per- 1. GVWR make starts at full throttle. This formance, or damage to brakes, helps the engine and other parts axle, engine, transmission, steer- 2. GTW of the vehicle wear in at the ing, suspension, chassis structure, 3. GAWR heavier loads. or tires. 4. Tongue weight rating for the (Continued) trailer hitch utilized.

279 Towing Requirements – Tires Towing Requirements – Trailer WARNING! • Do not attempt to tow a trailer Brakes • Do not connect trailer brakes to while using a compact spare tire. –Donot interconnect the hydraulic your vehicle's hydraulic brake • Proper tire inflation pressures are brake system or vacuum system of lines. It can overload your brake essential for the safe and satisfac- your vehicle with that of the trailer. system and cause it to fail. You tory operation of your vehicle. Re- This could cause inadequate brak- might not have brakes when you fer to “Tires – General Informa- ing and possible personal injury. need them and could have an action” in “Starting and Operating” – When towing a trailer equipped cident. for proper tire inflation procedures. with a hydraulic surge actuated • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When • Check the trailer tires for proper brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. towing, you should allow for ad- tire inflation pressures before ditional space between your ve- trailer usage. – Trailer brakes are recommended hicle and the vehicle in front of • Check for signs of tire wear or vis- for trailers over 450 kg and re- you. Failure to do so could result ible tire damage before towing a quired for trailers in excess of in an accident. trailer. Refer to “Tires – General 750 kg. Towing Requirements – Trailer Information” in “Starting and Op- Lights And Wiring erating” for the proper inspection CAUTION! Whenever you pull a trailer, regard- procedure. If the trailer weighs more than less of the trailer size, stop lights and • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires 450 kg loaded, it should have its turn signals on the trailer are required – General Information” in “Start- own brakes, and they should be of for motoring safety. ing and Operating” for proper tire adequate capacity. Failure to do replacement procedures. Replacing this could lead to accelerated brake The Trailer Tow Package may include tires with a higher load carrying lining wear, higher brake pedal ef- a seven-pin or a thirteen-pin wiring capacity will not increase the vehi- fort, and longer stopping distances. harness. Use a factory approved cle's GVWR and GAWR limits. trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

280 The electrical connections are all Seven - Pin Connector Details Thirteen - Pin Connector complete to the vehicle but you must Wire Details mate the harness to a trailer connec- Pin Function Color Pin Function Wire tor. 6 Stop Lights Red Color 7 Left Rear Position, Black 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow Side Marker 2 Rear Fog Light Blue Lights, and Rear 3 Ground/Common White Registration Plate Return for Con- Illumination De- tacts (Pins) 1 and 1 vice 2and4to82 1 The rear position registration 4 Right Turn Signal Green Seven - Pin Connector plate illumination device shall be 5 Right Rear Posi- Brown connected such that no light of the tion, Side Marker Seven - Pin Connector Details device has a common connection Lights, and Rear with both pins 5 and 7. Wire Registration Plate Pin Function Color Illumination De- b 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow vice. 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 6 Stop Lights Red 3 Ground/Common White 7 Left Rear Position, Black Return Side Marker Lights, and Rear 4 Right Turn Signal Green Registration Plate 5 Right Rear Posi- Brown Illumination De- tion, Side Marker vice 1 Lights, and Rear Thirteen - Pin Connector 8 Reverse Lights Red/ Registration Plate Black Illumination De- vice 1

281 Thirteen - Pin Connector TOWING TIPS Electronic Range Select (ERS) Details Before setting out on a trip, practice • When using the ERS shift control, Pin Function Wire turning, stopping and backing the select the highest gear range that Color trailer in an area away from heavy allows for adequate performance 9 Permanent Power Brown/ traffic. and avoids frequent downshifts. Supply (+12V) White For example, choose “4” if the de- Automatic Transmission 10 Power Supply Red sired speed can be maintained. Controlled by Ig- The DRIVE gear can be selected when Choose “3” or “2” if needed to nition Switch towing. However, if frequent shifting maintain the desired speed. occurs while in DRIVE, use the Elec- (+12V) • To prevent excess heat generation, tronic Range Select (ERS) shift con- 11 Return for Contact White avoid continuous driving at high trol to select a lower gear range. a (Pin) 10 2 RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as nec- 12 Reserve for Future Red/ NOTE: Using a lower gear range essary to avoid extended driving at Allocation ³ Blue while operating the vehicle under high RPM. Return to a higher gear 13 Return for Contact White heavy loading conditions will im- or vehicle speed when grade and (Pin) 9 2 prove performance and extend road conditions allow. transmission life by reducing ex- 1 The rear position registration Electronic Speed Control (for cessive shifting and heat build up. plate illumination device shall be versions/markets, where This action will also provide better connected such that no light of the provided) engine braking. device has a common connection • Do not use in hilly terrain or with with both pins 5 and 7. If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for 2 heavy loads. The three return circuits shall not more than 45 minutes of continuous be connected electrically in the operation, then change the transmis- • When using the speed control, if trailer. sion fluid and filter as specified for you experience speed drops greater ³ The allocation pin 12 has been "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer than 16 km/h, disengage until you changed from “Coding for coupled towing." Refer to the “Maintenance can get back to cruising speed. Trailer” to “Reserve for Future Schedule” for the proper maintenance Allocation.” intervals.

282 • Use speed control in flat terrain and Trailer Hitch Attaching Points with light loads to maximize fuel Your vehicle will require extra equip- efficiency. ment to tow a trailer safely and effi- Cooling System ciently. The trailer tow hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the To reduce potential for engine and provided attaching points on the ve- transmission overheating, take the hicle's frame. Refer to the following following actions: chart to determine the accurate at- City Driving taching points. Other equipment, such as trailer sway controls and When stopped for short periods, shift braking equipment, trailer equalizing the transmission into NEUTRAL and (leveling) equipment and low profile increase engine idle speed. mirrors, may also be required or Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Highway Driving strongly recommended. Points And Overhang Dimen- sions Reduce speed. Grand Voyager Air Conditioning A N/A Turn off temporarily. B 441.72 mm C 568.61 mm D 763.62 mm E (maximum 1185.40 mm overhang) F 670.20 mm

283 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground All Models Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Front OK Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK

RECREATIONAL TOWING – 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. CAUTION! ALL MODELS Place the transmission in PARK. Towing this vehicle in violation of Recreational towing is allowed ONLY 4. Properly secure the front wheels to the above requirements can cause if the front wheels are OFF the the dolly, following the dolly manu- severe transmission damage. Dam- ground. This may be accomplished facturer's instructions. age from improper towing is not using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If 5. Release the parking brake. covered under the New Vehicle using a tow dolly, follow this proce- Limited Warranty. dure: CAUTION! 1. Properly secure the dolly to the DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Dam- tow vehicle, following the dolly age to the drivetrain will result. manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

284 6

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

• HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...... 286 • IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...... 286 • WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . .287 • TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ...... 287 • JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...... 287 • JACK LOCATION ...... 288 • SPARE TIRE REMOVAL ...... 288 • TO ACCESS SPARE TIRE WINCH DRIVE NUT. . .288 • SPARE TIRE TOOLS...... 289 • SPARE TIRE REMOVAL INSTRUCTIONS .....289 • PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING ...... 290 • JACKING INSTRUCTIONS ...... 291 • SECURING THE SPARE TIRE ...... 294 • ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION ...... 295 • JUMP-STARTING ...... 296 • PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP-START...... 296 • JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE ...... 297 • FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...... 298 • TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...... 299 • SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ...... 300

285 HAZARD WARNING IF YOUR ENGINE CAUTION! FLASHERS OVERHEATS Driving with a hot cooling system The Hazard Warning flasher switch is In any of the following situations, you could damage your vehicle. If tem- located in the lower center area of the can reduce the potential for overheat- perature gauge reads “H”, pull over instrument panel. ing by taking the appropriate action. and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner • On the highways — slow down. Press the switch to turn on the turned off until the pointer drops Hazard Warning flasher. • In city traffic — while stopped, back into the normal range. If the When the switch is activated, all di- place the transmission in NEU- pointer remains on the “H”, turn rectional turn signals will flash on and TRAL, but do not increase engine the engine off immediately, and call off to warn oncoming traffic of an idle speed. for service. emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning NOTE: There are steps that you flashers. can take to slow down an impend- WARNING! ing overheat condition: This is an emergency warning system You or others can be badly burned and it should not be used when the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) vehicle is in motion. Use it when your on, turn it off. The A/C system or steam from your radiator. If you vehicle is disabled and it is creating a adds heat to the engine cooling see or hear steam coming from un- safety hazard for other motorists. system and turning the A/C off der the hood, do not open the hood can help remove this heat. until the radiator has had time to When you must leave the vehicle to cool. Never try to open a cooling seek assistance, the Hazard Warning • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, system pressure cap when the ra- flashers will continue to operate even diator or coolant bottle is hot. though the ignition is placed in the the mode control to floor and the OFF position. blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a NOTE: With extended use the supplement to the radiator and Hazard Warning flashers may aids in removing heat from the wear down your battery. engine cooling system.

286 WHEEL AND TIRE WARNING! TORQUE To avoid the risk of forcing the ve- SPECIFICATIONS hicle off the jack, do not tighten the Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very im- lug nuts fully until the vehicle has portant to ensure that the wheel is been lowered. Failure to follow this properly mounted to the vehicle. Any warning may result in personal in- time a wheel has been removed and jury. reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/ Wheel Mounting Surface bolts should be torqued using a prop- Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star JACKING AND TIRE erly calibrated torque wrench. pattern until each nut/bolt has been CHANGING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS tightened twice. WARNING! Lug Nut/ **Lug Lug • Do not attempt to change a tire on Bolt Nut/ Nut/Bolt the side of the vehicle close to Torque Bolt Socket moving traffic. Pull far enough Size Size off the road to avoid the danger of M12 x 135 N·m 19 mm being hit when operating the jack 1.25 or changing the wheel.

**Use only LANCIA recommended Torque Patterns (Continued) lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove After 40 km check the lug nut/bolt any dirt or oil before tightening. torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/ Inspect the wheel mounting surface bolts are properly seated against the prior to mounting the tire and remove wheel. any corrosion or loose particles.

287 WARNING! (Continued) TO ACCESS SPARE TIRE WINCH DRIVE NUT • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could To access the spare tire winch drive slip off the jack and fall on you. nut and lower the spare tire, you will You could be crushed. Never put need to refer to one of the following any part of your body under a center console configurations. vehicle that is on a jack. If you Super Console need to get under a raised vehicle, Jack And Tool Location take it to a service center where it Remove the pouch containing the For vehicles equipped with the Super can be raised on a lift. scissors jack, jack handle, and tools. Console, the spare tire winch assem- • Never start or run the engine bly drive nut is located beneath the while the vehicle is on a jack. SPARE TIRE REMOVAL console. • The jack is designed to be used as The spare tire is stowed inside a protec- a tool for changing tires only. The tive cover located under the center of jack should not be used to lift the the vehicle between the front doors by vehicle for service purposes. The means of a cable winch mechanism. vehicle should be jacked on a firm The “spare tire drive” nut is located on level surface only. Avoid ice or the floor, under a plastic cap at the slippery areas. front of the floor console or under front super console forward bin liner. JACK LOCATION Super Console The jack, jack handle and winch 1 — Lower Drawer 2 — Front Drawer handle tools are stowed behind the 3 — Front Drawer Liner rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area. Turn the two cover latches to release the cover. 1. Pull the lower drawer out from the rear of the floor console to gain clear access of the tire winch drive nut. Spare Tire Location 288 2. Open the front drawer to expose SPARE TIRE TOOLS the storage compartment. The tool pouch contains three pieces 3. Remove the liner from the con- and can be assembled into a spare tire sole's storage compartment to access hook; to remove the compact spare the spare tire winch drive nut. tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a Winch T-handle; to raise/ lower the compact spare tire/cover assembly. Assembling The Spare Tire Hook A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle B — Extension 1 C — Extension 2

SPARE TIRE REMOVAL Drive Nut Access INSTRUCTIONS Premium/Base/Cargo Center Console The spare tire is located under the vehicle beneath the center console area. Pull the Winch Cover assembly plug Assembled T-handle (for versions/markets, where pro- A — Spare Tire Hook/T-handle vided) to access the winch drive nut. B — Extension 1 C — Extension 2

Spare Tire And Cover 1. Assemble the spare tire tools into a Winch Cover Assembly Plug (for T-handle and place the square end versions/markets, where provided) over the spare tire winch drive nut.

289 2. Rotate the nut to the left until the NOTE: If either front tire is flat it WARNING! winch mechanism stops turning may be necessary to jack up the freely. This will allow enough slack in vehicle to remove the compact Do not attempt to change a tire on the cable to allow you to pull the spare spare tire/cover assembly from the side of the vehicle close to mov- tire out from underneath the vehicle. under the vehicle. ing traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when oper- 4. Stand the tire/cover assembly up- ating the jack or changing the CAUTION! right and remove the wheel spacer by wheel. The winch mechanism is designed squeezing the winch retaining tabs to- for use with the winch T-handle gether. Push the retainer through the 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning only. Use of an air wrench or other spare tire to release it from the wheel. flasher. power tools is not recommended 3. Set the parking brake. and can damage the winch. 4. Place the shift lever into PARK. 3. To remove the compact spare tire/ 5. Turn OFF the ignition. cover assembly, assemble the winch T-handle extensions to form a spare tire hook, and pull the spare tire out 6. Block both the from under the vehicle. front and rear of the wheel diago- Removing Wheel Spacer nally opposite the PREPARATIONS FOR jacking position. JACKING For example, if changing the right 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level front tire, block the left rear wheel. surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. NOTE: Passengers should not Pulling Spare Tire remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

290 General Information” for informa- JACKING INSTRUCTIONS WARNING! (Continued) tion about the spare tire, its use, • Only use the jack in the positions and operation. WARNING! indicated and for lifting this ve- 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the Carefully follow these tire changing hicle during a tire change. wheel lug nuts by turning them to the warnings to help prevent personal • If working on or near a roadway, left one turn while the wheel is still on injury or damage to your vehicle: be extremely careful of motor the ground. • Always park on a firm, level sur- traffic. face as far from the edge of the • To assure that spare tires, flat or 2. There are two jack engagement lo- roadway as possible before rais- inflated, are securely stowed, cations on each side of the vehicle ing the vehicle. spares must be stowed with the body. These locations are on the sill • Turn on the Hazard Warning valve stem facing the ground. flange of the vehicle body. flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in Jack Warning Label REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with CAUTION! Jack Locations the vehicle on a jack. Do not attempt to raise the vehicle • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle by jacking on locations other than CAUTION! when it is on a jack. those indicated in the Jacking In- Do not attempt to raise the vehicle • Do not get under the vehicle when structions for this vehicle. by jacking on locations other than it is on a jack. If you need to get those indicated. under a raised vehicle, take it to a NOTE: Refer to the “Compact service center where it can be Spare Tire” section of “Tires – raised on a lift.

(Continued) 291 Rear jack locations are between a pair NOTE: In some situations the 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the of down-facing tabs on the sill flange jack may need to be placed on its jack screw to the right, using the of the vehicle side body. side in order to be pushed under swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only the vehicle. Return the jack to its until the tire just clears the surface correct orientation once it is under and enough clearance is obtained to the vehicle. install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. WARNING! Being under a jacked-up vehicle is WARNING! dangerous. The vehicle could slip Raising the vehicle higher than nec- Rear Jacking Locations off the jack and fall on you. You essary can make the vehicle less could be crushed. Never get any stable. It could slip off the jack and Front jack location is on the sill flange part of your body under a vehicle hurt someone near it. Raise the ve- of the vehicle body and is located 150 that is on a jack. If you need to get hicle only enough to remove the mm from door edge. under a raised vehicle, take it to a tire. service center where it can be raised on a lift. 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel covers, remove 3. Place the wrench on the jack screw the cover from the wheel by hand. Do and turn to the right until the jack not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull head is properly engaged in the de- the wheel off the hub. scribed location. Do not raise the 6. Install the compact spare tire. vehicle until you are sure the jack Lightly tighten the lug nuts. Front Jacking Locations is securely engaged.

292 CAUTION! 7. Lower the vehicle by turning the 10. Place the deflated (flat) tire and jack screw to the left. compact spare tire cover assembly in Be sure to mount the spare tire with the rear cargo area. Do not stow the 8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. the valve stem facing outward. The deflated tire in the spare tire loca- Push down on the wrench while at the vehicle could be damaged if the tion. Have the full-sized tire repaired end of the handle for increased lever- spare tire is mounted incorrectly. or replaced, as soon as possible. age. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tight- 11. Stow the cable and wheel spacer ened twice. Refer to “Torque Specifi- before driving the vehicle. Reas- cations” in this section for proper semble the winch handle extensions to wheel lug nut torque. If in doubt form a “T” and fit the winch T-handle about the correct tightness, have them over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to checked with a torque wrench by your the right until the winch mechanism authorized dealer or at a service sta- clicks at least three times. tion. NOTE: Refer to the “Spare Tire Mounting Spare Tire 9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed Tools” section for instructions on position. assembling the T-handle. WARNING! 12. Stow the jack, jack handle and To avoid the risk of forcing the ve- WARNING! winch handle tools back in the stow- hicle off the jack, do not tighten the A loose tire or jack thrown forward age compartment. wheel nuts fully until the vehicle in a collision or hard stop could 13. Check the compact spare tire has been lowered. Failure to follow endanger the occupants of the ve- pressure as soon as possible. Correct this warning may result in personal hicle. Always stow the jack parts the tire pressure, as required. injury. and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire NOTE: Do not install the wheel repaired or replaced immediately. cover on the compact spare.

293 SECURING THE SPARE CAUTION! WARNING! TIRE The winch mechanism is designed Verify that both retainer tabs of the 1. Assemble the winch handle exten- for use with the winch T-handle wheel spacer have been properly sions to form a T-handle and fit the only. Use of an air wrench or other extended through the center of the winch T-handle over the drive nut. power tools is not recommended wheel and spare tire/cover assem- Rotate the nut to the left until the and can damage the winch. bly. Failure to properly engage both winch mechanism stops turning retainer tabs could result in loss of freely. This will allow enough slack in 2. Assemble the winch handle exten- the spare tire and cover assembly, the cable to allow you to pull the sions to form the spare tire hook, and which will cause vehicle damage wheel spacer out from under the ve- pull the wheel spacer from under the and may cause loss of vehicle con- hicle. vehicle. trol. 3. Turn the compact spare tire so that 4. Using the winch T-handle, rotate the valve stem is down, and place the WARNING! the drive nut to the right until the tire into the spare tire/cover assembly. compact spare tire/cover assembly is A loose compact spare tire/cover Slide the wheel spacer through the drawn into place against the under- assembly, thrown forward in a col- center of the wheel and spare tire/ side of the vehicle. lision or hard stop could endanger cover assembly, so that the two re- the occupants of the vehicle. Al- tainer tabs snap out and engage the 5. Continue to rotate the nut to the ways stow the compact spare tire spare tire cover on the opposite side. right until you hear the winch mecha- with the cover assembly in the place nism click three times. It cannot be provided. overtightened. Check under the ve- CAUTION! hicle to ensure the compact spare tire/ The compact spare tire/cover as- cover assembly is positioned correctly sembly must be used when the against the underside of the vehicle. compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire.

294 CAUTION! WARNING! The winch mechanism is designed To avoid the risk of forcing the ve- specifically to stow a compact spare hicle off the jack, do not tighten the tire only. Do not attempt to use the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle winch to stow the full size flat tire, has been lowered. Failure to follow or any other full-size tire. Vehicle this warning may result in personal damage may result. injury. Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap ROAD TIRE 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by INSTALLATION 1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover turning the jack handle counterclock- 2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting wise. Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Stud Covers 3 — Wheel Lug 6. Refer to “Torque Specifications” Nut in this section for correct lug nut 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. torque. 2. To ease the installation process for 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel 7. After 40 km check the lug nut steel wheels with wheel covers, install cover with the valve stem on the torque with a torque wrench to ensure two lug nuts on the mounting studs wheel. Install the cover by hand, that all lug nuts are properly seated which are on each side of the valve snapping the cover over the two lug against the wheel. stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone nuts. Do not use a hammer or exces- shaped end of the nut toward the sive force to install the cover. Vehicles Without Wheel Covers wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. the cone shaped end of the nut toward 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug the cone shaped end of the nut toward nuts. the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

295 WARNING! NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the To avoid the risk of forcing the ve- manufacturer’s operating instruc- hicle off the jack, do not tighten the tions and precautions. wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal CAUTION! injury. Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster Positive Battery Post 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by source with a system voltage turning the jack handle counterclock- greater than 12 Volts or damage to WARNING! wise. the battery, starter motor, alterna- • Take care to avoid the radiator 4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” tor or electrical system may occur. cooling fan whenever the hood is in this section for correct lug nut raised. It can start anytime the torque. ignition switch is ON. You can be WARNING! injured by moving fan blades. 5. After 40 km check the lug nut Do not attempt jump-starting if the torque with a torque wrench to ensure • Remove any metal jewelry such battery is frozen. It could rupture or as rings, watch bands and brace- that all lug nuts are properly seated explode and cause personal injury. against the wheel. lets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP-STARTING be seriously injured. JUMP-START • Batteries contain sulfuric acid If your vehicle has a discharged bat- The battery in your vehicle is located that can burn your skin or eyes tery it can be jump-started using a set on the left side of the engine compart- and generate hydrogen gas which of jumper cables and a battery in an- ment. is flammable and explosive. Keep other vehicle or by using a portable open flames or sparks away from battery booster pack. Jump-starting the battery. can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. 296 1. Set the parking brake, shift the CAUTION! WARNING! automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. Failure to follow these procedures Do not connect the jumper cable to could result in damage to the the negative (-) post of the dis- 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all charging system of the booster ve- charged battery. The resulting elec- unnecessary electrical accessories. hicle or the discharged vehicle. trical spark could cause the battery 3. If using another vehicle to jump- to explode and could result in per- 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the start the battery, park the vehicle sonal injury. Only use the specific jumper cable to the positive (+) post of within the jumper cables reach, set ground point, do not use any other the discharged vehicle. the parking brake and make sure the exposed metal parts. ignition is OFF. 2. Connect the opposite end of the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that positive (+) jumper cable to the posi- has the booster battery, let the engine tive (+) post of the booster battery. WARNING! idle a few minutes, and then start the Do not allow vehicles to touch each 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the engine in the vehicle with the dis- other as this could establish a jumper cable to the negative (-) post charged battery. Once the engine is ground connection and personal in- of the booster battery. started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: jury could result. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good 6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper JUMP-STARTING engine ground (exposed metal part of cable from the negative (-) post of the PROCEDURE the discharged vehicle’s engine) away vehicle with the discharged battery. from the battery and the fuel injection 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of system. WARNING! the jumper cable from the negative (-) Failure to follow this procedure post of the booster battery. could result in personal injury or 8. Disconnect the opposite end of the property damage due to battery ex- positive (+) jumper cable from the plosion. positive (+) post of the booster battery.

297 9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of REVERSE while gently pressing the CAUTION! the jumper cable from the positive (+) accelerator. Use the least amount of post of the discharged vehicle. accelerator pedal pressure that will • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle maintain the rocking motion, without by shifting between DRIVE and If frequent jump-starting is required spinning the wheels or racing the en- REVERSE, do not spin the to start your vehicle you should have gine. wheels faster than 24 km/h, or the battery and charging system in- drivetrain damage may result. spected at your authorized dealer. • Revving the engine or spinning CAUTION! the wheels too fast may lead to CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the transmission overheating and wheels may lead to transmission Accessories plugged into the vehicle failure. It can also damage the overheating and failure. Allow the power outlets draw power from the tires. Do not spin the wheels engine to idle with the transmission vehicle’s battery, even when not in above 48 km/h while in gear (no in NEUTRAL for at least one minute use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Even- transmission shifting occurring). after every five rocking-motion tually, if plugged in long enough cycles. This will minimize overheat- without engine operation, the vehi- ing and reduce the risk of transmis- WARNING! cle’s battery will discharge suffi- sion failure during prolonged efforts ciently to degrade battery life and/or Fast spinning tires can be danger- to free a stuck vehicle. prevent the engine from starting. ous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" switch, FREEING A STUCK even failure, of the axle and tires. A to place the Electronic Stability tire could explode and injure some- VEHICLE Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" one. Do not spin your vehicle's mode before rocking the vehicle. Re- If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, wheels faster than 48 km/h or for fer to “Electronic Brake Control Sys- longer than 30 seconds continu- sand or snow, it can often be moved tem” in “Starting and Operating” for using a rocking motion. Turn the steer- ously without stopping when you further information. Once the ve- are stuck and do not let anyone ing wheel right and left to clear the area hicle has been freed, press the "ESC around the front wheels. Then shift near a spinning wheel, no matter Off" switch again to restore "ESC what the speed. back and forth between DRIVE and On" mode.

298 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground ALL MODELS Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 40 km/h max speed Rear Wheel lift or Dolly Tow •24kmmax distance Front OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is If you must use the accessories (wip- CAUTION! required to prevent damage to your ers, defrosters, etc.) while being vehicle. Use only tow bars and other towed, the ignition must be in the • Do not use sling type equipment equipment designed for this purpose, ON/RUN position, not the ACC posi- when towing. Damage to the fas- following equipment manufacturer’s tion. cia will occur. instructions. Use of safety chains is • When securing the vehicle to a If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other flatbed truck, do not attach to refer to "Shift Lever Override" in this towing device to main structural front or rear suspension compo- section for instructions on shifting the members of the vehicle, not to bum- nents. Damage to your vehicle transmission out of PARK for towing. pers or associated brackets. State and may result from improper towing. local laws regarding vehicles under (Continued) tow must be observed.

299 vehicle may be flat towed (with all CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! four wheels on the ground) under the • Do not push or tow this vehicle following conditions: Towing this vehicle in violation of with another vehicle as damage to the above requirements can cause the bumper fascia and transmis- • The transmission must be in NEU- severe transmission damage. Dam- sion may result. TRAL. age from improper towing is not • If the vehicle being towed re- • The towing distance must not ex- covered under the New Vehicle quires steering, the ignition ceed 24 km. Limited Warranty. switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position, not in the LOCK/ • The towing speed must not exceed SHIFT LEVER 40 km/h. OFF position. OVERRIDE If the transmission is not operable, Without The Key Fob or the vehicle must be towed faster If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the Special care must be taken when the than 40 km/h or farther than PARK position, you can use the fol- vehicle is towed with the ignition in 24 km, it must be towed with the lowing procedure to temporarily the LOCK/OFF position. The only front wheels OFF the ground (us- move the shift lever: approved method of towing without ing a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or the key fob is with a flatbed truck. wheel lift equipment with the front 1. Turn the engine OFF. Proper towing equipment is necessary wheels raised). 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. to prevent damage to the vehicle. With Ignition Key CAUTION! The manufacturer recommends tow- Towing faster than 40 km/h or far- ing your vehicle with all four wheels ther than 24 km with front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If on the ground can cause severe flatbed equipment is not available, transmission damage. Such dam- and the transmission is operable, the age is not covered by the New Ve- hicle Limited Warranty. Shift Lever Override Access Cover

300 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the shift lever override access cover (located near the top right of the shift lever in the instrument panel). 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port, and push and hold the override release lever forward. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEU- TRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

301 302 7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ...... 305 • ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.8L DIESEL .....306 • ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .307 • REPLACEMENT PARTS ...... 307 • MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...... 307 • ENGINE OIL ...... 308 • ENGINE OIL FILTER ...... 309 • ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER ...... 309 • INTERVENTION REGENERATION STRATEGY – 2.8L DIESEL ENGINE ...... 310 • EXHAUST SYSTEM ...... 310 • MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY ...... 311 • AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE ...... 312 • BODY LUBRICATION ...... 313 • WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES ...... 314 • COOLING SYSTEM ...... 315 • BRAKES ...... 318 • AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 320 • APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM CORROSION...... 321 • CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL CUPHOLDERS ...... 324

303 • FUSES ...... 324 • TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE . .325 • VEHICLE STORAGE ...... 330 • REPLACEMENT BULBS ...... 330 • BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 330 • HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS (HID) (for versions/markets, where provided). .331 • QUAD HEADLAMPS (for versions/markets, where provided) ...... 331 • FRONT TURN SIGNAL AND SIDE MARKER LAMPS ...... 331 • SIDE REPEATER LAMPS ...... 332 • FOG LAMPS ...... 332 • REAR TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP LAMP . . .332 • CENTER HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL) ...... 333 • LICENSE LAMP ...... 333 • FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 333 • FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .334 • ENGINE ...... 334 • CHASSIS ...... 335 • ARRANGEMENTS FOR DEALING WITH THE VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE ...... 336

304 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Air Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Oil Fill 4 — Battery 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

305 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.8L DIESEL

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 — Brake Master Cylinder 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick 4 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

306 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC CAUTION! MAINTENANCE SYSTEM — OBD II • Prolonged driving with the MIL PROCEDURES Your vehicle is equipped with a soon could cause further damage to The pages that follow contain the re- phisticated Onboard Diagnostic sys- the emission control system. It quired maintenance services deter- tem called OBD II. This system moni- could also affect fuel economy mined by the engineers who designed tors the performance of the emissions, and driveability. The vehicle your vehicle. engine, and automatic transmission must be serviced before any emis- Besides those maintenance items control systems. When these systems sions tests can be performed. specified in the fixed maintenance are operating properly, your vehicle • If the MIL is flashing while the schedule, there are other components will provide excellent performance engine is running, severe catalytic which may require servicing or re- and fuel economy, as well as engine converter damage and power loss placement in the future. emissions well within current govern- will soon occur. Immediate ser- ment regulations. vice is required. CAUTION! If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the REPLACEMENT PARTS • Failure to properly maintain your “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” Use of genuine parts for normal/ vehicle or perform repairs and It will also store diagnostic codes and scheduled maintenance and repairs is service when necessary could re- other information to assist your ser- highly recommended to ensure the de- sult in more costly repairs, dam- vice technician in making repairs. Al- signed performance. Damage or fail- age to other components or nega- though your vehicle will usually be ures caused by the use of parts which tively impact vehicle drivable and not need towing, see are not quality-equivalent to genuine performance. Immediately have your authorized dealer for service as parts for maintenance and repairs will potential malfunctions examined soon as possible. not be covered by the manufacturer’s by an authorized dealership or warranty. qualified repair center. (Continued)

307 CAUTION! (Continued) ENGINE OIL CAUTION! • Car maintenance should be done Checking Oil Level Car maintenance should be done at at a LANCIA Dealership. For To assure proper engine lubrication, a LANCIA Dealership. For routine routine and minor maintenance the engine oil must be maintained at and minor maintenance operations operations you wish to carry out the correct level. Check the oil level at you wish to carry out yourself, we yourself, we do recommend you regular intervals, such as every fuel do recommend you have the proper have the proper equipment, stop. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare genuine LANCIA spare parts and parts and the necessary fluids; do the necessary fluids; do not how- The best time to check the engine oil not however carry out these opera- ever carry out these operations if level is about five minutes after a fully tions if you have no experience. you have no experience. warmed engine is shut off. Change Engine Oil – All Engines • Your vehicle has been built with Checking the oil while the vehicle is improved fluids that protect the on level ground will improve the ac- The oil change indicator system will performance and durability of curacy of the oil level readings. Main- remind you that it is time to take your your vehicle and also allow ex- tain the oil level between the MIN and vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. tended maintenance intervals. Do MAX markings on the dipstick. Add- Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for not use chemical flushes in these ing one quart of oil when the reading further information on this system. components as the chemicals can is at the MIN mark will result in a Engine Oil Selection – 3.6L damage your engine, transmis- MAX reading on these engines. Engine sion, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not cov- SAE Grade 5W-20 SELENIA K ered by the New Vehicle Limited CAUTION! POWER fully synthetic engine oil that Warranty. If a flush is needed be- Overfilling or underfilling will meets FIAT Qualification 9.55535- cause of component malfunction, cause oil aeration or loss of oil pres- CR1 API SN, ILSAC GF-5 or equiva- use only the specified fluid for the sure. This could damage your en- lent. flushing procedure. gine. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for

308 your vehicle. For information on en- Materials Added To Engine Oil this type for replacement. The quality gine oil filler cap location, refer to of replacement filters varies consider- Do not add any supplemental materi- “Engine Compartment” in “Main- ably. Only high quality filters should als, other than leak detection dyes, to taining Your Vehicle” for further in- be used to assure most efficient ser- the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi- formation. vice. LANCIA engine oil filters are a neered product and its performance high quality oil filter and are recom- NOTE: SAE Grade 5W-30 SELE- may be impaired by supplemental ad- mended. NIA K POWER fully synthetic en- ditives. gine oil that meets FIAT Qualifica- Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And ENGINE AIR CLEANER tion 9.55535-CR1 API SN, ILSAC Oil Filters FILTER GF-5 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting Fiat Care should be taken in disposing of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” 9.55535-CR1 is not available. used engine oil and oil filters from for the proper maintenance intervals. your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, Engine Oil Selection – 2.8L Diesel indiscriminately discarded, can pres- WARNING! Engine ent a problem to the environment. SAE Grade 5W-30 SELENIA MUL- Contact your authorized dealer, ser- The air induction system (air TIPOWER C3 fully synthetic engine vice station or governmental agency cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a oil that meets FIAT Qualification for advice on how and where used oil measure of protection in the case of 9.55535-S3, API SM/CF,ACEA C3 or and oil filters can be safely discarded engine backfire. Do not remove the equivalent. in your area. air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is Synthetic Engine Oils ENGINE OIL FILTER necessary for repair or mainte- You may use synthetic engine oils pro- The engine oil filter should be re- nance. Make sure that no one is vided the recommended oil quality placed with a new filter at every en- near the engine compartment be- requirements are met, and the recom- gine oil change. fore starting the vehicle with the air mended maintenance intervals for oil induction system (air cleaner, Engine Oil Filter Selection and filter changes are followed. hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do This manufacturer's engines have a so can result in serious personal full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of injury.

309 Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- WARNING! Selection tion Center (EVIC)” in “Understand- ing Your Instrument Panel” for fur- Exhaust gases can injure or kill. The quality of replacement engine air ther information. They contain carbon monoxide cleaner filters varies considerably. (CO), which is colorless and odor- Only high quality filters should be EXHAUST SYSTEM less. Breathing it can make you unused to assure most efficient service. conscious and can eventually poi- LANCIA engine air cleaner filters are The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body son you. To avoid breathing CO, a high quality filter and are recom- refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” mended. is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. in “Things To Know Before Start- INTERVENTION ing Your Vehicle” for further infor- Whenever a change is noticed in the mation. REGENERATION sound of the exhaust system, when STRATEGY – 2.8L DIESEL exhaust fumes can be detected inside ENGINE the vehicle, or when the underside or CAUTION! rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a This vehicle is equipped with a state- The catalytic converter requires the competent mechanic inspect the com- of-the-art engine and exhaust system use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded plete exhaust system and adjacent containing a diesel particulate filter. gasoline will destroy the effective- body areas for broken, damaged, de- The engine and exhaust after- ness of the catalyst as an emissions teriorated, or mispositioned parts. treatment system work together to control device and may seriously Open seams or loose connections meet the Emission standards. The reduce engine performance and could permit exhaust fumes to seep system manages engine combustion to cause serious damage to the engine. into the passenger compartment. In allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to addition, have the exhaust system in- Under normal operating conditions, trap and burn Particulate Matter spected each time the vehicle is raised the catalytic converter will not require (PM) pollutants with no input or infor lubrication or oil change. Replace maintenance. However, it is impor- teraction on your part. as required. tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

310 CAUTION! In unusual situations involving MAINTENANCE-FREE grossly malfunctioning engine opera- BATTERY Damage to the catalytic converter tion, a scorching odor may indicate can result if your vehicle is not kept severe and abnormal catalyst over- The top of the maintenance-free bat- in proper operating condition. In heating. If this occurs, the vehicle tery is permanently sealed. You will the event of engine malfunction, should be stopped, the engine shut never have to add water, nor is peri- particularly involving engine mis- OFF and the vehicle allowed to cool. odic maintenance required. fire or other apparent loss of perfor- Thereafter, service, including a mance, have your vehicle serviced tune-up to manufacturer's specifica- promptly. Continued operation of WARNING! tions, should be obtained immedi- your vehicle with a severe malfunc- ately. • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid tion could cause the converter to solution and can burn or even overheat, resulting in possible dam- To minimize the possibility of catalyst blind you. Do not allow battery age to the converter and the vehicle. damage: fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a bat- NOTE: Intentional tampering • Do not shut OFF the engine or in- tery when attaching clamps. If with emissions control systems can terrupt the ignition when the trans- acid splashes in eyes or on skin, result in civil penalties being as- mission is in gear and the vehicle is flush the area immediately with sessed against you. in motion. large amounts of water. • Do not try to start the engine by • Battery gas is flammable and ex- pushing or towing the vehicle. WARNING! plosive. Keep flame or sparks A hot exhaust system can start a fire • Do not idle the engine with any away from the battery. Do not use if you park over materials that can spark plug wires disconnected or a booster battery or any other burn. Such materials might be removed, such as when diagnostic booster source with an output grass or leaves coming into contact testing, or for prolonged periods greater than 12 Volts. Do not al- with your exhaust system. Do not during very rough idling or mal- low cable clamps to touch each park or operate your vehicle in ar- functioning operating conditions. other. eas where your exhaust system can (Continued) contact anything that can burn.

311 WARNING! (Continued) AIR CONDITIONER WARNING! MAINTENANCE • Battery posts, terminals, and re- • Use only refrigerants and com- lated accessories contain lead and For best possible performance, your pressor lubricants approved by lead compounds. Wash hands af- air conditioner should be checked and the manufacturer for your air ter handling. serviced by an authorized dealer at conditioning system. Some unap- the start of each warm season. This proved refrigerants are flam- service should include cleaning of the mable and can explode, injuring CAUTION! condenser fins and a system perfor- you. Other unapproved refriger- • It is essential when replacing the mance check. Drive belt tension ants or lubricants can cause the cables on the battery that the should also be checked at this time. system to fail, requiring costly re- positive cable is attached to the pairs. positive post and the negative CAUTION! • The air conditioning system con- cable is attached to the negative tains refrigerant under high pres- post. Battery posts are marked Do not use chemical flushes in your sure. To avoid risk of personal positive (+) and negative (-) and air conditioning system as the injury or damage to the system, are identified on the battery case. chemicals can damage your air adding refrigerant or any repair Cable clamps should be tight on conditioning components. Such requiring lines to be disconnected the terminal posts and free of cor- damage is not covered by the New should be done by an experienced rosion. Vehicle Limited Warranty. repairman. • If a “fast charger” is used while Refrigerant Recovery And the battery is in the vehicle, dis- Recycling connect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant charger to the battery. Do not use is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is a “fast charger” to provide start- endorsed by the Environmental Pro- ing voltage. tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

312 service be performed by authorized The A/C air filter is located in the 6. Install the A/C air filter with the dealer or other service facilities using fresh air inlet behind the glove box. arrow on the filter pointing toward recovery and recycling equipment. Perform the following procedure to the floor. When installing the filter replace the filter: cover, make sure the retaining tabs NOTE: Use only manufacturer fully engage the cover. approved A/C system PAG com- 1. Open the glove compartment and pressor oil and refrigerants. remove all contents. CAUTION! A/C Air Filter 2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door. The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direc- CAUTION! 3. Pivot the glove compartment tion through the filter. Failure to Car maintenance should be done at downward. properly install the filter will result a LANCIA Dealership. For routine 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs in the need to replace it more often. and minor maintenance operations that secure the filter cover to the you wish to carry out yourself, we HVAC housing, and remove the cover. 7. Rotate the glove compartment do recommend you have the proper door back into position. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare BODY LUBRICATION parts and the necessary fluids; do not however carry out these opera- Locks and all body pivot points, in- tions if you have no experience. cluding such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” tailgate, sliding doors and hood for the proper maintenance intervals. hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy op- WARNING! A/C Air Filter Replacement eration and to protect against rust and Do not remove the A/C air filter 5. Remove the A/C air filter by pull- wear. Prior to the application of any while the blower is operating or ing it straight out of the housing. lubricant, the parts concerned should personal injury may result. be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and

313 grease should be removed. Particular WINDSHIELD WIPER If any of these conditions are pres- attention should also be given to hood BLADES ent, clean the wiper blades or re- latching components to ensure proper place as necessary. function. When performing other un- Clean the rubber edges of the wiper Adding Washer Fluid derhood services, the hood latch, re- blades and the windshield periodi- lease mechanism and safety catch cally with a sponge or soft cloth and a The windshield, rear window, and should be cleaned and lubricated. mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will headlamp washers share a common remove accumulations of salt or road fluid reservoir. It is located in the en- The external lock cylinders should be film. gine compartment and should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in checked at regular intervals. Fill the the Fall and Spring. Apply a small Operation of the wipers on dry glass reservoir with windshield washer sol- amount of a high quality lubricant for long periods may cause deteriora- vent (not radiator antifreeze) and op- directly into the lock cylinder. tion of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to erate the system for a few seconds to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind- flush out any residual water. CAUTION! shield. When refilling the washer fluid reser- Car maintenance should be done at Avoid using the wiper blades to re- voir, apply some washer fluid to a a LANCIA Dealership. For routine move frost or ice from the windshield. cloth or towel and wipe the wiper and minor maintenance operations Keep the blade rubber out of contact blades clean. This will help blade per- you wish to carry out yourself, we with petroleum products such as en- formance. do recommend you have the proper gine oil, gasoline, etc. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare To prevent freeze-up of your wind- parts and the necessary fluids; do NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper shield washer system in cold weather, not however carry out these opera- blades varies depending on geo- select a solution or mixture that meets tions if you have no experience. graphical area and frequency of or exceeds the temperature range of use. Examples of poor blade per- your climate. This rating information formance include chattering, can be found on most washer fluid marks, water lines, and wet spots. containers.

314 The washer fluid reservoir will hold 4 CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) Liters of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates. Car maintenance should be done at • You or others can be badly a LANCIA Dealership. For routine burned by hot engine coolant and minor maintenance operations (antifreeze) or steam from your WARNING! you wish to carry out yourself, we radiator. If you see or hear steam Commercially available windshield do recommend you have the proper coming from under the hood, do washer solvents are flammable. equipment, genuine LANCIA spare not open the hood until the radia- They could ignite and burn you. parts and the necessary fluids; do tor has had time to cool. Never try Care must be exercised when filling not however carry out these opera- to open a cooling system pressure or working around the washer solutions if you have no experience. cap when the radiator is hot. tion. COOLING SYSTEM After the engine has warmed, operate CAUTION! the defroster for a few minutes to re- WARNING! Car maintenance should be done at duce the possibility of smearing or a LANCIA Dealership. For routine • When working near the radiator freezing the fluid on the cold wind- and minor maintenance operations cooling fan, disconnect the fan shield. Use All Weather Windshield you wish to carry out yourself, we motor lead or turn the ignition Washer Solution or equivalent, used do recommend you have the proper switch to the OFF position. The with water as directed on the con- equipment, genuine LANCIA spare fan is temperature controlled and tainer, aids cleaning action, reduces parts and the necessary fluids; do can start at anytime the ignition the freezing point to avoid line clog- not however carry out these opera- switch is in the ON position. ging, and is not harmful to paint or tions if you have no experience. trim. (Continued) Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

315 applicable). If the engine coolant (an- Cooling System – Drain, Flush, CAUTION! tifreeze) is dirty, the system should be And Refill drained, flushed, and refilled with • Mixing of engine coolant (anti- If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is fresh OAT coolant (conforming to freeze) other than specified en- dirty or contains a considerable FIAT Classification 9.55523) only by gine coolant (antifreeze), may re- amount of sediment, clean and flush an authorized dealer. Check the front sult in engine damage and may with a reliable cooling system cleaner. of the A/C condenser for any accumu- decrease corrosion protection. If a Follow with a thorough rinsing to relation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, non-specified engine coolant (an- move all deposits and chemicals. clean by gently spraying water from a tifreeze) is introduced into the Properly dispose of old engine coolant garden hose vertically down the face cooling system in an emergency, it (antifreeze). of the condenser. should be replaced with the speci- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” fied engine coolant (antifreeze) as Check the coolant recovery bottle for the proper maintenance intervals. soon as possible. tubing for brittle rubber, cracking , • Do not use plain water alone or Selection Of Coolant tears, cuts and tightness of the con- alcohol-based engine coolant nection at the bottle and radiator. In- Use only the manufacturer's recom- (antifreeze) products. Do not use spect the entire system for leaks. mended engine coolant (antifreeze). additional rust inhibitors or anti- With the engine at normal operating Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and rust products, as they may not be temperature (but not running), check Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your compatible with the radiator en- the cooling system pressure cap for Vehicle” for further information. gine coolant (antifreeze) and may proper vacuum sealing by draining a plug the radiator. small amount of engine coolant (anti- • This vehicle has not been de- freeze) from the radiator drain cock. signed for use with Propylene If the cap is sealing properly, the en- Glycol based engine coolant (an- gine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to tifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol drain from the coolant recovery based engine coolant (antifreeze) bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE is not recommended. COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

316 Adding Coolant life of the engine coolant (anti- WARNING! (Continued) freeze) and will require more fre- Your vehicle has been built with an quent coolant changes. • Do not use a pressure cap other improved engine coolant (antifreeze) than the one specified for your that allows extended maintenance in- Cooling System Pressure Cap vehicle. Personal injury or engine tervals. This engine coolant (anti- The cap must be fully tightened to damage may result. freeze) can be used up to ten years or prevent loss of coolant, and to ensure 240 000 km before replacement. To that coolant will return to the radiator Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant prevent reducing this extended main- from the coolant recovery bottle. Used ethylene glycol-based engine tenance period, it is important that coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated you use the same engine coolant (an- The cap should be inspected and substance requiring proper disposal. tifreeze) throughout the life of your cleaned if there is any accumulation of Check with your local authorities to vehicle. foreign material on the sealing surfaces. determine the disposal rules for your Use only high purity water such as community. To prevent ingestion by distilled or deionized water when WARNING! animals or children, do not store eth- mixing the water/engine coolant (an- • The warning words “DO NOT ylene glycol-based engine coolant tifreeze) solution. The use of lower OPEN HOT” on the cooling sys- (antifreeze) in open containers or al- quality water will reduce the amount tem pressure cap are a safety pre- low it to remain in puddles on the of corrosion protection in the engine caution. Never add engine cool- ground. If ingested by a child or pet, cooling system. ant (antifreeze) when the engine seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills im- Please note that it is the owner's re- is overheated. Do not loosen or mediately. sponsibility to maintain the proper remove the cap to cool an over- level of protection against freezing ac- heated engine. Heat causes pres- Coolant Level cording to the temperatures occurring sure to build up in the cooling The coolant bottle provides a quick in the area where the vehicle is oper- system. To prevent scalding or in- visual method for determining that ated. jury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or the coolant level is adequate. With the NOTE: Mixing engine coolant under pressure. engine cold, the level of the engine (antifreeze) types will decrease the (Continued) 317 coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant re- when the thermostat opens, allow- proper corrosion protection of your covery bottle should be between the ing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) engine, which contains aluminum ranges indicated on the bottle. to enter the radiator. components. The radiator normally remains com- If an examination of your engine com- • Make sure that the radiator and pletely full, so there is no need to partment shows no evidence of radia- coolant recovery bottle overflow remove the radiator cap unless check- tor or hose leaks, the vehicle may be hoses are not kinked or obstructed. safely driven. The vapor will soon dis- ing for engine coolant (antifreeze) • Keep the front of the radiator clean. sipate. freeze point or replacing the engine If your vehicle is equipped with air coolant (antifreeze). Advise your ser- • Do not overfill the coolant recovery conditioning, also keep the front of vice attendant of this. As long as the bottle. the condenser clean. engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs • Check the engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for to be checked once a month. freeze) freeze point in the radiator Summer or Winter operation. If re- and in the coolant recovery bottle. placement is ever necessary, install When additional engine coolant (an- If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs ONLY the correct type thermostat. tifreeze) is needed to maintain the to be added, contents of the coolant Other designs may result in unsat- proper level, it should be added to the recovery bottle must also be pro- isfactory coolant performance, coolant bottle. Do not overfill. tected against freezing. poor gas mileage, and increased Points To Remember • If frequent engine coolant (anti- emissions. NOTE: When the vehicle is freeze) additions are required, or if BRAKES stopped after a few kilometers of the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the en- In order to assure brake system per- operation, you may observe vapor formance, all brake system compo- coming from the front of the engine gine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. nents should be inspected periodi- compartment. This is normally a cally. Refer to the “Maintenance result of moisture from rain, snow, • Maintain engine coolant (anti- Schedule” for the proper maintenance or high humidity accumulating on freeze) concentration at 50% en- intervals. the radiator and being vaporized gine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for

318 WARNING! underhood services, or immediately if WARNING! the “Brake System Warning Light” Riding the brakes can lead to brake indicates system failure. • Use only manufacturer’s recom- failure and possibly an accident. mended brake fluid. Refer to “Flu- Driving with your foot resting or Clean the top of the master cylinder ids, Lubricants, and Genuine riding on the brake pedal can result area before removing the cap. Add Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve- in abnormally high brake tempera- fluid to bring the level up to the top of hicle” for further information. Us- tures, excessive lining wear, and the “FULL” mark on the side of the ing the wrong type of brake fluid possible brake damage. You would master cylinder reservoir. can severely damage your brake not have your full braking capacity Overfilling of fluid is not recom- system and/or impair its perfor- in an emergency. mended because it may cause leaking mance. The proper type of brake in the system. fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed CAUTION! Add enough fluid to bring the level up hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. Car maintenance should be done at to the requirements described on the • To avoid contamination from for- a LANCIA Dealership. For routine brake fluid reservoir. With disc eign matter or moisture, use only and minor maintenance operations brakes, fluid level can be expected to new brake fluid or fluid that has you wish to carry out yourself, we fall as the brake pads wear. However, been in a tightly closed container. do recommend you have the proper low fluid level may be caused by a Keep the master cylinder reservoir equipment, genuine LANCIA spare leak and a checkup may be needed. cap secured at all times. Brake fluid parts and the necessary fluids; do Use only manufacturer's recom- in a open container absorbs mois- not however carry out these opera- mended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, ture from the air resulting in a tions if you have no experience. Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in lower boiling point. This may cause “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur- it to boil unexpectedly during hard Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid ther information. or prolonged braking, resulting in Level Check sudden brake failure. This could The fluid level in the master cylinder result in a accident. should be checked when performing (Continued)

319 recommended fluid. No chemical diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using WARNING! (Continued) flushes should be used in any trans- transmission sealers as they may ad- • Overfilling the brake fluid reser- mission; only the approved lubricant versely affect seals. voir can result in spilling brake should be used. fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. CAUTION! Brake fluid can also damage CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your painted and vinyl surfaces, care Using a transmission fluid other transmission as the chemicals can should be taken to avoid its con- than the manufacturer’s recom- damage your transmission compo- tact with these surfaces. mended fluid may cause deteriora- nents. Such damage is not covered • Do not allow petroleum based tion in transmission shift quality by the New Vehicle Limited War- fluid to contaminate the brake and/or torque converter shudder, ranty. fluid. Brake seal components and will require more frequent fluid could be damaged, causing par- and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Fluid Level Check tial or complete brake failure. Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in The fluid level is preset at the factory This could result in an accident. this section for fluid specifications. and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Special Additives AUTOMATIC Routine fluid level checks are not re- TRANSMISSION The manufacturer strongly recom- quired, therefore the transmission mends against using any special addi- filler tube is capped and no dipstick is Selection Of Lubricant tives in the transmission. provided. Your authorized dealer can It is important to use the proper trans- check your transmission fluid level Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) mission fluid to ensure optimum using a special service dipstick. If you is an engineered product and its per- transmission performance and life. notice fluid leakage or transmission formance may be impaired by supple- Use only the manufacturer's specified malfunction, visit your authorized mental additives. Therefore, do not transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, dealer immediately to have the trans- add any fluid additives to the trans- Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this mission fluid level checked. Operating section for fluid specifications. It is mission. The only exception to this important to maintain the transmis- policy is the use of special dyes for sion fluid at the correct level using the 320 the vehicle with an improper fluid CAUTION! cold weather and other extreme con- level can cause severe transmission ditions will have an adverse effect on damage. Car maintenance should be done at paint, metal trim, and underbody a LANCIA Dealership. For routine protection. and minor maintenance operations CAUTION! you wish to carry out yourself, we The following maintenance recom- If a transmission fluid leak occurs, do recommend you have the proper mendations will enable you to obtain visit your authorized dealer imme- equipment, genuine LANCIA spare maximum benefit from the corrosion diately. Severe transmission dam- parts and the necessary fluids; do resistance built into your vehicle. age may occur. Your authorized not however carry out these opera- What Causes Corrosion? dealer has the proper tools to adjust tions if you have no experience. Corrosion is the result of deterioration the fluid level accurately. APPEARANCE CARE AND or removal of paint and protective Fluid And Filter Changes PROTECTION FROM coatings from your vehicle. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” CORROSION The most common causes are: for the proper maintenance intervals. Protection Of Body And Paint • Road salt, dirt and moisture accu- In addition, change the fluid and filter From Corrosion mulation. if the fluid becomes contaminated Vehicle body care requirements vary • Stone and gravel impact. (with water, etc.) or if the transmis- according to geographic locations and • Insects, tree sap and tar. sion is disassembled for any reason. usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those • Salt in the air near seacoast that are sprayed on trees and road localities. surfaces during other seasons are • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pol- highly corrosive to the metal in your lutants. vehicle. Outside parking, which ex- Washing poses your vehicle to airborne con- taminants, road surfaces on which the • Wash your vehicle regularly. Al- vehicle is operated, extreme hot or ways wash your vehicle in the shade

321 using a mild car wash soap, and • If you detect any stone chips or should be cleaned regularly with a rinse the panels completely with scratches in the paint, touch them mild soap and water to prevent corro- clear water. up immediately. The cost of such sion. repairs is considered the responsi- • Use a high quality cleaner wax to bility of the owner. remove road film, stains and to pro- CAUTION! • If your vehicle is damaged due to an tect your paint finish. Take care Do not use scouring pads, steel accident or similar cause which de- never to scratch the paint. wool, a bristle brush, or metal pol- stroys the paint and protective • Avoid using abrasive compounds ishes. Do not use oven cleaner. coating, have your vehicle repaired and power buffing that may dimin- These products may damage the as soon as possible. The cost of such ish the gloss or thin out the paint wheel’s protective finish. Avoid au- repairs is considered the responsi- finish. tomatic car washes that use acidic bility of the owner. solutions or harsh brushes that may • If you carry special cargo such as damage the wheel’s protective fin- CAUTION! chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, ish. Use only the approved wheel Do not use abrasive or strong clean- etc., be sure that such materials are cleaners or equivalent. ing materials such as steel wool or well packaged and sealed. scouring powder that will scratch Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning metal and painted surfaces. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel Procedure (for versions/markets, roads, consider mud or stone where provided) Special Care shields behind each wheel. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in • If you drive on salted or dusty roads • Use Touch Up Paint or equivalent the following manner: or if you drive near the ocean, hose on scratches as soon as possible. off the undercarriage at least once a Your authorized dealer has touch • Remove as much of the stain as month. up paint to match the color of your possible by blotting with a clean, vehicle. dry towel. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and Wheel And Wheel Trim Care • Blot any remaining stain with a rocker panels be kept clear and clean, damp towel. All wheels and wheel trim, especially open. aluminum and chrome plated wheels,

322 • For tough stains, apply a mild soap dirt can act as an abrasive and dam- Plastic is not as scratch resistant as solution to a clean, damp cloth and age the leather upholstery and should glass and therefore different lens remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp be removed promptly with a damp cleaning procedures must be fol- towel to remove soap residue. cloth. Care should be taken to avoid lowed. soaking your leather upholstery with • For grease stains, apply a high To minimize the possibility of scratch- any liquid. Please do not use polishes, quality cleaner to a clean, damp ing the lenses and reducing light out- oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- cloth and remove the stain. Use a put, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to fresh, damp towel to remove soap remove road dirt, wash with a mild clean your leather upholstery. Appli- residue. soap solution followed by rinsing. cation of a leather conditioner is not • Do not use any harsh solvents or required to maintain the original con- Do not use abrasive cleaning compo- any other form of protectants on dition. nents, solvents, steel wool or other Stain Repel products. aggressive material to clean the lenses. Interior Care WARNING! Glass Surfaces Instrument Panel Surfaces Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are poten- All glass surfaces should be cleaned The instrument panel cover has a low tially flammable, and if used in on a regular basis with any commer- glare surface, which minimizes reflec- closed areas they may cause respi- cial household-type glass cleaner. tions in the windshield. Do not use ratory harm. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. protectants or other products which Use caution when cleaning the inside may cause undesirable reflections. Cleaning Headlights rear window equipped with electric Use soap and warm water to restore Your vehicle is equipped with plastic defrosters or the right rear quarter the low glare surface. headlights and fog lights that are window equipped with the radio an- Cleaning Leather Upholstery lighter and less susceptible to stone tenna. Do not use scrapers or other breakage than glass headlights. sharp instrument that may scratch Your leather upholstery can be best the elements. preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of

323 When cleaning the rear view mirror, not remove the belts from the car to excess water from the liner and dry spray cleaner on the towel or rag that wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. the outer surfaces with a clean soft you are using. Do not spray cleaner cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed directly on the mirror. or worn or if the buckles do not work Installation Cleaning Plastic Instrument properly. Place the liner into the cupholder Cluster Lenses CLEANING THE drawer and press the liner into place The lenses in front of the instruments INSTRUMENT PANEL so that the retention tabs seat into the in this vehicle are molded in clear CUPHOLDERS corresponding openings in the plastic. When cleaning the lenses, drawer. care must be taken to avoid scratch- Removal ing the plastic. FUSES Pull the flexible liner from the cup- 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild holder drawer starting at one edge to soap solution may be used, but do not ease removal. WARNING! use high alcohol content or abrasive Cleaning • When replacing a blown fuse, al- cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean ways use an appropriate replace- The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, with a clean damp rag. ment fuse with the same amp rat- or you may follow the cleaning proce- ing as the original fuse. Never 2. Dry with a soft cloth. dure below. replace a fuse with another fuse of Seat Belt Maintenance Soak the liner in a mixture of medium higher amp rating. Never replace Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts hot tap water and one teaspoon of a blown fuse with metal wires or with chemical solvents or abrasive mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for any other material. Failure to use cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. approximately 30 minutes. After 30 proper fuses may result in serious Sun damage can also weaken the fab- minutes, pull the liner from the water personal injury, fire and/or prop- ric. and dip it back into the water about erty damage. six times. This will loosen any remain- If the belts need cleaning, use a mild (Continued) ing debris. Rinse the liner thoroughly soap solution or lukewarm water. Do under warm running water. Shake the

324 component may be printed or em- WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) bossed on the inside of the cover. • Before replacing a fuse, make • When replacing a blown fuse, it is sure that the ignition is off and important to use only a fuse hav- that all the other services are ing the correct amperage rating. switched off and/or disengaged. The use of a fuse with a rating • If the replaced fuse blows again, other than indicated may result in contact an authorized dealer. a dangerous electrical system • If a general protection fuse for overload. If a properly rated fuse safety systems (air bag system, continues to blow, it indicates a braking system), power unit sys- Totally Integrated Power Module problem in the circuit that must tems (engine system, gearbox sys- be corrected. tem) or steering system blows, CAUTION! The numbers inside the TIPM cover contact an authorized dealer. • When installing the Totally Inte- correspond to the following table. TOTALLY INTEGRATED grated Power Module cover, it is POWER MODULE important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully The Totally Integrated Power Module latched. Failure to do so may al- is located in the engine compartment low water to get into the Inte- near the battery. Refer to the appli- grated Power Module, and possi- cable “Engine Compartment” illus- bly result in a electrical system tration in this section. This center failure. contains cartridge fuses and mini- fuses. A label that identifies each (Continued) FUSES/TIPM Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description J1 40 Amp Green — Power Folding Seat J2 30 Amp Pink — Power Liftgate Module

325 FUSES/TIPM Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description J3 30 Amp Pink — Rear Door Module (RR Door Node) J4 25 Amp Natural — Driver Door Node J5 25 Amp Natural — Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green — Antilock Brakes Pump/Stability Control Sys- tem J7 30 Amp Pink — Antilock Brakes Valve/Stability Control Sys- tem J8 40 Amp Green — Power Memory Seat (for versions/markets, where provided) J9 40 Amp Green — Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle Motor/Flex Fuel J10 30 Amp Pink — Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve J11 30 Amp Pink — Power Sliding Door Module/Anti–Theft Mod- ule Relay Lock Feed J12 30 Amp Pink Rear Blower Motor/ RAD Fan J13 60 Amp Yellow — Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main J14 40 Amp Green — Rear Window Defogger J15 40 Amp Green — Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green — Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue — Powertrain Control Module Trans Range J19 60 Amp Yellow — Radiator Fan J20 30 Amp Pink — Front Wiper LO/HI J21 20 Amp Blue — Front/Rear Washer

326 FUSES/TIPM Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description J22 25 Amp Natural — Sunroof Module M1 — 15 Amp Blue Rear Center Brake Lamp/Brake Switch M2 — 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Lighting/Fog Lamps M3 — 20 Amp Yellow Front/Rear Axle Locker/Vacuum Pump Motor M4 — 10 Amp Red Trailer Tow M5 — 25 Amp Natural Inverter M6 — 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1 (ACC), Rain Sensor M7 — 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) M8 — 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat (for versions/markets, where provided) M9 — 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat (for versions/markets, where provided) M10 — 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw — Video System, DVD, Hands-Free Module, Vanity Lamp, Streaming Video Module M11 — 10 Amp Red Ignition Off Draw – Climate Control System M12 — 30 Amp Green Amplifier (AMP)/Radio M13 — 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw— Instrument Cluster, SI- REN, Clock Module, Multi-Function Control Switch/ITM M14 — 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse

327 FUSES/TIPM Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description M15 — 20 Amp Yellow Rear View Mirror, Instrument Cluster, Multi- Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Moni- tor, Glow Plug Module – Export Diesel Only, Assy-Shifter (Hall Effect), Acoustic Noise Cancellation M16 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module/Occupant Classification Mod- ule M17 — 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp, Running Lamps M18 — 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp M19 — 25 Amp Natural Automatic Shutdown #1 and #2 M20 — 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster Interior Light, Switch Bank, Steering Column Module, Switch Steer- ing Wheel M21 — 20 Amp Yellow Automatic Shutdown #3 M22 — 10 Amp Red Right Horn (HI/LOW) M23 — 10 Amp Red Left Horn (HI/LOW) M24 — 25 Amp Natural Rear Wiper M25 — 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only M26 — 10 Amp Red Power Mirror Switch, Driver Window Switch M27 — 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch, Wireless Control Module, Keyless Entry Module, Steering Column Lock M28 — 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module, Transmission Feed, Transmission Control Module

328 FUSES/TIPM Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description M29 — 10 Amp Red Occupant Classification Module M30 — 15 Amp Blue Rear Wiper Module, Power Folding Mirror, J1962 Diagnostic Feed M31 — 20 Amp Yellow Back-Up Lamps M32 — 10 Amp Red Airbag Module, TT EUROPE M33 — 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module, Transmission Control Module M34 — 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Heater Climate Control System Module, Headlamp Wash, Compass , IR Sen- sor, Rear Camera, Lamp Door FT Drv/Pass, Lamp Flashlight, AHLM, Relay Diesel Cabin Heater, Rad Fan Diesel M35 — 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors M36 — 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #3 M37 — 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes, Stability Control System, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control M38 — 25 Amp Natural Door Lock/Unlock Motors, Liftgate Lock/ Unlock Motors The heated mirrors, lower instrument fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker column. If you experience temporary panel power outlet and removable located under the driver's seat. The or permanent loss of these systems, floor console, when in the front posi- power windows are fused by a 25 see your authorized dealer for service. tion are fused with self-resetting fuses Amp circuit breaker located under the that are only serviceable by an autho- instrument panel near the steering rized dealer. The power seats are

329 VEHICLE STORAGE Front Door Courtesy Lamp . . 578 Front Position Lamp . . . . . W5W Front Fog Lamp ...... H11 If you are leaving your vehicle dor- Front Header Reading Lamps mant for more than 21 days, you may (for versions/markets, where Side Repeater Lamps . . . . W5W want to take steps to protect your provided) ...... 578 Backup Lamp ...... P27/7W battery. You may do the following: Liftgate Lamp(s) ...... 578 Tail/Stop Lamp ...... LED • Remove the 60 Amp cartridge in Overhead Console Reading (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) the Totally Integrated Power Mod- Lamps ...... PC579 Rear Turn Signal ule (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off Removable Console Lamp Lamps ...... PY27 / 7W Draw (IOD). (for versions/markets, where Rear Fog Lamps ...... LED • Or, disconnect the negative cable provided) ...... 194 (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) from the battery. Center High-Mounted Stop Visor Vanity Lamps .....6501966 • Anytime you store your vehicle, or Lamp ...... LED keep it out of service for two weeks NOTE: For lighted switches, see (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) or more, run the air conditioning your dealer for replacement in- License Plate Lamp .....W5W system at idle for about five min- structions. utes in the fresh air and high blower All of the interior bulbs are glass BULB REPLACEMENT setting. This will ensure adequate wedge base or glass cartridge types. system lubrication to minimize the NOTE: Lens fogging can occur Aluminum base bulbs are not ap- possibility of compressor damage under certain atmospheric condi- proved and should not be used for when the system is started again. tions. This will usually clear as at- replacement. mospheric conditions change to REPLACEMENT BULBS allow the condensation to change LIGHT BULBS – back into a vapor. Turning the LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb Number lamps on will usually accelerate Interior Bulb Number Headlamp ...... H11 the clearing process. Center & Rear Dome Lamp . . 578 Headlamp (HID) (for versions/ markets, where provided) . . D1S Center & Rear Reading Front Turn Signal . . . PY27 / 7W Lamps ...... 578 330 CAUTION! WARNING! 3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the headlamp housing. Where possible, it is advisable to A transient high voltage occurs at have bulbs changed at a LANCIA the bulb sockets of High Intensity 4. Install the new headlamp bulb and Dealership. Proper operation and Discharge (HID) headlamps when twist until locked into the headlamp orientation of the external lights are the headlamp switch is turned ON. housing. essential for driving safety and It may cause serious electrical complying with the law. shock or electrocution if not ser- CAUTION! viced properly. See your authorized Do not touch the new bulb with HIGH INTENSITY dealer for service. DISCHARGE HEADLAMPS your fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the (HID) (for versions/markets, NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge bulb comes in contact with an oily where provided) (HID) headlamps, when the head- surface, clean the bulb with rub- The headlamps are a type of high lamps are turned on, there is a bing alcohol. voltage discharge tube. High voltage blue hue to the lamps. This dimin- 5. Reconnect the wiring connector to can remain in the circuit even with the ishes and becomes more white af- the bulb. headlamp switch off and the key re- ter approximately 10 seconds, as moved. Because of this, you should the system charges. FRONT TURN SIGNAL AND not attempt to service a headlamp QUAD HEADLAMPS (for SIDE MARKER LAMPS bulb yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an au- versions/markets, where Access to change the turn signal or thorized dealer for service. provided) side marker bulb is from the rear of the headlamp housing. 1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at the rear of the 1. Twist the turn signal or side headlamp housing. marker socket to remove the socket. 2. Release the two tabs on the side of 2. Pull bulb from the socket. the connector and remove the connec- 3. Replace the bulb and reinstall tor from the bulb. socket. 331 SIDE REPEATER LAMPS 8. Push side repeater lamp to com- 5. Install the bulb and connector as- press metal spring clip and seat re- sembly into the fog lamp housing. The side repeater lamps are located in taining tab into fender. both front fenders. 6. Close and secure the access door FOG LAMPS cover under bumper fascia. 1. Push the side repeater lamp to the right and release retaining tab on the NOTE: Access to the fog lamp REAR TURN SIGNAL AND left. bulb is from the rear of the fascia. BACKUP LAMP On the left rear side of the fascia, 2. Pull side repeater lamp out and remove the push pin and lower the 1. Raise the liftgate. disengage bulb socket from lamp. hinged access door on the air dam. 2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by 3. Press, then rotate and pull bulb 1. Remove access cover from under removing the two screws from the in- from socket. bumper fascia. board side. Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the 2. Remove bulb from lamp. outboard side to disengage the two 3. Disconnect wire harness connec- ball studs. tor. 4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb. Side Repeater Bulb Replacement 4. Install bulb to socket. CAUTION! 5. Push the lamp socket into the side Do not touch the new bulb with repeater lamp. your fingers. Oil contamination will NOTE: 6. Position metal spring clip in severely shorten bulb life. If the • If a screwdriver is used, make fender hole notch. bulb comes in contact with an oily sure a soft material is placed be- surface, clean the bulb with rub- tween the vehicle body and tool 7. Position side repeater lamp to hole bing alcohol. so not to scratch the paint. in fender.

332 • The PRY location is best closest CENTER HIGH-MOUNTED 1. Remove the two lens assembly to the studs while dislodging STOP LAMP (CHMSL) mounting screws. them separately. The CHMSL uses LED lights are not 2. Remove the bulb from the socket. 3. Twist the socket and remove it serviceable. The CHMSL must be re- Replace the bulb and reattach the lens from the lamp assembly. placed as an assembly, see your au- assembly. 4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the thorized dealer. socket. LICENSE LAMP 5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the There are two license plate lamps, and socket, and reattach the lamp assem- they are located under the tailgate bly. lamp bar and above the license plate. FLUID CAPACITIES

Metric Fuel (Approximate) 76 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3.6L Engine 5.6 Liters 2.8L Diesel Engine 6.6 Liters Cooling System * 3.6L Engine 12.6 Liters 2.8L Diesel Engine 13.8 Liters * Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.8 Liters for versions/markets, where provided with a rear heater.

333 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS ENGINE Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts) Red protective agent with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethyl glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifica- Engine Coolant* tions, FIAT Classification 9.55523 (PARAFLU UP Contractual Technical Ref- erence N° F101.M01. Cooling circuit usage percentage: 50% water 50% PARAFLU UP [**]) SAE Grade 5W-20 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine*** 9.55535-CR1, API SN, ILSAC GF-5 (SELENIA K POWER, Contractual Tech- nical Reference N° F042.F11) SAE Grade 5W-30 fully synthetic engine oil that meets FIAT Classification Engine Oil – 2.8L Diesel Engine*** 9.55535-S3, API SM/CF, ACEA C3 (SELENIA MULTIPOWER C3, Contrac- tual Technical Reference N° F102.F11) Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use OEM Original Equipment Spark Plugs (Gap 1.1 mm) Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine Research Octane Number (RON) of 91 or higher Fuel Selection – 2.8L Diesel Engine 50 Cetane or higher (Less than 15 ppm Sulfur). Additive for diesel with antifreeze and protective action for diesel engines. Diesel Fuel Additive – 2.8L Diesel (TUTELA DIESEL ART, Contractual Technical Reference N° F601.L06. To be Engine mixed with the diesel fuel: 25 cc per 10 litres) * Do not top up or mix with fluids *** Lubricants with ACEA C3 perfor- with one of the recommended lubri- with different specifications. mance as a minimum may be used for cants as soon as possible. Using prod- ** For particularly harsh climate con- Diesel engines in an emergency, where ucts with specifications lower than ditions, a mixture of 60% PARA- no original products are available. In ILSAC GF-5 for gasoline engines or FLUUP and 40% demineralised wa- such event, the engine may not pro- lower than ACEA C3 for Diesel enter is recommended. vide optimal performance. We recom- gines may cause engine damage not mend having the lubricant replaced covered by warranty.

334 CHASSIS

Component Fluids and Lubricants Specs (Genuine Parts) Automatic Transmission Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4 (TUTELA TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Con- tractual Technical Reference N° F108.F11) Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder Synthetic fluid that meets FIAT Classification 9.55597, FMVSS n° 116, DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J-1704 (TUTELA TOP 4, Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.A93) Power Steering Reservoir Totally synthetic lubricant that meets FIAT Classification 9.55550-AV4 (TUTELA TRANSMISSION FORCE4, Con- tractual Technical Reference N° F108.F11) Windshield/Rear Window Washer Fluid Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants that meets FIAT Classification 9.55522, CUNA NC 956-11 (TUTELA PRO- FESSIONAL SC35, Contractual Technical Reference N° F201.D02)

335 ARRANGEMENTS FOR In all European Union countries, until You can find further information on DEALING WITH THE 1st January 2007, only vehicles regis- these collection and scrapping centres VEHICLE AT THE END OF tered after 1st July 2002 were col- either from a LANCIA or LANCIA lected free of charge, while since 2007 Commercial Vehicle Dealership or by ITS LIFE collection has been free of charge irre- calling the freephone number LANCIA has been committed for spective of the year of registration as 00800 526242 00 or by going on the many years to safeguarding the envi- long as the vehicle contains its basic LANCIA website. components (in particular, the engine ronment through the constant im- (*) Vehicle for transporting passen- and bodywork) and has no additional provement of its production processes gers with a maximum of nine seats waste. and manufacturing products that are and a total permitted weight of 3.5 t increasingly “eco-compatible”. To hand your vehicle over at the end To give customers the best possible of its life without extra cost, go to one service in terms of respecting environ- of our Dealerships or LANCIA- mental laws and in response to Euro- authorized collection and scrapping pean Directive 2000/53/EC govern- centres. ing vehicles at the end of their life, These centres have been carefully LANCIA is offering its customers the chosen to offer high quality service for opportunity of handing over their ve- the collection, treatment and recy- hicle* at the end of its life without cling of unused vehicles with respect incurring any additional costs. to the environment. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value.

336 337 338 8

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ...... 340 • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE – GASOLINE ENGINE ...... 340 • MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE – DIESEL ENGINE ...... 343

339 MAINTENANCE The oil change indicator system will • Under no circumstances should SCHEDULE remind you that it is time to take your oil change intervals exceed vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. 12,000 km or 12 months, which- ever comes first. MAINTENANCE On Electronic Vehicle Information SCHEDULE – GASOLINE Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles “Oil • Rotate the tires at the first sign of ENGINE Change Required” will be displayed irregular wear. in the EVIC and a single chime will The Scheduled Maintenance services Your authorized dealer will reset the sound, indicating that an oil change is listed in this manual must be done at oil change indicator message after necessary. the times or mileages specified to pro- completing the scheduled oil change. tect your vehicle warranty and ensure NOTE: the best vehicle performance and reli- • The oil change indicator mes- CAUTION! ability. More frequent maintenance sage will not monitor the time may be needed for vehicles in severe Failure to perform the required since the last oil change. Change operating conditions, such as dusty maintenance items may result in your vehicles oil if it has been 12 areas and very short trip driving. In- damage to the vehicle. months since your last oil spection and service should also be change even if the oil change in- done anytime a malfunction is sus- dicator message is NOT illumi- pected. nated. Thousands Of Kilometers 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Change the engine oil and replace oil filter. (**) Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. • Check battery charge status and possibly recharge. •• •••••• Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. • • ••••••

340 Thousands Of Kilometers 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passen- •••••••• ger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check operation of windshield washer system and adjust jets if •••••••• necessary. Check windshield/rear window wiper blade position/wear. • • •••••• Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and cleanliness •••••••• and lubrication of linkages. Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes), •••••••• rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check conditions and wear of front disc brake pads. • • •••••• Check conditions and wear of rear disc brake pads. • • •••••• Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes, windshield •••••••• washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.). Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive belt/s. • • Check exhaust gas emissions. • • •••••• Check engine management system operation (via diagnostic •••••••• socket). Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. • • • • Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter. (*) • Replace spark plugs. (***) • Replace air filter cartridge. • • • •

341 Thousands Of Kilometers 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Change brake fluid (or every 24 months). • • Replace pollen filter. •• •••••• (*) Change the automatic transmis- • power steering fluid; • short, repeated journeys (less than sion fluid and filter(s) at 96 km or 48 • tire inflation pressure and 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside months if using your vehicle for any of condition; temperatures; the following: city driving, short (less • engine often idling or driving long than 7-8 km) and repeated journeys, • operation of lighting system (head- distances at low speeds or long pe- or frequent trailer or caravan towing lights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); riods of idleness. (**) The oil and oil filter replacement You should perform the following in- must be carried out when indicated by • operation of windshield washer/ spections more frequently than shown a warning light or message on the wiper system and positioning/wear on the Scheduled Servicing Plan: instrument panel, or in any case every of windshield/rear window wiper 12 months. blades. • check front disc brake pad condi- (***) The spark plug change in Km Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if tions and wear; based only monthly intervals do not required, the engine oil level and au- • check cleanliness of hood and trunk apply. tomatic transmission fluid level (four- locks, cleanliness and lubrication of speed automatic only). Periodic Checks linkage; Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car Every 1,000 km or before long jour- • visually inspect conditions of: en- neys, check and, if necessary, restore: If the car is used mainly under one of gine, transmission, pipes and hoses the following conditions: (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and • engine coolant; rubber elements (boots - sleeves - • towing a trailer or caravan; • brake fluid; bushes - etc.); • dusty roads; • power steering fluid; • check battery charge and battery • windshield washer fluid level; fluid level (electrolyte);

342 • visually inspect condition of the ac- electronic and mechanical tools that and a single chime will sound, indi- cessory drive belts; can help prevent future costly repairs. cating that an oil change is necessary. • check and, if necessary, change en- The maintenance intervals shown Based on engine operation conditions, gine oil and replace oil filter; should be performed as indicated in the oil change indicator message will this section. illuminate, this means that service is • check and, if necessary, replace pol- required for your vehicle. Have your len filter; NOTE: vehicle serviced as soon as possible, • check and, if necessary, replace air • Under no circumstances should within the next 805 km. cleaner. oil change intervals exceed 25,000 km or 12 months, which- Your dealer will reset the oil change MAINTENANCE ever comes first. indicator message after completing SCHEDULE – DIESEL the scheduled oil change. If this ENGINE • Rotate the tires at the first sign of scheduled oil change is performed by irregular wear. someone other than your dealer the To help you have the best driving message can be reset by referring to experience possible, the manufacturer CAUTION! the steps described under “Instru- has identified the specific vehicle ment Cluster Description/Odometer/ maintenance service intervals that are Failure to perform the required Trip Odometer” in "Understanding required to keep your vehicle operat- maintenance items may result in Your Instrument Panel” for further ing properly and safely. damage to the vehicle. information. The manufacturer recommends that Diesel Models with Diesel Required Maintenance Intervals these maintenance intervals be per- Particulate Filter (DPF) Refer to the Maintenance Schedules formed at your selling dealer. The The oil change indicator system will on the following pages for the re- technicians at your dealership know remind you that it is time to take your quired maintenance intervals. your vehicle best, and have access to vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. factory trained information, genuine LANCIA parts, and specially designed A “CHANgE OIL” message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer

343 Thousands Of Kilometers 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 Change engine oil and replace oil filter. (**) Rotate Tires. • ••••••••• Check battery charge status and possibly re- •••••••••• charge. Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if •••••••••• necessary. Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove •••••••••• compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check operation of windscreen washer system •••••••••• and adjust jets if necessary. Check windshield/rear window wiper blade •••••••••• position/wear. Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks and •••••••••• cleanliness and lubrication of linkages. Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - •••••••••• fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.). Check conditions and wear of front disc brake pads. •••••••••• Check conditions and wear of rear disc brake pads. ••••••••••

344 Thousands Of Kilometers 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes, windshield washer, battery, engine cool- •••••••••• ant, etc.). Visually inspect the condition of accessory drive ••• belt/s. Check toothed timing drive belt conditions. • Check exhaust gas emissions. • ••••••••• Check engine management system operation (via •••••••••• diagnostic socket). Adjust parking brake shoes as necessary. • ••••••••• Change the automatic transmission fluid and fil- • ter (***). Replace fuel filter (diesel version). • • • • • Replace accessory drive belt/s. • • • Replace toothed timing drive belt (*). • Replace air filter cartridge. • ••••••••• Change brake fluid (or every 24 months). • • • Replace pollen filter. • ••••••••• (*) Regardless of the distance cov- (**) The oil and oil filter replacement (***) Change the automatic transmis- ered, the timing belt must be changed must be carried out when indicated by sion fluid and filter(s) at 100 km or every 4 years for particularly de- a warning light or message on the 60 months if using your vehicle for any manding use (cold climates, city driv- instrument panel, or in any case every of the following: city driving, short (less ing, long periods of idling) or at least 12 months. than 7-8 km) and repeated journeys, or every 5 years. frequent trailer or caravan towing.

345 Periodic Checks Heavy-Duty Use Of The Car • visually inspect conditions of: en- Every 1,000 km or before long jour- If the car is used mainly under one of gine, transmission, pipes and hoses neys, check and, if necessary, restore: the following conditions: (exhaust - fuel system - brakes) and rubber elements (boots - sleeves - • engine coolant; • towing a trailer or caravan; bushes - etc.); • brake fluid; • dusty roads; • check battery charge and battery • power steering fluid; • short, repeated journeys (less than fluid level (electrolyte); 7-8 km) at sub-zero outside • windshield washer fluid level; • visually inspect condition of the ac- temperatures; • power steering fluid; cessory drive belts; • engine often idling or driving long • check and, if necessary, change en- • tire inflation pressure and distances at low speeds or long pe- gine oil and replace oil filter; condition; riods of idleness. • check and, if necessary, replace pol- • operation of lighting system (head- You should perform the following in- len filter; lights, direction indicators, hazard spections more frequently than shown warning lights, etc.); on the Scheduled Servicing Plan: • check and, if necessary, replace air cleaner. • operation of windshield washer/ • check front disc brake pad condi- wiper system and positioning/wear tions and wear; of windshield/rear window wiper blades. • check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of Every 3,000 km, check and top up, if linkage; required, the engine oil level and automatic transmission fluid level (four- speed automatic only).

346 9

INDEX

347 Adding Engine Coolant Ashtray ...... 150, 153 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . .313 (Antifreeze) ...... 317 Assist, Hill Start...... 252 B-Pillar Location ...... 256 Adding Fuel ...... 275 Auto Down Power Windows ...... 27 Brake Assist System ...... 249 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 314 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...... 82 Brake Control System, Additives, Fuel...... 274 Automatic Door Locks ...... 24 Electronic ...... 248 Adjustable Pedals ...... 135 Automatic Headlights ...... 129 Brakes ...... 318 Airbag ...... 46, 52 Automatic Oil Change Indicator . .184 Brake System...... 318 Airbag Deployment ...... 53 Automatic Temperature Control Fluid Check ...... 319 Airbag Light ...... 51, 55, 69, 176 (ATC) ...... 219 Parking ...... 245 Airbag Maintenance ...... 54 Automatic Transaxle Warning Light ...... 176 Airbag, Side ...... 49, 50, 52 Adding Fluid ...... 320 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . .237 Airbag, Window Fluid Level Check ...... 320 Break-In Recommendations, New (Side Curtain)...... 49, 50, 52 Automatic Vehicle ...... 68 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Transmission ...... 236, 320, 321 Bulb Replacement ...... 330 Cleaner Filter) ...... 309 Adding Fluid ...... 321 Bulbs, Light...... 71, 330 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . .312 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . .321 Air Conditioning Filter.....225, 313 Fluid Change ...... 321 Calibration, Compass ...... 187 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . .225 Fluid Type ...... 320 Camera, Rear ...... 143 Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . .222 Gear Ranges ...... 238 Capacities, Fluid ...... 333 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .312 Special Additives ...... 320 Caps, Filler Air Conditioning System . . .219, 312 Auto Up Power Windows ...... 28 Fuel ...... 275 Air Pressure, Tires ...... 259 Oil (Engine) ...... 306 Alarm Light ...... 176 Battery ...... 311 Power Steering ...... 245 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...7 Jump Starting ...... 296 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 69 Antifreeze Keyless Transmitter Replacement Cargo Area Features ...... 160 (Engine Coolant) . . .316, 317, 333 (RKE) ...... 21 Cargo Compartment ...... 160 Disposal ...... 317 Saving Feature (Protection) . .131 Luggage Carrier ...... 161 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 173 Belts, Seat...... 69 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...... 156 Anti-Theft System ...... 16 Blind Spot Monitoring...... 84 Car Washes ...... 321

348 Cellular Phone ...... 89, 218 Conserving Fuel ...... 184 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 299 Center High Mounted Stop Console ...... 156 Disposal Light ...... 333 Console, Floor ...... 156 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . .317 Chains, Tire ...... 265 Console, Overhead ...... 144 Door Locks ...... 22 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 287 Console, Removable ...... 159 Door Locks, Automatic ...... 24 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 253 Cool Down, Turbo ...... 235 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Check Engine Light (Malfunction Cooling System ...... 315 Shallow Standing Water .....243 Indicator Light) ...... 174 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . .317 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . .68 Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Coolant Capacity ...... 333 Economy ...... 184 Checks, Safety ...... 68 Coolant Level ...... 315, 317 Child Restraint ...... 56 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . .317 Child Safety Locks ...... 31 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 149 Drain, Flush, and Refill .....316 Electric Remote Mirrors...... 83 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 274 Inspection ...... 317 Cleaning Electronic Brake Control System . .248 Points to Remember ...... 318 Wheels ...... 322 Brake Assist System ...... 249 Selection of Coolant Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Climate Control ...... 219 (Antifreeze) ...... 316, 333, 334 Coat Hook ...... 156 Control) ...... 136 Corrosion Protection ...... 321 Electronic Stability Control Coin Holder ...... 156 Cupholders ...... 151, 324 (ESC) ...... 249 Cold Weather Operation ...... 233 Electronic Vehicle Information Center Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . .218 Data Recorder, Event ...... 55 (EVIC) ...... 143, 178 Compact Spare Tire ...... 262 Defroster, Windshield ...... 69 Emergency, In Case of Compass...... 186 Diagnostic System, Onboard.....307 Hazard Warning Flasher .....286 Compass Calibration...... 187 Diesel Fuel...... 275, 334 Jacking ...... 287, 291 Compass Variance ...... 187 Diesel Fuel Requirements...... 275 Jump Starting ...... 296 Computer, Trip/Travel...... 185 Dipsticks Overheating ...... 286 Connector Automatic Transaxle ...... 320 Engine ...... 306 UCI ...... 193 Oil (Engine) ...... 308 Air Cleaner ...... 309 Universal Consumer Interface Power Steering ...... 245 Break-In Recommendations . . .68 (UCI) ...... 193 Checking Oil Level ...... 308 349 Compartment ...... 305 Filler Location Fuel ...... 176 Additives ...... 274 Compartment Identification . .305 Filters Conserving ...... 184 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .315, 334 Air Cleaner ...... 309 Diesel ...... 275, 334 Cooling ...... 315 Air Conditioning ...... 225, 313 Ethanol ...... 273 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 69 Engine Oil ...... 309, 334 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . .176, 275 Fails to Start ...... 233 Engine Oil Disposal ...... 309 Filler Door (Gas Cap) ...... 176 Flooded, Starting ...... 233 Flashers Gasoline ...... 272 Fuel Requirements ...... 333 Hazard Warning ...... 286 Gauge ...... 176 Oil ...... 308, 333, 334 Turn Signal ...... 71, 172, 331 Light ...... 182 Oil Change Interval . . . .184, 308 Flash-To-Pass ...... 132 Octane Rating ...... 272, 334 Oil Filler Cap ...... 306 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 233 Requirements ...... 333 Oil Filter ...... 309 Floor Console ...... 156 Saver Mode ...... 184 Oil Selection ...... 308, 333 Fluid Capacities ...... 333 Specifications ...... 334 Oil Synthetic ...... 309 Fluid Leaks...... 71 Tank Capacity ...... 333 Fluid Level Checks Overheating ...... 286 Fueling...... 275 Automatic Transaxle ...... 320 Starting ...... 231 Fuel Optimizer...... 184 Brake ...... 319 Temperature Gauge ...... 178 Fuel Saver...... 184 Cooling System ...... 315 Enhanced Accident Response Fuses ...... 324 Feature ...... 53 Power Steering ...... 245 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Entry System, Illuminated ...... 18 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...... 275 Parts...... 334 Ethanol ...... 273 Gasoline, Clean Air...... 274 Fog Lights ...... 130, 172, 332 Event Data Recorder...... 55 Gasoline (Fuel) ...... 272 Fog Light Service ...... 332 Exhaust Gas Caution...... 35, 69 Conserving ...... 184 Fog Lights, Rear ...... 178 Exhaust System ...... 69, 310 Gauges Fold in Floor (Stow `n Go) Coolant Temperature ...... 178 Exterior Folding Mirrors ...... 83 Seating ...... 117 Fuel ...... 176 Exterior Lights ...... 71 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle...... 298 Speedometer ...... 176 Fuel ...... 272, 275 Fabric Care ...... 323 Tachometer ...... 172 Adding ...... 275

350 Gear Ranges ...... 238 Ignition ...... 14 Key, Replacement...... 16 Gear Select Lever Override .....300 Key ...... 14 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...... 15 General Information ...... 16, 22 Ignition Key Removal ...... 14 Glass Cleaning ...... 323 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 15 Lap/Shoulder Belts...... 36 Gross Axle Weight Rating...... 276 Information Center, Vehicle .....178 Latches ...... 71 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.....276 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 82 Hood ...... 128 Instrument Cluster ...... 170, 172 Leaks, Fluid ...... 71 Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) . . .89 Instrument Panel and Controls . . .169 Leveling, Headlight ...... 132 Hazard Instrument Panel Cover...... 323 Life of Tires ...... 264 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . .324 Liftgate ...... 33 Shallow Standing Water .....243 Integrated Power Module Light Bulbs ...... 71 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 286 (Fuses) ...... 325 Lights ...... 71 Headlights ...... 129 Interior Appearance Care...... 323 Airbag ...... 51, 55, 69, 176 Cleaning ...... 323 Interior Lights ...... 129 Alarm ...... 176 Leveling ...... 132 Intervention Regeneration Anti-Lock ...... 173 Passing ...... 132 Strategy ...... 310 Automatic Headlights ...... 129 Time Delay ...... 130 Introduction ...... 4 Back-Up ...... 332 Washers ...... 130, 163 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control Battery Saver ...... 131 Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . .110 Headlight Washers ...... 163 Brake Assist Warning ...... 251 Head Restraints ...... 115 Brake Warning ...... 176 Jack Location ...... 288 Heated Mirrors ...... 83 Bulb Replacement ...... 330 Jack Operation...... 287 Heated Seats ...... 113 Center Mounted Stop ...... 333 Jump Starting ...... 296 High Beam/Low Beam Select Electronic Stability Program (ESP) (Dimmer) Switch ...... 131 Indicator ...... 251 Hill Start Assist ...... 252 Key-In Reminder ...... 14 Exterior ...... 71 Hood Release...... 128 Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 24, 232 Fog ...... 130, 172, 332 Hook, Coat ...... 156 Keyless Entry System ...... 18 Hazard Warning Flasher .....286 Keyless Go ...... 186 Headlight Leveling ...... 132 Key, Programming ...... 16

351 Headlight Switch ...... 129 Locks...... 22 Mode High Beam Indicator ...... 172 Automatic Door ...... 24 Fuel Saver ...... 184 High Beam/Low Beam Select . .131 Door ...... 22 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...7 Interior ...... 129 Steering Wheel ...... 15 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . .266 License ...... 333 Lubrication, Body ...... 313 Multi-Function Control Lever. . . .131 Low Fuel ...... 182 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) .....161 Malfunction Indicator Lug Nuts ...... 287 Navigation System (Check Engine) ...... 174 (Uconnect® gps) ...... 143, 193 Park ...... 129, 331 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 311 New Vehicle Break-In Period .....68 Passing ...... 132 Maintenance Procedures ...... 307 Reading ...... 145 Maintenance Schedule .....340, 343 Occupant Restraints .....35, 50, 53 Rear Fog ...... 178 Malfunction Indicator Light Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ...... 49, 50, 52 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 177 (Check Engine) ...... 174 Octane Rating, Gasoline Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . .176 Map/Reading Lights ...... 145 (Fuel) ...... 272, 334 Service ...... 330 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . .125 Odometer ...... 172 Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Memory Seat ...... 83, 125 Oil Change Indicator . .173, 184, 343 Indicator) ...... 174 Methanol ...... 273 Oil Change Indicator, Side Repeater ...... 332 Methanol Fuel ...... 273 Reset ...... 173, 184, 343 SmartBeams ...... 132 Mini-Trip Computer ...... 185 Oil, Engine ...... 308, 334 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . .176 Mirrors...... 82 Capacity ...... 333 Tire Pressure Monitoring Automatic Dimming ...... 82 Change Interval ...... 184, 308 (TPMS) ...... 173 Electric Remote ...... 83 Checking ...... 308 Traction Control ...... 251 Exterior Folding ...... 83 Disposal ...... 309 Turn Signal ...... 71, 331, 332 Heated ...... 83 Filter ...... 309, 334 Wait to Start ...... 182 Memory ...... 125 Filter Disposal ...... 309 Warning (Instrument Cluster Outside ...... 82 Description) ...... 172 Recommendation ...... 308, 333 Rearview ...... 82 Loading Vehicle ...... 156 Synthetic ...... 309 Vanity ...... 84 Tires ...... 256 Viscosity ...... 333

352 Oil Filter, Change ...... 309 Steering ...... 244, 245 Repeater Lights, Side ...... 332 Onboard Diagnostic System .....307 Windows ...... 26 Replacement Keys ...... 16 Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ..6 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . .46 Replacement Parts ...... 307 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 82 Preparation for Jacking ...... 290 Replacement Tires ...... 264 Overhead Console...... 144 Pretensioners Resetting Oil Change Overhead Travel Information Seat Belts ...... 41 Indicator ...... 173, 184 Center...... 144 Programmable Electronic Restraint, Head ...... 115 Overheating, Engine ...... 178, 286 Features ...... 189 Restraints, Child ...... 56 Owner's Manual Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . .298 (Operator Manual) ...... 6 Radial Ply Tires ...... 260 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) .....161 Radio Operation...... 218 Rotation, Tires ...... 266 Paint Care...... 321 Radio Remote Controls ...... 217 Parking Brake ...... 245 Radio (Sound Systems) ...... 193 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .....69 ParkSense System, Rear ...... 138 Rear Air Conditioning ...... 222 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....71 Pedals, Adjustable ...... 135 Rear Camera ...... 143 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 69 Personal Settings ...... 189 Rear Cross Path ...... 87 Safety Information, Tire ...... 252 Pets, Transporting ...... 68 Rear Fog Lights ...... 178 Safety Tips ...... 68 Phone, Cellular ...... 89 Rear ParkSense System ...... 138 Schedule, Maintenance . . . .340, 343 Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) . .89 Rearview Mirrors ...... 82 Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 324 Placard, Tire and Loading Rear Window Features ...... 160 Seat Belt Reminder...... 45 Information ...... 256 Reclining Front Seats ...... 115 Seat Belts ...... 35, 69 Power Recorder, Event Data ...... 55 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .....39 Door Locks ...... 23 Recreational Towing ...... 284 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Lift Gate ...... 33 Refrigerant ...... 312 Anchorage ...... 39 Mirrors ...... 83 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 45 And Pregnant Women ...... 46 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .....18 Child Restraint ...... 56 Outlet) ...... 149 Remote Sound System (Radio) Front Seat ...... 36 Seats ...... 111 Controls ...... 217 Inspection ...... 69 Sliding Door ...... 29 Removable Floor Console...... 159 Pretensioners ...... 41 353 Rear Seat ...... 36 Sound Systems (Radio) ...... 193 Sunglasses Storage ...... 145 Seats ...... 111 Spare Tire ...... 262, 263, 288 Supplemental Restraint System - Adjustment ...... 111, 114 Spark Plugs...... 334 Airbag ...... 46 Fold in Floor (Stow `n Go) . . .117 Specifications Sway Control, Trailer ...... 251 Heated ...... 113 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 334 Synthetic Engine Oil ...... 309 Memory ...... 125 Oil ...... 334 System, Navigation Power ...... 111 Speed Control (Cruise Control). . .136 (Uconnect® gps)...... 193 Reclining ...... 115 Speedometer ...... 176 Stow `n Go (Fold in Floor) . . .117 Starting ...... 231 Tachometer ...... 172 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ....16 Automatic Transmission .....231 Telescoping Steering Column . . . .135 Selection of Coolant Cold Weather ...... 233 Temperature Control, Automatic (Antifreeze) ...... 316, 334 Engine Fails to Start ...... 233 (ATC) ...... 219 Temperature Gauge, Engine Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...... 15 Starting and Operating ...... 231 Coolant ...... 178, 286 Sentry Key Programming ...... 16 Starting Procedures ...... 231 Tilt Steering Column...... 135 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 16 Starting Procedures (Diesel Tire and Loading Information Service Engine Soon Light Engines) ...... 234 Placard ...... 256 (Malfunction Indicator) ...... 174 Steering Tire Markings ...... 252 Settings, Personal ...... 189 Power ...... 244, 245 Tires...... 71, 258 Shift Lever Override ...... 300 Tilt Column ...... 135 Aging (Life of Tires) ...... 264 Shoulder Belts ...... 36 Wheel Lock ...... 15 Air Pressure ...... 258 Side Airbag ...... 52 Wheel, Tilt ...... 135 Chains ...... 265 Side Repeater Lights...... 332 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . .217 Changing ...... 287 Signals, Turn ...... 71, 131, 172, Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Compact Spare ...... 262 331, 332 System Controls ...... 217 General Information ...... 258 Sliding Door ...... 29 Storage...... 330 High Speed ...... 260 SmartBeams ...... 132 Storage Bin ...... 153 Inflation Pressures ...... 259 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .....265 Storage, Vehicle ...... 225, 330 Jacking ...... 287, 291 Snow Tires ...... 261 Storing Your Vehicle ...... 330 Life of Tires ...... 264 Sound Systems...... 193 Stow `n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . .117 354 Load Capacity ...... 256, 257 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . .278 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...7 Pressure Monitor System Wiring ...... 280 Vehicle Storage...... 225, 330 (TPMS) ...... 266 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 278 Voice Recognition System (VR). . .107 Pressure Warning Light .....173 Trailer Weight ...... 278 Radial ...... 260 Transmission ...... 320 Wait to Start Light ...... 182 Replacement ...... 264 Automatic ...... 236, 320 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 286 Rotation ...... 266 Fluid ...... 320 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Safety ...... 252, 258 Transmitter Battery Service Description) ...... 172 Sizes ...... 253 (Remote Keyless Entry) ...... 21 Warnings and Cautions ...... 7 Snow Tires ...... 261 Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry Washer Spare Tire ...... 288 (RKE)...... 18 Adding Fluid ...... 314 Spinning ...... 263 Transporting Pets...... 68 Washers, Headlight...... 163 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 264 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 264 Washing Vehicle ...... 321 Tire Safety Information ...... 252 Trip Odometer ...... 172 Water Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . .278 Turbo Cool Down ...... 235 Driving Through ...... 243 Towing ...... 276 Turn Signals . . . .131, 172, 331, 332 Wheel and Wheel Trim ...... 322 Disabled Vehicle ...... 299 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care.....322 Guide ...... 278 UCI Connector...... 193 Wind Buffeting ...... 29, 148 Recreational ...... 284 Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) . . .89 Window Fogging ...... 225 Weight ...... 278 Umbrella Holder ...... 154 Windows...... 26 Traction ...... 242 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Power ...... 26 Traction Control...... 248 Connector ...... 193 Windshield Defroster ...... 69 Traction Control Switch...... 248 Upholstery Care ...... 323 Windshield Washers ...... 314 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .....251 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 314 Vanity Mirrors ...... 84 Trailer Towing ...... 276 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 314 Variance, Compass ...... 187 Cooling System Tips ...... 283 Vehicle Identification Number Hitches ...... 283 (VIN) ...... 7 Minimum Requirements .....279 Vehicle Loading ...... 257

355 Notes

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Parts & Services - Technical Services - Service Engineering Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia) Print n. 530.02.324 - 09/2013 - Edition 1 WHY CHOOSE GENUINE PARTS

Owner Handbook